JP2021023591A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To provide a highly amusing game machine regarding a change in a game state.SOLUTION: A game machine is configured so as to start a first specific game after completion of a special game when the special game of a first bonus in a first jackpot is executed and so as to start a second specific game when electric support satisfies 20 to 60 conditions without execution of a special game during execution of the first specific game, and an execution probability of a special game in which the first specific game is performed after completion of the special game is set to 40% for possibly leading to a first bonus in the first jackpot regarding a first random number value pertaining to a special pattern 1 and is set to 100% possibly leading to a first bonus in a fourth jackpot regarding a second random number value in the first random number value pertaining to a game in the special pattern 1 and in the second random number value pertaining to a game in a special pattern 2.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 27

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine that uses a gaming ball as a gaming medium.

Generally, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine, a jackpot lottery with a predetermined probability is performed based on the game ball entering the starting port in the gaming area, and if the jackpot lottery is won, the jackpot game state is entered. There is a type that has transitioned and allowed the player to win a large number of prize balls. Furthermore, this type of pachinko gaming machine is equipped with a function to change the gaming state to probability fluctuation, time reduction, etc. in a specific case, and makes effective use of these gaming states (specific gaming states) to make the game taste (interesting). Gender) is being enhanced.
Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2017-093531

By the way, in the recent gaming machines as described above, the conditions for transitioning to various specific gaming states, the content of the specific gaming state, and what kind of production the specific gaming state should be like are the tastes of the game. It is an important matter to improve.

The present invention has been made in view of these problems, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine having a high taste for changes in a gaming state.

In order to solve the above problems, the present invention comprises an effect operation means (such as a lever device unit provided with an operation button) capable of inputting an operation for an effect by a player.
It is provided with an effect control means capable of performing effect control based on an operation input to the effect operation means.
The effect control means can execute a continuous operation effect that progresses based on a continuous operation (long press, etc.) on the effect operation means or an opening operation for ending the continuous operation.
As the operation valid period of the effect operation means in the continuous operation effect, a first valid period (button operation valid period, etc.) for prompting the player to perform the continuous operation on the effect operation means, and the opening operation to the player. There is a second validity period to encourage
In the first valid period, based on the continuous operation of the effect operation means, the expectation suggestion information (background color, etc.), which is an effect display regarding the feasibility of the special game, is changed to a higher expectation. Enable and
A gaming machine characterized in that, in the second valid period, the effect display of the continuous operation effect (such as an effect using a development destination panel) is started based on the completion of the continuous operation for the effect operation means. Is.

According to the present invention, it is possible to provide a gaming machine having a high taste for changes in the gaming state.

It is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine of one Example of this invention. It is a rear view of a pachinko gaming machine. It is a block diagram which shows the function of a pachinko game machine. It is a block diagram which shows the main board structure of a pachinko gaming machine. (A) is a front view showing a substrate case in a state where the main substrate is housed, and (b) is a partial cross-sectional view schematically showing a portion along the line AA in (a). It is a block diagram which shows the basic functional means of a main board, a sub-main board, and a sub-sub board. It is explanatory drawing which shows the main symbol display board of the main control display device. (A) is an explanatory diagram showing a display example during the change of the effect symbol in the effect display device, and (b) is an explanatory diagram showing a display example while the effect symbol is also stopped. (A) is a chart showing a hit / fail determination table, and (b) is a chart showing a variation pattern table for removal. (A) is a chart showing a jackpot symbol determination table for the first lottery, and (b) is a chart showing a jackpot symbol determination table for the second lottery. The chart showing the fluctuation pattern table used at the time of disconnection, and (b) is the chart showing the fluctuation pattern table used at the time of 4R jackpot. Is a chart showing the winning value and the payout rate for each set value. (A) is a chart showing a look-ahead determination table, and (b) is a chart showing a look-ahead code correspondence table. It is a flowchart which shows the process at the time of power-on in a main board. It is a flowchart which shows the initial setting process. It is a flowchart which shows the setting value change process. It is a flowchart which shows the game progress interrupt processing in a main board. It is a flowchart which shows the lottery determination process in a main board. It is a flowchart which shows the power-off process in a main board. (A) is a perspective view showing a state in which the operation buttons, the cross keys, and their surroundings are viewed from the front upper side, and (b) is an explanatory view schematically showing the configuration of the right side unit. (A) is a perspective view showing a lever device before the operation button is projected, (b) is a perspective view showing a lever device in which the lever is raised and the operation button is projected, and (c) is a lever in which the lever is tilted. It is a perspective view which shows the apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the sub-main initial setting process in a sub-main board. It is a flowchart which shows the main processing in a sub-main board. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interrupt processing in a sub-main board. (A) is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a big hit start demo screen, (b) is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a screen during a round, and (c) is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a hit-time specific effect screen. (A) is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a hitting specific effect screen different from FIG. 25 (c), (b) is an explanatory diagram showing an example of an inter-round effect screen, and (c) is a hit different from (a). It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the medium specific effect screen. It is explanatory drawing which shows roughly the flow (game flow) of a game which becomes a standard (subject). It is a chart which shows the relationship between the type of a special symbol and the content of a specific game at the time of passing through a probability variation operation area. It is a chart which shows the relationship between the type of a special symbol and the content of a specific game when the probability variation operation area has not passed. (A) is an explanatory diagram showing an effect example during fluctuation without displaying the number of holds, and (b) is an explanatory diagram showing an effect example of a pseudo winning counter and an effect example of a pseudo round display. (A) is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the first challenge effect, and (b) is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the second challenge effect. It is explanatory drawing which shows the 1st challenge transition effect to the 3rd challenge transition effect and the transition state before and after that. (A) is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the search effect, (b) is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the search effect following (a), and (c) is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the distance notification effect. (A) to (e) are explanatory views which show the production example of the 2nd production route which concerns on the special button production in order. (A) and (b) are explanatory views which show an example of the character inversion effect which concerns on the special character display effect in order. (A) is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the character element vibration effect, and (b) is an explanatory diagram showing the composition of image data related to the character effect effect.

Hereinafter, examples of the pachinko gaming machine according to the present invention will be described. Here, first, the basic configuration of the pachinko gaming machine of this embodiment will be described, and then, the gaming procedure, the effect, the control mode, and the like in the pachinko gaming machine of this embodiment will be described.
<Basic configuration of pachinko game machines>

FIG. 1 shows the front configuration of the pachinko gaming machine 10 according to the present embodiment. In the pachinko gaming machine 10, the gaming board 50 is mounted on the gaming machine frame 11, which will be described later. Of these, the gaming board 50 has different components such as accessories and designs depending on the model of the pachinko gaming machine 10. Further, the game board 50 can be separated from the game machine frame 11 by canceling the electrical connection relationship and the structural connection relationship with the game machine frame 11.

Further, by sharing the structural and electrical connection relationship with the game machine frame 11 for the game board 50 of a plurality of models, it is possible to change the so-called model in which the game machine frame 11 is shared between different models. There is. In the following, the game machine frame 11 will be described first, and then the board surface configuration of the game board 50 will be described.

The game machine frame 11 described above has an outer frame 12, a front frame (also referred to as “inner frame” or “main body frame”) 13, and a lower front plate (also referred to as “curtain plate”) 14. .. Further, a glass door 15 and a dish unit 16 are mounted on the front frame 13. Of these, the outer frame 12 is a rectangular frame used for fixing the pachinko game machine 10 to a predetermined position in the island equipment in the game hall (game store), and as shown in FIG. 1, glass. The front frame 13 having the door 15 and the dish unit 16 and the lower front plate 14 described above have an opening portion in which the front side is closed.

In addition, nailing is generally performed as a construction method for installing the outer frame 12 on the island equipment. Then, wood is used as the material of at least the portion of the outer frame 12 for fixing to the island equipment. Instead of wood, for example, a plastic material that can be nailed can be used. Further, as a construction method for installing the outer frame 12 on the island equipment, it is also possible to adopt a construction method other than nailing.

The front frame 13 has a structure having an outer shape that matches the opening portion of the outer frame 12, and is attached to the outer frame 12 via the hinge mechanisms 15A and 15B shown on the left side in FIG. Then, the front frame 13 is opened from the closed state with respect to the outer frame 12 by swinging forward with the left edge portion in FIG. 1 as the fixed end and the right edge portion as the free end. Further, the front frame 13 swings backward from the open state, enters the outer frame 12 and locks, so that the front frame 13 is closed again. When the front frame 13 is closed, the front frame 13 closes the portion between the upper and short portions of the outer frame 12 and the lower front plate 14 described above.

The front frame 13 is locked to the outer frame 12 and released from the outer frame 12 via a locking device (not shown). That is, as shown in FIG. 1, a cylinder portion 17 of the locking device is arranged in a portion below the free end side of the front frame 13, and the cylinder portion 17 covers the lower portion of the front frame 13. The keyhole is directed to the front of the pachinko gaming machine 10 through the plate unit 16 described above. Then, when the amusement park clerk inserts the key into the keyhole of the cylinder 17 and turns the key counterclockwise, for example, the free end side of the front frame 13 is released from the locking device, and the front frame 13 is opened. Become.

With respect to such a front frame 13, the above-mentioned lower front plate 14 does not have a structure for opening and closing like the front frame 13, and is fixed to the outer frame 12 so as not to move. The lower front plate 14 always closes the lower end of the front surface of the outer frame 12.

The glass door 15 arranged at the front portion of the front frame 13 and the dish unit 16 are attached to the front frame 13 via a hinge mechanism (not shown). Further, both the glass door 15 and the dish unit 16 can swing independently with the left edge portion in FIG. 1 as a fixed end and the right edge portion as a free end. Then, the glass door 15 and the plate unit 16 are opened by, for example, a game hall clerk who swings horizontally forward, and swings horizontally backward from the open state to lock the glass door 15 and the plate unit 16. As a result, it becomes closed.

Locking of the glass door 15 to the front frame 13 and release from the front frame 13 are performed via the above-mentioned locking device (not shown). That is, when the amusement park clerk inserts the key into the keyhole of the cylinder 17 described above and turns the key clockwise, for example, counterclockwise when the front frame 13 is opened, the free end side of the glass door 15 is locked. The glass door 15 is opened. Then, the glass door 15 in the open state is pushed back so as to overlap the front frame 13, and the glass door 15 is pushed so as to be parallel to the front frame 13, so that the locking device is activated and the glass door 15 is moved forward again. Locks to the frame 13.

Further, by opening the glass door 15, a locking mechanism (not shown) of the dish unit 16 appears and can be operated, and a game hall clerk moves the operating portion (not shown) of the locking mechanism downward, for example. By the pushing operation, the dish unit 16 is opened. Further, the dish unit 16 in the open state is pushed back so as to overlap the front frame 13 and pushed so that the dish unit 16 is parallel to the front frame 13, so that the locking mechanism is activated and the dish unit 16 is reopened. Locks to the front frame 13.

Further, the glass door 15 holds, for example, two parallel transparent plates detachably, and when the glass door 15 is in the closed state, the game board 50 can be visually recognized from the front of the pachinko gaming machine 10 through these transparent plates. I am doing it. As the transparent plate, a transparent resin plate or the like can be used in addition to the glass plate. Further, by opening the glass door 15, the front surface of the game board 50 held by the front frame 13 by the game board holding mechanism (not shown) is exposed. Further, although not shown, the front frame 13 has a game ball passage for guiding and collecting the game ball, which is a game medium.

The plate unit 16 has an upper ball plate 18, a lower ball plate 19, a launch handle 20, and the like on the front surface thereof. Of these, the upper ball plate 18 stores the game balls, supplies the game balls to the launching device 43 (see FIGS. 2 and 4) operated via the launch handle 20, and plays the game on the lower ball plate 19. It is equipped with mechanisms for various functions such as ejecting balls. In addition, the lower ball plate 19 stores the game balls, receives the game balls sent from the upper ball plate 18, and stores the game balls in a ball box (so-called dollar box) placed outside the pachinko gaming machine 10. It is equipped with a mechanism for various functions such as discharge. In some cases, the ball box is integrally provided with the island equipment.

Further, in the present embodiment, various speakers 21 are provided in parts such as the upper corner of the glass door 15 and the lower front plate 14, and through these speakers 21, depending on the game state, the effect pattern, and the like. BGM and various sound effects are output.

Further, an operation button 22 that can be operated by the player is provided on the portion of the upper ball plate 18 that faces the player. The operation button 22 is provided on the outer wall surface of the upper part of the upper ball plate 18, and is located near the center of the upper ball plate 18 in the left-right direction. Further, the operation button 22 is provided with a light emitting body (not shown) for the operation button inside, and outputs light according to the effect pattern to be executed.

The operation button 22 may be projected upward in a predetermined case by using a drive source such as a motor. Although not shown in detail, the operation button 22 in this embodiment may be displaced so that the tip of the operation button 22 protrudes upward due to the drive of the elevating motor to form an operation lever input portion capable of performing input by tilting. It is possible and has a crescent-shaped eccentric cam to generate vibration in the drive system of the operating lever.

Further, as shown in FIG. 20A, a cross key 96 is provided in addition to the operation button 22, and the player can set various environments by using the cross key 96. Then, as the contents of the environment setting, the volume adjustment (volume adjustment) of the speaker 21, the brightness adjustment (luminance adjustment) and the light amount adjustment (light amount adjustment) of the effect display, or the change of the effect mode can be exemplified. Further, as the content of the environment setting, the effect automatic button operation (simply referred to as "automatic button operation") is performed so that the effect similar to that operated by the player without operating the operation button 22 proceeds. There is also an example of the setting of). Further, the game machine frame 11, for example, the front frame 13 or the like, can be provided with a display capable of performing an effect related to the game and a display related to the above-mentioned environment setting.

Further, in addition to the cross key, for example, a lever-shaped operating means, various types of touch panels, and the like can be used. Further, in FIG. 20A, reference numeral 97 is a ball lending button, and reference numeral 98 is a return button. Further, reference numeral 99 in FIG. 20A is a ball removal button for the upper ball plate 18.
<Back configuration of pachinko machine>

Next, the basic configuration on the back side of the pachinko gaming machine 10 will be described. As shown in FIG. 2, the back surface of the front frame 13 is provided with a game ball passage for guiding or collecting the game ball, and a set base (also referred to as a “back set board”) 31 serving as a prize ball path forming mechanism. Is attached, and below this set board 31, a power supply unit 32 for supplying power to the entire game machine, and a payout control (also referred to as "prize ball control") board for controlling the game machine frame side. Each of the 103 is attached in a special transparent case. Further, on the back side of the game board 50, the main board (main control board) 102 that controls the entire game and the sub board 104 that executes the effect control based on the control command from the main board 102 are dedicated to each. It is housed in a transparent case and is provided in a positional relationship corresponding to the opening of the set base 31. Further, the set base 31 also includes a launching device 43 and a launching control board 105 that controls the launching device 43.

In the set base 31, the prize ball tank 33 is provided above the above-mentioned opening. The prize ball tank 33 stores game balls supplied from the island equipment and used as prize balls. Further, below the prize ball tank 33, a prize ball passage 34, a payout unit 35, and a prize ball discharge passage 36 are provided. The prize ball passage 34, the payout unit 35, and the prize ball discharge passage 36 are arranged along the right side from the upper side of the game board 50 when the pachinko gaming machine 10 is viewed from the rear as shown in FIG. Has been done.

The prize ball passage 34 described above guides the game balls stored in the prize ball tank 33 to the downstream side in a rectified manner. Further, the payout unit 35 described above can communicate with the prize ball passage 34 and discharge the balls stored in the prize ball tank 33 downward in units of one ball. Further, the prize ball discharge passage 36 guides the game ball flowed down from the payout unit 35 to the ball plate (upper ball plate 18 or lower ball plate 19) as a prize ball.

As shown in FIG. 2, the power supply unit 32 described above is provided at a lower left portion of the set base 31 when the pachinko gaming machine 10 is viewed from the rear. Then, the power supply unit 32 converts the AC power supplied from the outside of the game machine into various voltages used in the game machine and supplies the AC power to the payout control board 103, the main board 102, the sub board 104, and the like. Further, the power switch 40 for operating the power supply unit 32 is arranged behind other devices as shown by a hidden line (broken line) in the lower right portion in the drawing. The power switch 40 is installed so that the power switch 40 is turned on when the power switch 40 is pushed below the center and tilted downward so that the dropped game ball does not turn off even if it hits directly.

As shown in FIG. 2, the above-mentioned payout control board 103 is arranged at a lower right portion of the set base 31 when the pachinko gaming machine 10 is viewed from the rear. The payout control board 103 has a payout control function that controls the payout unit 35 in response to a command relating to payout from the main board 102 or a loan request from the outside. Further, the launch control board 105 described above has a launch control function that controls the launch device 43 so as to launch the game ball (striking ball) into the game area with a strength corresponding to the amount of operation of the launch handle 20 (see FIG. 1). ing.

The above-mentioned main board 102 is arranged in the lower center on the back side of the game board 50, and mainly includes various lottery functions, setting change functions, and control functions for the payout control board 103 and the sub board 104. It has a central processing function in the pachinko gaming machine 10. The above-mentioned sub-board 104 is arranged in the upper center on the back side of the game board 50, and mainly has a function for controlling various effects described later.

Regarding the sub-board 104, a main sub-board (sub-main board 301 in this embodiment) that plays a main role in effect control and a sub-sub-board (in this embodiment) that specializes in a specific effect function such as image creation. Although it is divided into sub-sub-board 302), the term "sub-board" includes these. Further, on the lower right side on the back side of the set board 31, an external relay terminal board (“frame relay terminal board” or the like) that relays signals from the main board 102, the payout control board 103, etc. to an external device of the pachinko gaming machine 10 etc. Also referred to as) 46 is provided.

The function of changing the setting on the main board 102 described above is a function of changing the setting value that defines the theoretical ease of hitting (the degree of advantage of the player). In this embodiment, six types of integer values "1" to "6" are provided as setting values, and for each of these setting values, a theoretical jackpot or small hit probability value, and The payout rate is different. Such changes in the set values and the jackpot probability for each set value will be described later.
<Board composition of the game board>

Next, the above-mentioned game board 50 and parts (board surface parts) arranged on the board surface of the game board 50 will be described. In this embodiment, the game board 50 is composed of a plurality of parts made of a transparent resin material (for example, transparent acrylic resin) or wood (plywood). Further, the game board 50 is formed in a plate shape, and has a game ball passage for guiding the game ball to the back side of the game board 50, a predetermined space, and the like. The game board 50 is mounted on the front frame 13 of the game machine frame 11 with the plate surface on which various board surface parts are mounted facing forward, and is mounted on the front frame 13 of the game machine frame 11 by a closed glass door 15 or the like. It is designed to cover the front. Further, on the front side of the game board 50, the game area 52 is formed by combining the inner rail and the outer rail formed in a curved strip shape.

As shown in FIG. 1, the game area 52 is arranged at the lowermost part of the 1-1 start winning opening 62A, the right unit 92, the plurality of general winning openings 72, and the game area 52, and is operated in FIG. An out port (58) hidden behind the button 22 is provided. Further, the game area 52 is provided with an effect display device 60 composed of a liquid crystal display device capable of displaying for the effect, a center decoration 64 for decorating the periphery of the effect display device 60, and the like.

As shown in FIGS. 1 and 20B, the above-mentioned right unit 92 includes an operating port 68, a 1-2 start winning opening 62B, a large winning opening 90, a second starting winning opening 63, and the like. Has been done. Then, in the right side unit 92, opening / closing control is performed according to the gaming state, and the configuration and operation of these devices will be described later.

Further, the game area 52 is provided with a large number of game nails (not shown), a mechanism such as a windmill, and the like. It is also possible not to install a wind turbine. Further, a main control display device 53 is provided outside the lower left of the game area 52 of the game board 50. The specific configuration and function of the main control display device 53 will be described later. Further, the board surface configuration of the game board 50 as described above may vary depending on, for example, the game characteristics adopted in the pachinko game machine 10.
<Functions of board parts>

Subsequently, specific functions and configurations related to the above-mentioned individual board surface parts will be described. First, the above-mentioned 1-1 start winning opening 62A is a starting winning opening related to the first game, and is of a type in which the entrance of the game ball is always opened and the size of the entrance of the game ball is not changed. .. Further, the 1-1 starting prize opening 62A has a 1-1 starting winning detection device 74A (sensor) for detecting the entry of a game ball into the 1-1 starting winning opening 62A, and this sensor The output signal of is input to the main board 102 described above.

As shown in FIG. 3, the above-mentioned general winning opening 72 includes a general winning detection device 73 (sensor) for detecting the entry of a game ball. The output signal of the general winning detection device 73 is input to the main board 102.

When the general winning detection device 73 is shared by the plurality of general winning openings 72, the game balls that have entered the plurality of general winning openings 72 are collected at the place where the general winning detection device 73 is arranged and detected. It is possible to do. Further, the plurality of general prize openings 72 can be grouped according to the positional relationship or the number of prize balls (shared by the general prize detection device 73).

Most of the above-mentioned right side unit 92 is formed by combining transparent synthetic resin parts so that the player can visually recognize the inside thereof. An operating port 68 is arranged on the upper part of the right side unit 92. As shown in FIG. 3, the operation port 68 includes a passage detection device 69, and the passage detection device 69 has a sensor for detecting the passage of a game ball at the operation port 68. Then, the output signal of the sensor in the passage detection device 69 is input to the main board 102, and the passage detection device 69 changes the output signal of the sensor according to the presence or absence of the incoming ball.

The 1-2 start winning opening 62B provided in the right unit 92 is a starting winning opening related to the first game, similarly to the 1-1 starting winning opening 62A described above. The 1-1 start winning opening 62A has a first gutter portion 93A having a curved and inclined portion for decelerating the game ball, which is interposed between the first starting winning opening 62A and the upper operating opening 68. Then, the game ball that has passed through the operating port 68 is guided to the portion where the 1-2 start winning opening 62B is arranged.

The 1-2 starting winning opening 62B has a horizontally long rectangular shape and an upward opening on the path of the game ball, and an opening / closing door 91 for opening / closing this opening (shown by a broken line in FIG. 1). It has. That is, the 1-2 start winning opening 62B is an opening / closing type, and is a type that changes the size of the entrance (opening) of the game ball. Then, the 1-2 start winning opening 62B is adapted to function as an ordinary electric accessory.

The opening / closing door 91 can slide in the front-rear direction of the game board 50 (the direction toward and away from the player). The opening of the 1-2 start winning opening 62B is closed when the opening / closing door 91 slides forward (to the player's side), and the opening / closing door 91 slides to the rear (opposite to the player's side). , Close the opening. Then, when the opening / closing door 91 is opened, the game ball can enter the 1-2 starting winning opening 62B.

Further, the 1-2 start winning opening 62B includes a 1-2 starting winning detection device 75B (sensor) and a starting opening solenoid 76 for sliding the above-mentioned opening / closing door, as shown in FIG. ing. The output signal of the 1-2 start winning prize detection device 75B is input to the main board 102.

In addition, a plurality of types can be provided as a mode for opening the 1-2 start winning opening 62B. These opening modes include a relatively short time (for example, about 0.2 seconds) (referred to as "short opening" or "short opening") or a relatively long time (for example, about 5 seconds). Aspects (referred to as "long open", "long open", etc.) can be considered. Further, it is possible to provide a mode of middle opening set to an opening time between short opening and long opening, or it may have an opening mode in which opening is performed a plurality of times.

The above-mentioned large winning opening 90 has a second gutter portion 93B having an inclined portion interposed therein with the upper 1-2 starting winning opening 62B. The large winning opening 90 has a horizontally long rectangular shape and opens forward, and includes an opening / closing door 91 (shown by a broken line in FIG. 1) for opening / closing this opening. The large winning opening 90 is provided with a plurality of types of operation patterns (opening / closing patterns) related to the opening / closing door 91, and when a predetermined hit occurs, the opening operation can be performed in a predetermined mode.

Further, in the present embodiment, the large winning opening 90 is of a type having a function of allowing a game ball to enter a specific entry opening (here, referred to as "V winning", "V winning", or the like). Although not shown, the inside of the large winning opening 90 includes a V winning opening (also referred to as a "V area", a "specific area", a "V entry opening", etc.), which is a specific entry opening. A shielding member that opens and closes the V winning opening is provided. The game characteristics using the V winning function in the large winning opening 90 will be described later.

As shown in FIG. 3, the large winning opening 90 includes a large winning count detection device 78A for detecting the number of winning balls of a game ball, a V winning detecting device 78B for detecting V winning, and the above-mentioned opening / closing door. It is provided with a large winning opening (opening) solenoid 80A for opening and closing the 91, and a V winning opening (opening) solenoid 80B for opening and closing the above-mentioned shielding member in a predetermined round (V round). Of these, the grand prize count detection device 78A and the V prize detection device 78B have a sensor that detects the entry of a game ball into the grand prize opening 90, and the output signal thereof is input to the main board 102. There is.

The above-mentioned second start winning opening 63 is a starting winning opening related to the second game. The second start winning opening 63 is arranged at the rear stage (downstream side) of the above-mentioned large winning opening 90, and is arranged on the left side of the large winning opening 90 when viewed from the front (when viewed from the player's side). There is. The second starting winning opening 63 is of a type in which the entrance of the game ball is always opened and the size of the entrance of the game ball is not changed. Further, as shown in FIG. 3, the second start winning prize opening 63 includes a second starting winning winning detection device 75 (sensor). The output signal of the second start winning prize detection device 75 is input to the main board 102.

Depending on the gameplay, the second start winning opening 63 is used as the start opening for the ordinary electric accessory (so-called "electric tulip" or "electric chew"), and the ordinary symbol described later is stopped and displayed in a hit manner. In some cases, a movable member such as a so-called wing member may be opened. Further, the guidance of the game ball to the 1-2 start winning opening 62B, the large winning opening 90, and the 2nd starting winning opening 63 has a gutter structure such as the first gutter part 93A and the second gutter part 93B. It is not limited to the one, and may be performed by, for example, a game nail. Further, both the game nail and the gutter may be appropriately arranged to guide the game ball.

As shown in FIG. 3, the above-mentioned out port 58 includes an out ball detection device (out port sensor) 82. The out port sensor 82 detects a game ball (out ball) that has entered the out port 58 instead of becoming a winning ball (safe ball) in the game area 52. Then, the detection result of the out port sensor 82 has come to be used for counting out balls and for displaying (base display) on the performance display unit (described later, the ball entry state display 808 of FIG. 5) described later. There is.

The center decoration 64 described above has a function of directing and the like, and an LED substrate on which a large number of chip-type LEDs are mounted is provided inside the center decoration 64. Then, by driving the LED of the center decoration 64, the light of the LED passes through the center decoration 64, and the center decoration 64 performs the light decoration (light effect). Further, the light decoration in the center decoration 64 is performed not only during the game, but also during the waiting for the start of the game, the game preparation for the player to adjust the light amount (light amount setting), and the like.

Further, a plurality of movable effect members are provided on the back surface (inside) of the center decoration 64, and these movable effect members form a gimmick for effect. These movable effect members are usually hidden inside the center decoration 64 as shown in FIG. However, when a predetermined effect is performed, although not shown, these movable effect members appear in front of the effect display device 60.

Further, in the present embodiment, the movable effect member is also subjected to light decoration (light effect). Further, the light decoration of the movable effect member is performed not only during the game, but also during the waiting for the start of the game, the game preparation for the player to adjust the amount of light, and the like.

Further, a game ball passage portion 65 is formed in a portion of the center decoration 64 on the right side (outer right) when viewed from the front, and the center decoration 64 has a flow of game balls in addition to the above-mentioned effect function. It has the function of a road.

Further, the center decoration 64 is provided with a light guide plate 88. Although not shown, the light guide plate 88 may be, for example, one provided with two transparent plates arranged in parallel with the plate surfaces facing forward and backward. Further, the light guide plate 88 is attached to the center decoration 64, and shields between the outside and the inside of the center decoration 64 in front of the effect display device 60. The light guide plate 88 also functions as a protective cover for the effect display device 60 in the center decoration 64.

The light guide plate 88 can be configured as follows, for example. That is, inside the center decoration 64, a plurality of LEDs serving as light sources are arranged side by side in a band shape so as to face one end face of the transparent plate, for example, the left and right end faces. Then, in a normal state, the display content of the effect display device 60 is transmitted to the outside of the transparent plate so that the player can see it without superimposing another image on the screen of the effect display device 60.

However, the inside of each transparent plate constituting the light guide plate 88 is formed with fine irregularities that cannot be visually recognized under a normal environment. Then, at the time of executing the predetermined effect, for example, the above-mentioned light source facing the end face of one of the transparent plates is driven, and the light of the light source is emitted from the end face of the transparent plate toward the inside of the transparent plate. To. Further, the light is diffused by the unevenness of the transparent plate irradiated with the light, and the diffused light develops a predetermined illustration or the like so that the player can recognize it and emerges.

Further, of the two transparent plates of the light guide plate 88, the other transparent plate is engraved with irregularities for forming an image different from the above-mentioned illustrations and the like. Then, by driving the light source facing the end face at the time of a predetermined effect, an illustration or the like different from the above-mentioned one emerges so that the player can recognize it.

Here, it is possible to direct the light source not only to one of the left and right end faces of the transparent plate but also to one of the upper and lower end faces, and to project another illustration or the like by the light of this light source. By doing so, it is possible to display two types of images on one transparent plate. Further, the number of transparent plates may be one or three or more. It is also possible to use a transmissive liquid crystal display instead of or in combination with the light guide plate 88.

As shown in FIG. 7, the above-mentioned main control display device 53 includes a symbol display board (main symbol display board) 256 in which a large number of LED indicator lights are arranged. The symbol display board 256 corresponds to the ordinary symbol display unit 59 for displaying the above-mentioned ordinary symbol, the first special symbol display unit 70 for displaying the first special symbol (described later) corresponding to the first game, and the second game. The second special symbol display unit 71 for displaying the second special symbol (described later) and various other display units are formed so as to be visible to the player from the front of the game machine. The above-mentioned ordinary symbol display unit 59 constitutes an ordinary symbol display device. Further, the first special symbol display unit 70 constitutes the first special symbol display device, and the second special symbol display unit 71 constitutes the second special symbol display device.

In the following, the normal symbol is "general symbol", the special symbol is "special symbol", the first special symbol is "first special symbol", "special diagram 1", "special 1", and the second special symbol is "special symbol". It may be referred to as "second special figure", "special figure 2", "special figure 2", or the like. Further, the first special symbol may be referred to as "special symbol 1" or "symbol 1", and the second special symbol may be referred to as "special symbol 2" or "symbol 2".

Further, the above-mentioned main control display device 53 means that the game board 50 is provided, but as will be described later, the setting display unit provided on the main board 102 (setting of FIG. 5A described later). It is also possible to include a display device 807) and a performance display unit (ball entry state display 808 in FIG. 5A described later) as a main control display device. In that case, the setting display unit and the performance display unit provided on the main board 102 can be referred to as, for example, a "main board side main control display device".
<Basic game procedure>

Subsequently, the gaming procedure in the pachinko gaming machine 10 of this embodiment will be described. First, in a situation where the game ball is supplied to the above-mentioned upper ball plate 18, when the player operates and rotates the above-mentioned launch handle 20, the upper ball plate 18 has a strength corresponding to the rotation angle. The game balls stored in the are fired one by one at predetermined intervals. Then, the game ball is guided by the above-mentioned inner rail and outer rail, reaches the upper part of the game area 52, and is discharged from between the inner rail and the outer rail to the game area 52.

In a normal game, the player fires the game ball so as to flow down on the left side of the game area 52, and aims at the 1-1 start winning opening 62A located in the lower central portion of the game area 52. Such a mode of launching mainly using the left side of the game area 52 is so-called left-handed. Further, the firing of the game ball is repeated at predetermined time intervals (for example, at intervals not exceeding 100 shots per minute) by the launching device 43 described above while the player is operating the firing handle 20. Then, the game balls continuously released into the game area 52 fall in a direction according to factors such as the speed and the incident angle (or reflection angle) while interfering with a plurality of game nails and wind turbines.

When the game ball falls into various winning openings such as the above-mentioned general winning opening 72 and the 1-1 starting winning opening 62A, the winning ball is detected and the payout control of the game ball is performed. Then, a predetermined number of game balls are paid out to the upper ball plate 18 as prize balls via the above-mentioned payout unit 35 according to the type of winning opening. Further, when the upper ball plate 18 is filled with many game balls and the subsequent game balls paid out cannot enter the upper ball plate 18, these game balls are guided to the lower ball plate 19 as overflow balls. ..

In addition, the game balls that have fallen into various winning openings become safe balls and are guided from the front side to the back side of the game board 50. Further, the game ball that has not become a safe ball reaches the lower end of the game area 52, falls into the out port (58), and is guided to the back surface side of the game board 50. Then, the game ball that has reached the back surface side of the game board 50 is guided downward through a predetermined guide gutter and a game ball passage in the set base 31, and is directed from the pachinko game machine 10 toward the above-mentioned island equipment side. Is discharged.

The operating port 68 described above is a gate through which the game ball passes, unlike the winning opening for generating the safe ball described above. In the following, the term "winning opening" including the operating port 68 will be used, and the terms "falling in", "winning ball", and "winning" in this embodiment will be referred to as "passing" related to the gate unless otherwise specified. It shall include the meaning of.

In a game situation where the jackpot is not won, when the game ball enters the operating port 68 and is detected, if the predetermined fluctuation start condition (normal figure fluctuation start condition) as described later is satisfied. , The main control display device 53 displays the normal symbol (described later) in a variable manner. The normal symbol displayed on the main control display device 53 shows the result of a random number lottery (general drawing lottery) executed based on the ball entering the operating port 68, and is stopped and displayed after a predetermined fluctuation time has passed. Will be done.

When the game ball enters the starting port (here, the 1-1 starting winning opening 62A, the 1-2 starting winning opening 62B, or the second starting winning opening 63), a predetermined fluctuation start as described later If the condition (special figure variation start condition) is satisfied, the special symbol (described later) is variablely displayed on the main control display device 53. The special symbol displayed on the main control display device 53 indicates the result of a random number lottery (big hit lottery) executed based on the ball entering the starting port, and is stopped and displayed after a predetermined fluctuation time has passed. ..

Here, as for the special symbol variation start condition, if the symbol variation that has been performed earlier for the same special symbol is not completed, that type of variation start condition is not satisfied, and the symbol ahead of the symbol. When the fluctuation of is completed, the fluctuation start condition of the fluctuation based on the reserved random number value is satisfied, and a new symbol fluctuation is started based on the lottery result (pending lottery result) related to the reserved random value. (So-called parallel machine). The upper limit of the number of holdings is 4 for one special symbol, and the holding storage is not performed more than 4 (8 in total of the 1st special symbol and the 2nd special symbol). There is.

In the effect display device 60 described above, the effect display related to the special symbol is performed. This effect display differs depending on whether the special symbol is in the variable display or the stop display, and whether the stop display mode of the special symbol is a big hit or an outlier. In relation to this, various predetermined modes of production are performed.

In the jackpot game in which the special game is executed, notification regarding the launch position and launch timing of the game ball recommended by the image and sound of the effect display device 60 (for example, a right-handed effect that encourages right-handed hitting) is executed. Then, when the player increases the amount of rotation of the firing handle 20 clockwise to increase the firing force and launches the game ball toward the area on the right side of the game area 52, the game ball passing above the center decoration 64 is launched. , Enters the game ball passage portion 65 on the right outer side of the center decoration 64 and flows down. Further, the game ball hits a plurality of game nails (not shown) and other structures, and falls in a direction corresponding to the way of hitting the nails.

Some (or all) of the large number of game balls emitted from the center decoration 64 reach the top of the right unit 92. The details of the game in the right side unit 92 will be described later.

In the big hit game, the unit game in which the big winning opening 90 is opened is repeated a plurality of times. As the number of unit games (number of rounds), various ones can be adopted depending on the game characteristics. For example, in this embodiment, the number of rounds is 4R for each big hit.

However, the present invention is not limited to this, and it is possible to provide a special game in which the unit game is repeated a maximum number of times and a unit game in which the unit game is repeated a number of times less than the maximum number of times. In this case, the maximum number of times can be exemplified by 10 times (10R (round)), and the number of times less than the maximum number of times can be exemplified by 5 times (5R) or the like. In addition, it is possible to provide a small hit game as a game for operating the large winning opening 90.

In each unit game, the game ends when a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls are detected in the large winning opening 90, or when the total opening time reaches a predetermined time (for example, about 30 seconds). The conditions are met and the big prize opening is closed. The total opening time as the end condition of the unit game indicates that the upper limit is set even when the opening of the large winning openings is divided into multiple times in one unit game. ing. By opening multiple large winning openings within a unit game, technical intervention is enhanced, and by opening one time, it is possible to easily obtain balls, so that the game playability during big hits can be broadened. The opening mode of the big winning opening can be selected from preset patterns.

In the jackpot game, it is possible to use the V winning function in some unit games. For example, in the first round of the jackpot game start round, the V winning opening is opened, and if a game ball that has passed through the V winning opening is detected, the V winning opening is closed. Then, when the V prize is generated, the game is performed in a probabilistic state (described later) or the like during the period of the specific game after the big hit game. Further, depending on the type of jackpot, it is possible to control the opening of the large winning opening 90 so that the V winning is easily performed and the control of the large winning opening 90 where the V winning is difficult. While producing a chance, it becomes possible to generate a probabilistic jackpot (described later) at a predetermined rate.

Further, in the pachinko gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, as described above, a game property in which a plurality of (here, two) games corresponding to the conventional first-class pachinko gaming machine are mixed is adopted. That is, in this embodiment, the first game in which the first 1-1 start winning opening 62A and the 2-1 starting winning opening 62B are used and the second starting winning opening 63 are used for the plurality of games described above. It can be divided into the second game.

Then, in this embodiment, the first game and the second game are a game in which the first special symbol described later is variablely displayed and a game in which the second special symbol is variablely displayed, respectively, and a priority is set between them. Instead, the first game and the second game, that is, the variable display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol are executed in parallel. Therefore, a situation may occur in which the first game and the second game are executed at the same time (variable display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol).

It should be noted that the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, a priority may be set between the first game and the second game. For example, in a situation where the second game is prioritized over the first game and at the same time the start condition of the game is satisfied, the first game is executed by giving priority to the second game and holding the first game. It is also possible to prevent the second game from being executed at the same time.

Further, in the pachinko gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, a specific game may be executed after the end of the special game, depending on the result of the jackpot lottery described above. This specific game is different from the above-mentioned special game, and is in a game state that is more advantageous to the player than the normal game. In this embodiment, as specific games, a probability fluctuation game (hereinafter referred to as "probability change"), a fluctuation time shortening game (hereinafter referred to as "time reduction"), and a ball entry facilitation game ("electric support", "electricity") (Sometimes called "chu support") is provided. As the specific game, there are those in which only one of the probability change, the time saving, and the ball entry facilitation game is executed, and there are those in which a plurality of specific games are performed at the same time, and different game characteristics are created by combining them.

When a specific game is executed, the above-mentioned right-handed effect (also referred to as "right-handed guidance effect") is executed. Then, when the player hits the right side, the game using the right side unit 92 is performed as described above, but the details of the game with the right side unit 92 will be described later.

In this embodiment, the specific game is adopted as a game state in which right-handed hitting is recommended for the player, but the specific game is not limited to the game state requiring right-handed hitting, and the above-mentioned normal game is not limited to the game state. If it is more advantageous than that, depending on the type of specific game, the specification may include a game state in which the player should hit left, or the board surface configuration is substantially symmetrical and the ball entry ratio to the starting opening, the big winning opening, etc. The player may be able to freely select left-handed or right-handed in both the normal game and the specific game as long as there is no significant influence on the player.
<Details of the game procedure in the right unit>

Next, a game procedure at the time of right-handed striking using the right-hand unit 92 will be described. The game ball that is hit right and reaches the right unit 92 is detected when it passes through the operating port 68. When the above-mentioned fluctuation start condition (normal symbol fluctuation condition) related to the normal symbol is satisfied, the normal symbol starts to fluctuate on the main control display device 53 (see FIG. 7). Then, when the fluctuation time defined in the fluctuation pattern elapses, the normal symbol stops.

Further, if a normal symbol for opening the 1-2 start winning opening 62B is selected, the 1-2 starting winning opening 62B opens for a predetermined time. The opening time of the 1-2 start winning opening 62B is associated with the selected normal symbol type and game state.

The game ball that has passed through the operating port 68 is guided to the 1-2 starting winning opening 62B via the first gutter portion 93A. If the 1-2 starting winning opening 62B is in the open state, it is possible to enter the 1-2 starting winning opening 62B. Further, if the 1-2 start winning opening 62B is in the closed state, the game ball passes through the area where the 1-2 starting winning opening 62B is provided, and passes through the second gutter portion 93B to enter the large winning opening 90. Will be guided to. Then, if the large winning opening 90 is in the open state, it is possible to enter the large winning opening 90, and if the large winning opening 90 is in the closed state, the game ball enters the area where the large winning opening 90 is provided. After passing through, the player is guided to the second starting winning opening 63.

As described above, the second starting winning opening 63 is of a type in which the entrance of the game ball is always opened and the size of the entrance of the game ball is not changed. Therefore, the second start winning opening 63 can always accept the game ball that has reached the area where the second starting winning opening 63 is provided. The game ball that has entered the second start winning opening 63 is detected by the second starting winning detection device 75 and guided to the back side of the game board 50.

The game ball that has not entered the second start winning opening 63 is discharged from the right unit 92 and flows down in the game area 52. With respect to the second starting winning opening 63, it is possible to guide most of the game balls that have entered the right side unit 92 to the vicinity. By doing so, the frequency of entering the second starting winning opening 63 can be increased.

Here, the right side unit 92 may be provided with an out port (not shown) different from the above-mentioned out port 58, and the game ball may be discharged from this out port (out port in the right side unit). In that case, it is possible to count the game balls discharged from the out port in the right unit. Then, the counting of the game balls discharged from the out port in the right side unit may be performed by also using the out ball detection device (out port sensor) 82 of the out port 58.
<Example of jackpot type>

Next, the types of jackpots in the above-mentioned first game and second game will be described. First, as a big hit, a big hit (hereinafter, also appropriately referred to as "4R big hit") in which the above-mentioned unit game is repeated four times is provided. Depending on the game characteristics, for example, a jackpot in which the unit game is repeated 10 times (hereinafter, also appropriately referred to as "10R jackpot"), a jackpot in which the unit game is repeated 7 times (hereinafter, also appropriately referred to as "7R jackpot"), etc. may be provided. Although it is possible, here, the big hit game is performed by the normal big hit of 4R and the probabilistic big hit of 4R. The type of jackpot is determined by the types of special figure 1 and special figure 2, but the details will be described later.

The above-mentioned unit game is started in a special game with the opening of the large winning opening 90, and when a predetermined time (for example, about 30 seconds) elapses or a predetermined number (for example, 10 pieces) are inserted in the large winning opening. When the game ball of (above) falls, it ends and the big prize opening is closed. A special game in which such a unit game is repeated is based on a so-called ball ejection (sometimes referred to as a ball ejection) for the purpose of causing a player to acquire a game ball.

However, the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, when a jackpot having a plurality of types of rounds such as a 10R jackpot or a 7R jackpot is provided, the opening period of the jackpot is short even if the jackpot is a 10R jackpot. , A thing that can only get a ball that is practically the same as a 5R jackpot (10R probability variation (actual 5R)), or even if it is a 5R jackpot, it is almost impossible to get a ball (for example, the minimum for each R). It is possible to provide a degree (for example, only one ball) to enter the large winning opening 90).

In addition, the above-mentioned specific game states such as probability change and time reduction are generated when the big hit game ends for a predetermined specific big hit. As a mode of occurrence of such a specific game state, it is possible to provide a big hit that does not give at least one of the privilege functions such as probability change, time reduction, and ball entry facilitation game. More specifically, it is conceivable to provide a big hit with only a probability change or a big hit with only a short time. Furthermore, it is possible to make different types of jackpots depending on the difference in the duration of the probability change and the difference in the duration of the shortened working hours. In addition, when the electric chew support is also executed during the time reduction, the "duration of the electric chew support" can be rephrased as the "duration of the electric chew support". Further, it is also conceivable to execute only the electric chew support among the time saving and the electric chew support, and conversely, execute only the time saving among the time saving and the electric chew support.

However, the combination of the big hit and the probability change, the time reduction, etc. is not limited to the above-mentioned example, and the V prize is set as the condition for operating the probability fluctuation function as in this embodiment, and the electric chew support is provided depending on the presence or absence of the V prize. It is possible to adopt various combinations such as different durations. For example, the probability variation may occur for all jackpots.
<Hits other than big hits>

Further, in this embodiment, a small hit is provided as a type of hit other than the big hit. In the first game (or the second game), when this small hit occurs, it is possible to adopt a game property such as performing a unit game (opening of the large winning opening 90) once, for example. Further, the opening time of the large winning opening 90 can be set to about 1.2 seconds at a time.
<Main control display device>
<< Configuration of main control display device >>

Next, the above-mentioned main control display device 53 (game board side main control display device) will be described with reference to FIG. 7. As shown in FIG. 7, the main control display device 53 on the game board side arranges a large number (36 in this case) of LED indicator lights in two rows (upper and lower) on the symbol display board 256. It is configured. In this embodiment, the number of LED indicator lights in the upper and lower stages is 18, and the LED indicator lights in each stage are arranged at equal intervals in the horizontal direction. In addition, the distance between the LED indicator lights, which are in a vertical positional relationship, is also constant for all 18 LEDs.

In the main control display device 53, the 10 LED indicators at the right end in the upper row when viewed from the front are used for information display according to the special figure 1, and the 10 LED indicator lights at the right end in the lower row are shown in the special figure 2. It has come to be used for displaying such information. Then, in the upper and lower rows, the two LED indicators at the right ends form a first special symbol storage display unit 83 and a second special symbol storage display unit 84 that indicate the number of reserved storages. The eight LED indicators arranged on the left side of the first special symbol storage display unit 83 constitute the first special symbol display unit 70 described above, and the eight LED indicators arranged on the left side of the second special symbol storage display unit 84. The LED indicator lights constitute the second special symbol display unit 71 described above.

The first special symbol display unit 70 is capable of variable display and stop display of the first special symbol related to the first game, depending on the operation mode of the eight LED indicator lights arranged in a row in the horizontal direction. The first special symbol by the first special symbol display unit 70 is the result of the first lottery performed when the game ball enters the 1-1 starting winning opening 62A and the 1-2 starting winning opening 62B. It is a corresponding symbol, and when the fluctuation display is stopped in a predetermined hit mode, a big hit occurs and a special game is executed. It should be noted that the first special symbol display unit 70 has a maximum of 255 (= 2 ^ 8) when the first special symbol is stopped and displayed, except when all the LED indicators are turned off by the combination of turning on and off. -1) It is possible to display various types of identification information. Specifically, the combination of turning on and off the eight LED indicator lights is stopped and displayed, but all cases of big hits and misses (even small hits if a small hit is installed) Since it is configured so that at least one LED indicator light is turned on instead of being turned off, a maximum of 255 (= 2 ^ 8-1) types of identification information can be displayed.

Similarly, with respect to the above-mentioned second special symbol display unit 71, depending on the operation mode of the eight LED indicator lights arranged in a row in the horizontal direction, a maximum of 255 (= 2) is displayed when the second special symbol is stopped. ^ 8-1) It is possible to display various types of identification information. Specifically, the combination of turning on and off the eight LED indicator lights is stopped and displayed, but all cases of big hits and misses (even small hits if a small hit is installed) Since it is configured so that at least one LED indicator light is turned on instead of being turned off, a maximum of 255 (= 2 ^ 8-1) types of identification information can be displayed.

Further, in the upper row, the four LED indicator lights arranged on the left side of the first special symbol display unit 70 are used for displaying information related to a normal symbol (normal symbol). The two LED indicators arranged on the left side of the above-mentioned first special symbol display unit 70 constitute a normal symbol storage display unit 85 for displaying the number of reserved storages of the normal symbol, and on the left side thereof. The two LED indicator lights arranged side by side constitute a normal symbol display unit 59.

The normal symbol display unit 59 is adapted to perform variable display and stop display of the normal symbol depending on the operation mode of the two LED indicator lights. Then, the normal symbol display unit 59 can display up to 3 (= 2 ^ 2-1) types of identification information at the time of stop display. Specifically, the combination of turning on and off the two LED indicator lights is stopped and displayed, but it is configured so that at least one LED indicator light is turned on instead of turning off all the lights when hit or miss. Therefore, a maximum of 3 (= 2 ^ 2-1) types of identification information can be displayed. However, as a modification, unlike the first special symbol display unit 70 and the second special symbol display unit 71, the normal symbol display unit 59 may be completely turned off when it is off, and in that case, a maximum of 4 (=). 2 ^ 2) It is possible to display various types of identification information.

Further, the round number display unit 86 is composed of two LED indicators arranged on the left side of the normal symbol display unit 59 in the upper row and two four LED indicators on the left end of the lower row located below the normal symbol display unit 59. Further, in the lower row, the four LED indicators between the round number display unit 86 and the second special symbol display unit 71 are the first state display unit (state indicator 1) 87a and the second state display unit in order from the left. (Status indicator 2) 87b, a third status display unit (status indicator 3) 87c, and a fourth status display unit (status indicator 4) 87d.

The first state display unit 87a described above is lit when the probability fluctuation function related to the special figure is activated, and the second state display unit 87b is lit when the probability fluctuation function related to the normal drawing is activated. There is. Further, the second state display unit 87b is lit even when the opening is extended, which is the so-called electric support (electric chew support) state. Further, the third state display unit 87c is used as a separate (right-handed) state indicator light. Further, the fourth state display unit 87d is used as an error indicator lamp.

Here, the above-mentioned third state display unit 87c (separate state indicator light) is lit not only during the electric support state but also during the big hit. In addition, during the big hit, even if it is during the consecutive villas, the flag (electric support flag) for setting the electric support state is off. Further, the third state display unit 87c can be turned on even when the normal electric accessory in a state other than these (normal time) is open for a long time.

As shown in FIG. 3, the main control display device 53 (game board side main control display device) having such a configuration is electrically connected to the main board 102 described above. Then, various display units in the main control display device 53 are controlled by the main board 102. In addition, in FIG. 3, among various display units in the main control display device 53, only the normal symbol display unit 59, the first special symbol display unit 70, and the second special symbol display unit 71 are shown.
<< Functions of main control display device >>

When the game ball passes through the above-mentioned operating port 68, the normal symbol display unit 59 blinks, and the variation display of the normal symbol is executed. Then, when a predetermined fluctuation time (normal symbol fluctuation time) elapses after the fluctuation display of the normal symbol is started, the normal symbol is stopped and displayed. Then, when the normal symbol is displayed in the out-of-order mode (out-of-shape mode), it is normal if the ball enters the subsequent operating port after the lapse of a predetermined stop time (normal figure stop fixed time). The next variation display related to the symbol is started. In addition, when the normal symbol is stopped and displayed in a predetermined hit mode (hit mode), the process shifts to the next variable display as in the case of the loss, while the hit of the previously stopped and displayed normal symbol is displayed. Depending on the mode, the 1-2 start winning opening 62B opens for a predetermined time.

The number of reservations related to the normal symbol lottery is the number of game balls that have passed through the operating port 68 while the normal symbol is changing, and indicates the number of times the normal symbol lottery has not yet been executed. That is, if the symbol change previously performed in the normal symbol memory display unit 85 is not completed, the fluctuation start condition is not satisfied, and when the symbol change is completed, the fluctuation start condition is satisfied and is held. Based on the stored lottery result (holding lottery result), a new symbol change will be started. The upper limit of the number of holdings is 4, and the holding storage is not performed in excess of 4.

For the display of four types of numerical values by the normal symbol storage display unit 85, for example, when the number of holds is 0 (no hold), both are turned off, and when the number of holds is 1, one of them is turned on. It is possible to turn off the other one. Further, when the number of holds is 2, both are lit, when the number of holds is 3, one of them is lit and the other is blinked, and when the number of holds is 4, both are blinked. It is possible to display.

The display of the number of reserved numbers of the first special symbol by the first special symbol storage display unit 83 described above is performed by displaying four types of information with two LED indicator lights as one set. The display of the number of reserved numbers of the second special symbol by the second special symbol storage display unit 84 described above is also performed by displaying four types of information with the two LED indicator lights as one set.

When the game situation in which the right-handed hit should be performed is reached, the display is performed in a predetermined mode using the third state display unit 86c of the main control display device 53 (see FIG. 7). In this embodiment, the third state display unit 86c is set to be turned off at the time of left-handed hitting, which is a game situation to be left-handed, and to be turned on at the time of right-handed hitting, which is a game situation to be right-handed.
<Structure of production display device and basic display contents>

Subsequently, the configuration of the effect display device 60 described above and a basic display example of the effect display device 60 will be described. In this embodiment, a large-sized (for example, about 15 inches) liquid crystal display is used as the effect display device 60. In the display area 194 of the effect display device 60, other effect displays such as an effect display for the first special symbol or the second special symbol displayed by the main control display device 53, a story display, and the like are performed. A variety of images are displayed on the effect display device 60, and here, a basic effect display directly related to the first special symbol or the second special symbol will be described.

As described above, when the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is started in the main control display device 53, the effect display device 60 displays the effect as shown in FIGS. 8A and 8B. A variable effect with a variable display of 190 symbols (also referred to as “decorative symbols”) is executed. In this embodiment, the effect symbol 190 is composed of the left effect symbol 190a, the middle effect symbol 190b, and the right effect symbol 190c. In the following, the left, middle, and right effects symbols 190a to 190c may be described as "effect symbols 190" or "effect symbols 190a to 190c" depending on the situation.

Further, in the present embodiment, the effect symbol 190 has nine types of element symbols (symbol element effect symbols) having the meanings of the symbols "1" to "9". The other effect symbols, the middle effect symbol 190b and the right effect symbol 190c, also have nine types of element symbols meaning the numbers "1" to "9", like the left effect symbol 190a. The details of the above-mentioned element symbols will be described later.

With the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol on the main control display device 53, the above-mentioned effect symbol 190 is variablely displayed on the effect display device 60 (see FIG. 8A). In this embodiment, the variable display of the effect symbols is such that the left effect symbol 190a to the right effect symbol 190c are individually moved (vertically scrolled) in the vertical direction, and the above-mentioned element symbols are sequentially displayed in the display area 194. Is executed by. As the scroll direction of the effect symbols 190a to 190c, various modes such as a horizontal direction, a rotation, and a turn can be adopted in addition to the vertical direction.

Further, the effect symbol 190 may form a so-called "reach" combination as an intermediate stage of the variable display. In this "reach", two of the effect symbols 190 (here, the left effect symbol 190a and the right effect symbol 190c) have the same number, such as "7" and "7", and have the same meaning. Alternatively, the combination is composed of symbols having a predetermined relationship. Further, in this "reach", the remaining one symbol (here, the medium effect symbol 190b) other than the effect symbols 190a and 190c that constitute the combination of the reach (tempai) cannot form the combination with the other effect symbols. It is changing.

As the display mode of the effect symbol 190, many types of "reach" and various other types can be adopted, and details of the various display modes will be described later. Further, in the effect display device 60, various effects other than the effect by the effect symbol 190 are performed, and the details thereof will be described later.

Further, in the present embodiment, the effect display device 60 uses a liquid crystal display, but the present invention is not limited to this, and other devices such as a mechanical drum body and an LED display body are used as long as the application is not hindered. It may be one using a kind of display body. Further, the effect display device 60 is not limited to the one provided with only one display body, and may be composed of a combination of a plurality of display bodies by adding, for example, an additional display body.

Further, it is also possible to provide such an additional display body as a movable effect member and to form a gimmick by the additional display body. Then, usually, an additional display body is arranged avoiding the outside of the display area 194 so as not to interfere with the visual recognition of the display area 194 of the effect display device 60, and a predetermined effect pattern is executed. In some cases, it is conceivable that an additional display body appears in front of the display area 194.
<Configuration related to setting change function>

Next, the configuration related to the setting change described above and the method of setting change will be described. FIG. 5A shows a partially enlarged state in which the main substrate 102 is housed in the transparent substrate case 801. FIG. 5B shows a cross section taken along the line AA in FIG. 5A. It is shown enlarged and outlined. In FIG. 5A, the substrate case 801 is formed of a colorless and transparent plastic material in a box shape having a divided structure (for example, a two-divided structure).

As the divided structure of the substrate case 801, for example, a substrate holder that holds the main substrate 102 and a cover body are combined, and the substrate holder and the cover body are connected via a caulking structure that leaves a trace at the time of separation. Can be adopted. In the board case 801, the connector 802 (shown with a code only partly) used for connecting to other devices such as the sub-main board 301 and the like is formed in a size that does not cause a gap as much as possible. It is exposed from the opened opening.

The main board 102 is visible through the transparent board case 801. In FIG. 5A, the CPU (main CPU) 501, the test terminal mounting area 806, the above-mentioned setting display 807, and the above-mentioned input are also shown. The spherical state indicator 808 is shown by a broken line, and the other devices are not shown. Of these, the test terminal mounting area 806 is an area where the test terminals are mounted only when the ball ejection test or the like is performed in the product test stage, and the test terminals are mounted on the main board 102 in the mass production stage. Not.

The above-mentioned setting display 807 displays the selected setting value only when the setting is changed or the setting is confirmed. Then, the setting display 807 is currently set with respect to a set value for making the operating probability of the accessory continuous operating device (the operating probability of the device that continuously operates the special electric accessory, the so-called jackpot probability) different. The value can be displayed. Further, a 7-segment display for one digit is used for the setting display 807. Here, in this embodiment, although not shown, a dot display unit is provided in the lower right corner of the 7-segment display in the setting display 807.

A setting key cylinder (also referred to as "setting key switch") 809 and a setting change button (also referred to as "setting change switch") 810 are arranged in the vicinity of the setting display 807, and the setting key cylinder 809 and setting The setting change operation unit 811 is configured by the change button 810 and the like. As shown in FIG. 5B, the setting changing operation unit 811 opens the setting changing opening / closing lid (hereinafter referred to as “opening / closing lid”) 812 of the board case 801 to show FIG. 5A. It is designed to be exposed as shown.

The opening / closing lid 812 is formed, for example, integrally formed with the substrate case 801 via a resin hinge, and the protruding knob portion 813 is pulled by a finger to open it as shown by an arrow B while resisting an elastic force. Can be exemplified. When closing the opening / closing lid 812, the lid is laid down from the state shown in FIG. 5B (not shown), and the free end side is locked to the substrate case 801.

The above-mentioned ball entry state display 808 is used as a performance display unit of the pachinko gaming machine 10, and can display a base (value of the number of prize balls per number of shots) for each game state. In this embodiment, as shown by an enlarged solid line in the lower right portion of FIG. 5A, a 4-digit 7-segment display is used for the ball entry status display 808. Further, a dot display unit (reference numeral omitted) is provided in the lower right corner of the 7-segment display of each digit of the ball entry status display 808.

In this embodiment, as described above, the CPU 501, the test terminal mounting area 806, the ball entry status display 808, the setting change operation unit 811 and the setting display 807 lap in a plan view (rear view of the game machine). They are arranged so that they do not overlap (do not overlap). Further, in order to prevent misidentification of the display, the ball entry status display 808 and the setting display 807 are arranged at intervals of a predetermined distance or more (for example, 30 mm or more).

In this embodiment, the left side in FIG. 5B is the free end when the game machine frame 11 is opened, and the setting change operation unit 811 and the setting display 807 are arranged near the free end side. By doing so, consideration is given to making it easier to change the set value, etc., while the ball entry status indicator 808 is arranged on the rotation axis (fixed end) side when the game machine frame 11 is opened. , When the game machine frame is opened, consideration is given to prevent the displayed information from being unintentionally viewed by the player. Of course, if priority is given to fraud prevention when changing the set value, the setting change operation unit 811 and the setting display 807 should be formed on the right side of the main board 102 when viewed from the front (the rotation axis side of the game machine frame 11). Just do it.

Here, in this embodiment, in consideration of the above points, an opening / closing lid 812 is provided in the portion corresponding to the setting change operation unit 811 so that the setting change operation unit 811 cannot be easily accessed, and the set value is set. The setting change operation unit 811 is configured so as not to be exposed except for the case of change work, confirmation work of setting information, and the like. In the following, the setting change operation unit 811 and the setting display 807 will be described with reference to FIG. 5B.

First, in the upper surface portion of the board case 801 that has a positional relationship corresponding to the setting change operation unit 811 so that the setting key (key) can be inserted into the setting key insertion port (sign omitted) of the setting key cylinder 809. In addition, an opening 816 having a predetermined size is formed so that the setting change button 810 can be operated. However, by forming a partition wall such as a side wall from the opening 816 toward the upper surface of the main board 102, other electronic components (for example, CPU 501) of the main board 102 cannot be accessed through the opening 816. It has become. Further, the setting key cylinder 809 in which the setting key insertion port (signature omitted) is formed corresponding to the opening 816, and the push-type setting change button 810 are moved up and down when viewed from the back of the pachinko gaming machine 10. Further, an opening / closing lid 812 corresponding to the size of the opening 816 is provided on the substrate case 801 so as to be openable / closable in a state of being urged in a direction of always closing the opening 816.

Next, an outline of the operation method such as setting change and the operation of setting change / setting display will be briefly described. To confirm the set value, first operate the power switch 40 (see FIG. 2) to turn off the power, then open the open / close lid 812 at a predetermined angle against the urging force, and set the key cylinder 809. Insert the setting key (key) into the setting key slot and rotate the key to the right. Then, the power switch 40 (see FIG. 2) is operated again to turn on the power without pressing the initialization switch 544. By this operation, the current set value (for example, if the range of the set value is "1" to "6", the corresponding numerical value) is displayed on the setting display 807 formed of the 7-segment LED, and the setting display mode is set. Some segments (here, dot portions) are driven to light to indicate that there is. In this embodiment, when the game machine is running (for example, control based on the input related to the progress of the game such as winning detection of the starting winning opening can be executed), the setting value change processing is performed. Is configured so that it cannot be done.

On the other hand, when changing the set value, first, the power switch 40 (see FIG. 2) is operated to turn off the power, and then the opening / closing lid 812 is opened at a predetermined angle against the urging force, and the setting key is used. Insert the setting key (key) into the setting key insertion port of the cylinder 809 and rotate the key to the right. Then, while pressing the initialization switch 544, the power switch 40 (see FIG. 2) is operated again to turn on the power. By this operation, the current setting value is blinked on the setting display 807 formed of the 7-segment LED, and some segments (here, the dot part) are turned off (off) to indicate that the setting change mode is set. Is displayed.

In this state, each time the setting change button 810 is pressed, a new setting value added by +1 to the current setting value is temporarily stored, and the stored setting value is displayed on the setting display 807. The administrator in the amusement park operates the setting change button 810 so as to set an arbitrary (target) setting value. In this embodiment, if the set value at the time of turning on the power is "1", each time the setting change button 810 is pressed once, "1", "2" ... "5", "6", "1" Is changed as follows.

Then, by operating the setting change button, the key inserted in the setting key cylinder 809 is rotated to the left in a state where the setting value is changed to an arbitrary setting value (the setting display 807 displays the arbitrary setting value), and the setting is made. After the change process is completed and the current set value is lit and displayed on the setting display 807 and some segments (dot portion in this case) are lit for a predetermined time (for example, 1000 ms), the set value is displayed. And both the dots are turned off.
<Electrical configuration of pachinko game machines>

Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment will be described, but here, the main electrical configuration will be extracted and described. First, as shown in FIG. 4, the pachinko gaming machine 10 is provided with a power supply board 251, a payout control board 103, a main board 102, a sub-main board 301, and the like. Of these, the above-mentioned payout control board 103, game ball rental device connection terminal board 106, launch control board 107, and the like are connected to the power supply board 251. Further, the main board 102 is connected to the payout control board 103 via the frame relay terminal board 108. Further, a main symbol display board (also referred to as “design display board”) 256 and a sub-main board 301 constituting the above-mentioned main control display device 53 are connected to the main board 102, and the sub-main board 301 is connected to the sub-main board 301. , The above-mentioned sub-sub board 302 is connected.

The power supply board 251 of the various configurations described above is provided in the power supply unit 32 (see FIG. 2) described above. A frame effect connection board 300 and a game ball rental device connection terminal board (not shown) are connected to the power supply board 251, and a ball is connected to the game ball rental device connection terminal board (not shown). A ball coin operation board or the like used for coin operation is connected.

A touch switch 310 provided on the launch handle 20 (see FIGS. 1 and 20 (a)) is connected to the launch control board 105 described above. Although not shown, the touch switch 310 is connected to a firing touch lever and a lock fitting for grounding. When a player, a game hall clerk, or the like touches the firing handle 20 with a finger, the touch switch (also referred to as “touch sensor”) 310 detects this contact and changes the mode of the output signal.

Further, the launch control board 105 is connected to the launch intensity volume 311, the launch stop switch 312, and the launch device 43 described above. Of these, the firing intensity volume 1311 is used to change the firing intensity of the game ball according to the amount of rotation of the firing handle 20. The launch stop switch 312 is used to detect an operation with a part of a finger (thumb or the like) holding the launch handle 20 and stop the launch.

The electric power from the power supply board 251 is supplied to the main board 102 via the payout control board 103 and the frame relay terminal board. Further, as shown in FIG. 3, the main board 102 is provided with a main control display device 53, a passage detection device 69, and a 1-1 start winning prize via a game board connection board and a game board relay terminal board (not shown). Detection device 74A, 1-2 start prize detection device 74B, start port solenoid 76, second start prize detection device 75, general prize detection device 73, large prize detection device 78, large prize opening (open) solenoid 80, and A magnetic sensor, a solenoid sensor (not shown), etc. are connected. Here, in the present embodiment, the connection of the first start winning detection device 74 and the second start winning detection device 75 to the main board 102 is directly performed without going through the game board connection board or the game board relay terminal board. It is done.

The power from the power supply board 251 is supplied to the sub-main board 301 via the frame effect connection board 300 and the frame connection board 303. Further, in the sub-main board 301, in addition to the above-mentioned frame connection board 303 and frame effect connection board 300, the glass frame effect connection relay board 305 and the glass frame effect connection board 306 are used for the effect on the game machine frame 11. Each device is connected.

As the production equipment in the pachinko gaming machine 10, there are a frame illuminated L2 substrate 317, a frame illuminated R2 substrate 318, (left) speaker 21 (L), (right) speaker 21 (R), and the like. Further, in this embodiment, a cross key (cross button) board, an effect button board, an elevating motor, an effect button (operation button) motor, a button position sensor, and the like are also provided, but the figure is not complicated in FIG. Therefore, these illustrations are also omitted.

Further, a device for a game board, a device for displaying an image, a device for voice control, and the like are also connected to the sub-main board 301. Among these, as a device for a game board, there is a board surface illumination connection board 331. The board surface illumination connection board 331 is connected to the sub-main board 301 via the frame connection board 303 and the effect interface board 304 described above. The center illumination board 332 used for the illumination of the center decoration 64 is connected to the board surface illumination connection board 331. Further, although not shown, the effect sensor substrate, other illumination boards, the effect motor, and the like are also connected to the board surface illumination connection board 331, although not shown. Here, although not shown, various illumination boards and effect motors are connected to the effect interface board 304.

The above-mentioned image display device connected to the sub-main board 301 includes a sub-sub board (image control board) 302, and the sub-sub board 302 has a liquid crystal unit (also a liquid crystal module) via an image display connection A board 336. 42 is connected. Here, in this embodiment, although not shown, another liquid crystal unit connected to the effect interface board 304 via the image display connection B board is also provided. Further, as the above-mentioned voice control device connected to the sub-main board 301, there are a voice control board (voice board) 339 and a voice ROM (ROM) board 340.

Subsequently, the configurations of the main board 102, the payout control board 103, and the like will be described. As shown in FIG. 4, a CPU (main CPU) 501, a ROM (main ROM) 502, and an RWM 503 are mounted on the main board 102. Of these, as the CPU 501, for example, a central processing unit in a resin-packaged CPU device (CPU device) can be used. The "ROM" and "RWM" described in this embodiment are comprehensive concepts including both those built in the CPU device and those externally attached to the CPU device.

Further, although not shown, in the CPU device mounted on the main board 102, in addition to the CPU 501, a control clock generation circuit, a random number clock generation circuit, a 16-bit random number circuit, and an 8-bit random number are included. It is equipped with a random number circuit for. Of these, the random number circuit for 16-bit random numbers and the random number circuit for 8-bit random numbers are for generating hardware random numbers which are built-in random numbers.

Further, the main board 102 is equipped with an input / output port 505 that inputs / outputs data to / from an external device of the main board 102. Further, although not shown, various circuit parts such as an interrupt circuit and a timer circuit are formed on the main board 102.

The ROM 502 described above stores a game program for the CPU 501 to perform processing related to the game, predetermined control data, and the like. Further, the above-mentioned RWM 503 rewritably stores data required for various processes, data generated during the process, and the like when the game program is executed by the CPU 501.

Subsequently, a CPU (payout CPU) 511, a ROM (payout ROM) 512, and an RWM 513 are mounted on the payout control board 103. Of these, as the CPU 511, for example, a central processing unit in a resin-packaged CPU device (CPU device) can be used. Further, the ROM 512 stores a payout program for the CPU 511 to perform a process related to the payout, predetermined control data, and the like. Further, the above-mentioned RWM 513 rewritably stores data required for various processes, data generated during the process, and the like when the payout program is executed by the CPU 501.

The above-mentioned sub-main board 301 includes a CPU (sub-main CPU) 521, a ROM (sub-main ROM) 522, a work RWM 523, an input port 527, an output port 528, a bus line (not shown), and the like. .. The output side of the main board 102 is connected to the input side of the input port 527, and the CPU 521, ROM 522, work RWM 523, output port 528, and the like are connected to the output side of the input port 527.

The CPU 521 of the sub-main board 301 controls the display of the effect display device 60 based on the effect control command (command) for displaying the symbol transmitted from the main board 102. The ROM 522 is a memory for storing various control programs and fixed value data executed by the CPU 521, and the work RWM523 temporarily stores the work data and flags used when executing various programs by the CPU 521. Memory.

Data transmission / reception between the main board 102 and the sub-main board 301 described above is performed in the form of one-way communication (one-way communication) from the main board 102 to the sub-main board 301. Since the unidirectionality of communication is ensured between the main board 102 and the sub-main board 301, data cannot be transmitted from the sub-main board 301 to the main board 102. Therefore, the information held by the main board 102 cannot be referred to by the sub-main board 301 unless the main board 102 transmits the information to the sub-main board 301. In order to enable such communication in one direction, for example, a communication regulating means (buffer circuit or the like) is mounted on the main board 102, and data output to the sub-main board 301 is performed by using this communication regulating means. It is possible to do it through.

The sub-sub board 302 described above includes a CPU 531, a work RWM 532, a program ROM 533, a character ROM 535, an image controller (VDP) 536, an input port 538, an output port 539, a bus line (not shown), and the like. Further, the image controller (VDP) 536 includes a video memory 540. The output side of the sub-main board 301 is connected to the input side of the input port 538, and each device such as the CPU 531, the work RWM 532, and the program ROM 533 is connected to the output side of the input port 538.

The above-mentioned video memory 540 is a memory for storing display data displayed on the effect display device 60, and by rewriting the content of the image data in the video memory 540, the display content (frame image) of the effect display device 60 is used. ) Is changed. The character ROM 535 is a memory for storing character data such as a symbol displayed on the effect display device 60. The image controller 536 adjusts the operation timings of the CPU 531, the video memory 540, and the output port 539 to intervene in reading and writing data, and reads the display data stored in the video memory 540 from the character ROM 535 at a predetermined timing. Further, the symbols are superimposed in the order of the layers in which the priority is determined in advance and displayed on the effect display device 60.
<Power supply and data backup>

The power supply board 251 described above includes a power supply unit 541 for supplying power to each unit of the pachinko gaming machine 10, and an initialization switch circuit unit 543 having an initialization switch 544. The power supply unit 541 supplies an operating voltage required for each of the main board 102, the payout control board 103, and the like through a power supply path (not shown). More specifically, the power supply unit 541 takes in a predetermined voltage supplied from the outside and applies a predetermined amount of voltage for driving various switches, motors, logic circuits, etc. to the main board 102, the payout control board 103, and the like. And supply to other predetermined equipment.

The initialization switch circuit unit 543 sends an initialization signal to the main board 102 and the payout control board 103 to clear the backup data when the power is turned on, for example, when the initialization switch 544 is pressed by the manager of the game store. It is equipped with a circuit that outputs. As will be described later, the main board 102 and the payout control board 103 can retain (back up) the stored data even when the power supply to the power supply board is cut off. Then, when the above-mentioned initialization signal is input to the main board 102 and the payout control board 103 when the power of the pachinko gaming machine 10 is turned on, the data (backup data) backed up by the main board 102 and the payout control board 103 is displayed. It will be cleared. Here, in the present embodiment, as described above, the main board is configured to transition to the setting change state according to the input status of the initialization switch 544 and the input status of the setting key when the power is turned on. It is configured so that the presence / absence of initialization, the range of initialization, and the like can be determined according to the signal from the initialization switch circuit unit 543 and the input signal related to the setting key.

The initialization switch 544 is divided into one for the main board 102 and one for the payout control board 103, and the backed up data is cleared separately for the main board 102 and the payout control board 103. It may be. Further, for example, when the initialization switch 544 is operated at the time of power-up, the backup data for the main board 102 and a part of the backup data of the payout control board 103 are cleared and added to the payout control board 103. It is also possible to adopt a configuration in which the remaining backup data of the payout control board 103 is cleared by further operating the payout initialization switch (not shown).

As described above, the RWM 503 on the main board 102 is capable of holding (backing up) data by supplying a backup voltage from the power supply board 251 even after the power supply of the pachinko gaming machine 10 is cut off. That is, the RWM 503 is provided with a backup area 503a in addition to a memory and an area (not shown) for temporarily storing various data and the like. This backup area 503a can be used as a stack pointer when the power is cut off (when a power failure occurs) when the power is cut off due to a power failure (including a so-called momentary power failure due to a momentary voltage drop). , Each register, an area for storing the values of I / O and the like. Then, when the normal power supply is started up or the power failure is resolved, the state of the main board 102 and the like is returned to the state before the power supply is cut off based on the information in the backup area 503a. Here, regarding the power cutoff, in the following, it may be referred to as "power cutoff" in addition to "power cutoff", but both have the same meaning.

Writing to the backup area 503a is executed when the power is cut off by the power off processing (described later), and restoration of each value written in the backup area 503a is executed in the power on processing (described later) when the power is turned on. .. As the backup area 503a, it is possible to use an RWM (external RWM) externally attached to the CPU 501 and connected to a backup power supply.

Further, with respect to the RWM 513 on the payout control board 103, similarly to the RWM 503 on the main board 102, a backup voltage is supplied from the power supply board 251 after the power supply of the pachinko gaming machine 10 is cut off so that data can be retained (backed up). It has become. That is, the RWM 513 of the payout control board 103 is provided with a backup area 513a in addition to a memory and an area (not shown) for temporarily storing various data and the like. This backup area 513a is for storing the stack pointer at the time of power failure, each register, the value of I / O, etc. when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like (when a power failure occurs). Area. Then, the state of the payout control board 103 is returned to the state before the power is cut off based on the information of the backup area 513a when the normal power supply is started up or the power failure is resolved.

Writing to the backup area 513a is executed when the power is cut off by the power off processing in the payout control board 103, and restoration of each value written in the backup area 513a is performed when the power is turned on in the payout control board 103 ( It is executed in the control start process). As the backup area 513a, it is possible to use an RWM (external RWM) externally attached to the CPU 511 and connected to the backup power supply, as in the case of the main board 102.

The main board 102 described above is provided with a power failure monitoring circuit unit 506 for monitoring power failure due to a power failure or the like as described above. The power failure monitoring circuit unit 506 outputs a power failure signal (power failure signal) to the CPU 501 of the main board 102 and the CPU 511 of the payout control board 103 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. More specifically, the power failure monitoring circuit unit 506 monitors the DC stable (for example, 30 volt) voltage, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 541 of the power supply board 251 and this voltage becomes less than a predetermined voltage. In this case, the occurrence of a power failure (power cutoff) is detected and the above-mentioned power failure signal is output. Based on the input of such a power cut signal, the CPU 501 of the main board 102 and the CPU 511 of the payout control board 103 execute a predetermined power cut process.

The electrical characteristics of the main board 102 and the like are such that even after the DC stable voltage becomes less than the predetermined voltage at which the power failure signal is output, a sufficient time is required to execute a predetermined process such as a power supply disconnection process. During that time, the output of the voltage of 5 volts, which is the drive voltage of the control system, is maintained at a normal value.

Further, in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 4, the output of the power supply board is supplied to the main board 102 via the payout control board 103. However, the present invention is not limited to this, for example, the output of the power supply board may be supplied to the payout control board 103 via the main board 102, or may be individually supplied to the main board 102 and the payout control board 103 in a separate system. You may do so.

Further, the power failure monitoring circuit unit 506 described above can be arranged in a portion other than the main board 102. For example, the power failure monitoring circuit unit 506 may be formed on the power supply board 251 and a power failure signal may be input from the power failure monitoring circuit unit 506 to each board on the power supply board 251. It is also possible to omit the input of the power interruption signal from the main board 102 to the payout control board 103. Further, the main board 102 may be able to exert the function of the power supply board 251. In this case, it is conceivable to form the power supply unit 541 on the main board 102.

Further, the power failure monitoring circuit unit 506 may be provided on the payout control board 103, and each of the payout control board 103 and the main board 102 may output a power failure signal and perform a power failure process based on the power failure signal. Further, of the main board 102 and the payout control board 103, the power failure monitoring circuit unit 506 may be provided only on the payout control board 103, and the power failure signal may be transmitted from the payout control board 103 to the main board 102.

Here, the above-mentioned main CPU 501, payout CPU 511, and the like are provided with an NMI (non-maskable interrupt) terminal. Further, as the trigger for executing the above-mentioned power cutoff process, a hardware-like one that generates a non-maskable interrupt (NMI) based on a power cutoff signal indicating a voltage drop is input to the NMI terminal of the main CPU, and a timer. There is a software-like process that confirms the power off flag set when a voltage drop is detected by periodic interrupt processing based on the settings.

In this embodiment, the power supply cutoff process is performed based on a hardware-like opportunity by NMI. Then, the signal input to the NMI terminal can be performed, for example, by inputting the power failure signal from the power failure monitoring circuit unit 506 to the NMI terminal. Here, the signal input to the NMI terminal can occur not only when the power failure monitoring circuit unit 506 outputs a power failure signal, but also when noise is mixed into the signal line connected to the NMI terminal. The transition to the power cutoff process can also be performed based on a software-like method. It is also possible to set the power off flag based on the power off signal input to the NMI terminal to trigger the execution of the power off process. Here, the data is backed up by the main board 102 and the payout control board 103, but the data is not limited to this. For example, the data of the storage area is backed up by the sub-main board 301, and the main board 301 is the main. It is also possible to perform data backup in the same manner as the board 102 or the payout control board 103.

Next, the basic functions of the main board 102 will be described. The main board 102 of this embodiment fulfills various functions such as ball entry determination, lottery, and command transmission by the functions of the above-described configurations (see FIG. 4).

FIG. 6 shows typical functional means in each of the main board 102, the sub-main board 301, and the sub-sub board 302. Of these, the main board 102 includes a ball entry determination means 110, a first lottery means 111, a second lottery means 112, a general drawing lottery means 113, a hold control means 114, a main display control means 115, and a special game control means 116. It includes specific game control means 117, open / close control means 118, advance information notification means 119, main command transmission means 120, and the like. Then, the main board 102 uses these functional means to draw a lottery for a special symbol, a lottery for a normal symbol, hold control, a main control display, a special game, a specific game, an open / close control, and prior information, as described in order below. Execute notification etc.

The above-mentioned winning ball determination means 110 includes sensors provided at each winning opening for entering a game ball into each winning opening (operating opening, various starting winning openings, large winning opening, general winning opening, out opening, etc.). Judgment is made based on the signal output from.
<< Win / Loss Lottery Function for Special Designs >>

The first lottery means 111 described above executes the first lottery based on the balls entering the 1-1 starting winning opening 62A and the 1-2 starting winning opening 62B. The first lottery means 111 has the functions of the first lottery value acquisition means 121, the first hit / fail determination means 122, the first symbol determination means 123, and the first pattern determination means 124. The result of the first lottery is represented by the first special symbol that has been stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display unit 70 of the main control display device 53 (see FIG. 7) described above.

Similarly, the above-mentioned second lottery means 112 executes the second lottery based on the ball entering the second starting winning opening 63. The second lottery means 112 has the functions of the second lottery value acquisition means 125, the second winning / failing determination means 126, the second symbol determination means 127, and the second pattern determination means 128. The result of the second lottery is represented by the second special symbol that has been stopped and displayed on the second special symbol display unit 71 of the main control display device 53 described above.

The first lottery value acquisition means 121 provided in the first lottery means 111 described above relates to the first lottery when the ball enters the 1-1 start winning opening 62A or the 1-2 starting winning opening 62B. The value of the jackpot random number is acquired as the first winning / failing lottery value. In addition, the second lottery value acquisition means 125 provided in the above-mentioned second lottery means 112 sets the value of the jackpot random number related to the second lottery to the second winning or failing when the ball enters the second starting winning opening 63. Obtained as a lottery value.

In this embodiment, the jackpot random number acquired as the first winning / failing lottery value and the jackpot random number acquired as the second winning / failing lottery value are a hardware random number (hard random number) and a software random number (soft random number). It is generated by the calculation (addition) used. As the hardware random number, for example, a built-in random number generated by a random number circuit for 16 bits is used, and as the software random number, a value updated for each interrupt by a random number generation program in software is used. In addition, either one of the hardware random number and the software random number may be used.

The first winning / failing determination means 122 in the first lottery means 111 determines the winning / failing based on the first winning / failing lottery value, and whether or not the first winning / failing lottery value corresponds to a predetermined value (winning value) to be a hit. To judge. Similarly, the second winning / failing determination means 126 in the second lottery means 112 makes a winning / failing determination based on the above-mentioned second winning / failing lottery value, and the second winning / failing lottery value becomes a predetermined value (winning value) to be a hit. Judge whether it is applicable or not. In the winning / failing determination by the first winning / failing determination means 122 and the second winning / failing determination means 126, the winning / failing determination table that defines the correspondence between the first winning / failing lottery value or the second winning / failing lottery value and the lottery result of the big hit lottery (for example, FIG. a)) is used. Here, the big hit at the time of normal probability change shown in FIG. 9A indicates a random number value range that is always a big hit, and the big hit at the time of probability change is a random value range that becomes a big hit only at the time of probability change. It is shown that.

When the first symbol determining means 123 in the first lottery means 111 and the second symbol determining means 127 in the second lottery means 112 win either the jackpot in the jackpot lottery relating to the first special symbol or the second special symbol. , The type of special symbol is determined based on the jackpot symbol determination table (see FIG. 10). The jackpot symbol determination table for the first lottery defines the relationship between the symbol lottery value, which is a random number value (symbol random number) related to the symbol determination, and the type of the special symbol. In this embodiment, as described above, the winning (V winning) to the "specific entrance" is set as the operating condition for the probability fluctuation (probability change), so that the "probability change" in the figure is during the jackpot game. It indicates that it is a type of jackpot that facilitates a valid V-winning, and "normal" indicates that it is a type of jackpot that makes it difficult to make a valid V-winning during a jackpot game. In addition, V winning is "easy" when firing is continued toward the big winning opening during a big hit game, and there is a high probability (almost 100% in this embodiment except for irregular cases) of V winning. It is supposed to be designed to be used.

Here, the symbol lottery value may also be referred to as a "symbol random number per special symbol" or a "symbol random number" related to the special symbol. Further, in this embodiment, a small hit is included in the type of hit, and the first symbol determining means 123 and the second symbol determining means 127 are special in the case where the small hit is won in the big hit lottery related to the special symbol. The type of symbol is determined based on the small hit symbol determination table (not shown).

The symbol lottery value is acquired when the ball enters the starting winning opening, as in the case of the winning / failing lottery value described above. In addition, the types of special symbols are associated with the types of hits, and the types of big hits and the presence or absence of small hits are determined in association with the acquired symbol lottery value.

The first pattern determining means 124 in the first lottery means 111 and the second pattern determining means 128 in the second lottery means 112 determine the variation pattern of the special symbol in the corresponding special symbol display unit based on the special symbol variation pattern table. decide. The special figure fluctuation pattern table defines the relationship between a large number of special figure fluctuation patterns and a pattern lottery value which is a random number value (variation pattern random number) related to the determination of the fluctuation pattern of the special symbol.

The pattern lottery value is acquired when the ball enters the starting winning opening, as in the case of the winning / failing lottery value described above. Further, the fluctuation patterns related to the first special symbol and the second special symbol correspond to various game situations such as, for example, at the time of big hit, at the time of miss, presence / absence of reach, presence / absence of time reduction, number of holdings, number of fluctuations after big hit, and the like. A plurality of different special figure fluctuation pattern tables are provided.

The fluctuation pattern related to the special symbol (special symbol fluctuation pattern) defines the time (variation time) from the start to the stop of the fluctuation in the fluctuation display of the special symbol. The special figure fluctuation pattern defines various long and short fluctuation times, for example, from 1 second or less to several tens of seconds, depending on the type. That is, in each special symbol fluctuation pattern, a fluctuation time is set as an end condition of the fluctuation display, and the above-mentioned first special symbol display unit 70 or second special symbol display unit 71 (see FIG. 7) is special. When the fluctuation display of the symbol is started and the specified fluctuation time elapses, the special symbol is stopped and displayed.

Most of the special figure fluctuation patterns to be selected at the time reduction are set so that the fluctuation time is relatively shorter than the special figure fluctuation pattern to be selected at the non-time reduction, in other words, at the time reduction. It can be said that the average value per fluctuation of the selected fluctuation time is shorter than the average value per fluctuation of the fluctuation time selected during non-time reduction. Further, it can be said that the time saving (time saving game) is a game state in which the fluctuation efficiency of the special symbol is high (a state in which the time related to one fluctuation is short). However, the special figure fluctuation patterns that can be selected in the case of non-time saving and when the number of holdings is 4, include those having a shorter fluctuation time than the specific special figure fluctuation pattern in the time saving. There is.

Further, in this embodiment, most of the fluctuation patterns selected in a predetermined situation such as a probability change have an extremely short fluctuation time (for example, about 0.6 seconds). Then, in such a situation, the fluctuation display of the special symbol and the effect associated therewith are executed based on the fluctuation pattern of the extremely short time.
<< Relationship between winning / failing random numbers related to special symbols and set values >>

Next, the relationship between the winning / failing random number related to the special symbol and the set value will be described. Although the description will be given here with reference to FIGS. 9 and 12, the values of the hit / miss random numbers in FIG. 9 and the hit / miss random numbers in FIG. 12 do not exactly match. FIG. 9 shows the random numbers of the pachinko game machine 10 as specifically as possible, while FIG. 12 shows a general case where the player's advantage can be changed by the set value. This is because it shows an example of the configuration. Therefore, in the example of FIG. 9 and the example of FIG. 12, the example of FIG. 12 includes a small hit in the special figure 1, and the numerical value of the big hit probability (normal time and probability change time) of FIG. 12 is the pachinko gaming machine 10. There is a difference that it does not correspond to the one (the one in FIG. 9). However, it is considered sufficient in the sense that the jackpot probability differs when the set value changes, and the winning / failing random number and the set value are explained using FIG. 12 showing a general example.

FIG. 9A shows a random number for the set value “1” among the set values “1” to “6” in this embodiment. Regarding the winning / failing random number table of the set value “1” shown in FIG. 9A, the jackpot value at the normal (probability) time in the random number range “0 to 65535” for both the first lottery and the second lottery. Is "0 to 297". For the first lottery, the random number range "960-64875" is an outlier, and for the second lottery, the random number range "960-64875" is a small hit value.

In addition, at the time of high probability (at the time of probability change), in both the first lottery and the second lottery, the above-mentioned jackpot value at normal time is "0-297" and the jackpot value at the time of probability change is "298 to 959". Is a big hit value, and normally, "298 to 959" is an outlier in both the first lottery and the second lottery. Further, for the first lottery, the random number range "64876 to 65535" is an outlier, and for the second lottery, the random number range "64876 to 65535" is a small hit value. As a second lottery, a random number that is always an outlier is set with a limited number of numbers (for example, the number range "65" (in this case, the probability value is about 1/1000)). In addition, the probability of being an outlier (number range) may be different for each setting.

FIG. 12 shows a list of hit values for each set value. Of these, the set value "1" is different from FIG. 9A, but "0 to 205" is the jackpot value at the normal time. Therefore, the number of random numbers is 206, and the jackpot probability at normal times is 1/318 (≈206/65536). On the other hand, for the set value "2", the jackpot value at the normal time is "0 to 206". Therefore, the number of random numbers is 207, and the jackpot probability at normal times is 1/317 (≈207 / 65536).

Further, regarding the set value "3", the jackpot value at the normal time is "0 to 207". The number of random numbers is 208, and the jackpot probability at normal times is 1/315 (≈208/65536). Regarding the set value "4", the jackpot value at the normal time is "0 to 208". The number of random numbers is 209, and the jackpot probability at normal times is 1/314 (≈209 / 65536).

Further, regarding the set value "5", the jackpot value at the normal time is "0 to 209". The number of random numbers is 210, and the jackpot probability at normal times is 1/312 (≈208/65536). Regarding the set value "6", the jackpot value at the normal time is "0 to 210". The number of random numbers is 211, and the jackpot probability at normal times is 1/311 (≈211/65536). In this way, the range of the jackpot value is determined so that the jackpot probability increases as the numerical value of the set value increases.

At the time of high probability, the jackpot value is "0 to 615" for the set value "1", and the jackpot probability is 1/106. For the set values "2" to "6", the jackpot values are "0-618", "0-621", "0-624", "0-627", and "0-630" in order. , The approximate jackpot probabilities are "1/106", "1/105", "1/105", "1/104", and "1/104" in order.

Here, the reason why the jackpot probability is explained so as to include the same value such as "1/105" and "1/104" is because the jackpot probability is expressed by rounding the decimal point. In the present embodiment, the range of the jackpot value is determined so that the jackpot probability increases as the numerical value of the set value increases. In addition, the multiplication factor of the probability between the low probability time and the high probability time is "3 times" for all the set values, which is common.

For small hits, the random value range is "64876 to 65535" regardless of the set value in both the normal time and the high probability time. Therefore, the probability of small hits is 1/99 regardless of the probability state or the set value. Further, in the example of FIG. 12, the design values of the ball output rate are 97%, 98%, 99%, 100%, 101%, and 102% for the set values "1" to "6", respectively.

In addition, in the example of FIG. 9A and FIG. 12, "0" which is the minimum value of the numerical range is set as a jackpot value, but the present invention is not limited to this, and "0" may be excluded from the jackpot value. By doing so, it is possible to prevent fraud in case of fraud that intentionally minimizes the hit / fail random value updated by resetting the power supply or the like. Further, it is possible not to assign "0" to the small hit and not to assign the maximum value (here, "65535") to the big hit or the small hit.

In this embodiment, a pre-judgment (so-called look-ahead) is performed on the result of the winning / failing lottery performed by using the winning / failing random numbers shown in FIGS. 9A and 12; It will be described later based on (a) and (b).
<< Various lottery functions related to ordinary symbols >>

Subsequently, the above-mentioned general drawing lottery means 113 will be described. The general map lottery means 113 includes a general map lottery value acquisition unit 129, a general map winning / failing determination means 130, a general map symbol determination means 131, and a general map pattern determination means 132. Then, when the passage of the game ball at the operating port 68 is detected by the above-mentioned entry determination means 110, the general drawing lottery means 113 executes a lottery (general drawing lottery) related to the normal symbol based on the detection result. To do.

In this general drawing lottery, the general symbol lottery value acquisition means 129 acquires the general symbol lottery value which is a random number related to the normal symbol (the general symbol random number), and the general symbol determination means 131 causes the general symbol determination table. Seen. In this normal figure determination table, the correspondence between the normal figure lottery value and the type of the normal symbol is defined. Then, the normal figure winning / failing determination means 130 determines whether or not the normal symbol associated with the normal figure lottery value corresponds to a hit, and if it corresponds to a hit, the type of hit is determined. Will be done.

Further, the normal figure pattern lottery value is acquired when the ball enters the operating port 68, and the obtained normal figure pattern lottery value is used by the normal figure pattern determining means 132 to obtain a fluctuation pattern related to the normal symbol (normal figure fluctuation pattern). ) Is determined. Each normal figure fluctuation pattern is associated with a normal figure pattern lottery value which is a random number related to the normal figure fluctuation pattern (random number of the normal figure fluctuation pattern), and is linked to the acquired normal figure pattern lottery value, and the situation of the game. The pattern of fluctuations in the normal map is determined according to the situation.

Further, in this embodiment, the normal figure lottery value, which is a random number related to the normal symbol, and the normal figure pattern lottery value are created by using only software random numbers.
<< Functions related to holding special symbols >>

Subsequently, the above-mentioned hold control means 114 will be described. The hold control means 114 has a first hold means 133, a second hold means 134, and a normal figure hold means 135. Of these, the first holding means 133 is a predetermined variation start condition related to the first special symbol when a new ball is entered into the 1-1 start winning opening 62A or the 1-2 starting winning opening 62B. If is not satisfied, information (first special figure hold storage information) related to various random numbers (first winning / failing lottery value, first symbol lottery value, etc.) acquired by entering the ball is temporarily held and stored. In this embodiment, the upper limit value of the hold related to the first special symbol is set to 4, and the hold related to the first special symbol is possible within the range not exceeding this upper limit value.

The variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol that was executed when the above-mentioned ball was entered is completed, and the first special symbol or the second special symbol that occurred before the above-mentioned entry is further completed. If there is no hold related to the first special symbol, the change start condition for the first special symbol is satisfied, and a new symbol change related to the first special symbol is permitted.

The above-mentioned second holding means 134 is also acquired by entering the ball if the predetermined fluctuation start condition related to the second special symbol is not satisfied when the ball is newly entered into the second starting winning opening 63. Information related to various random numbers (second winning / failing lottery value, second symbol lottery value, etc.) is temporarily held and stored.

When the change display of the second special symbol, which was executed when the ball was entered, is completed, the change start condition for the second special symbol is satisfied, and the new symbol change for the second special symbol is satisfied. Will be allowed. In this embodiment, the upper limit of the hold related to the second special symbol is set to four as in the case of the first special symbol.

In the above-mentioned first special symbol and the second special symbol, when the symbol for starting the special game is stopped and controlled by the special game, the fluctuation start condition is determined after the special game is completed.
<< Functions related to holding ordinary symbols >>

Subsequently, the above-mentioned general drawing holding means 135 will be described. The normal figure holding means 135 is a random number (common figure lottery) acquired by entering a ball if a predetermined fluctuation start condition related to a normal symbol is not satisfied when a ball is entered at the operating port 68 (see FIG. 1). Information related to (value, etc.) (Public map hold storage information) is temporarily held and stored. Then, until the fluctuation start condition is satisfied, the fluctuation display of the normal symbol related to the above-mentioned entry is not permitted. In this embodiment, the upper limit of the hold related to the normal symbol is set to 4, and the hold related to the normal symbol is possible within the range not exceeding this upper limit value.

When the fluctuation display of the normal symbol, which was executed when the ball was entered as described above, is completed and the normal electric accessory is not operating, the fluctuation start condition related to the normal symbol is satisfied, and the new normal symbol is related. It will be allowed to change the design.
<< Functions related to main control display >>

Subsequently, the above-mentioned main display control means 115 will be described. The main display control means 115 includes a first special figure control means 136, a second special figure control means 137, a normal figure control means 138, a hold display control means 139, and other display control means 140. Of these, the first special symbol control means 136 causes the first special symbol display unit 70 (see FIG. 7) to change the first special symbol according to the fluctuation pattern of the first special symbol determined by the first lottery means 111. A display (for example, a blinking display in which a predetermined part of LED indicator lamps blink every 100 msec) is performed. Then, when the fluctuation time determined by the fluctuation pattern elapses, the first special symbol is stopped and displayed at the determined symbol on the first special symbol display unit 70.

Further, if the fluctuation start condition related to the above-mentioned second special symbol is satisfied, the second special symbol control means 137 follows the fluctuation pattern determined by the second lottery means 112, and the second special symbol display unit 71 ( (See FIG. 7), the variation display of the second special symbol is performed. Then, when the fluctuation time determined by the fluctuation pattern elapses, the second special symbol is stopped and displayed at the determined symbol on the second special symbol display unit 71.

Further, if the fluctuation start condition related to the above-mentioned ordinary symbol is satisfied, the ordinary symbol control means 138 follows the fluctuation pattern of the ordinary symbol determined by the ordinary symbol lottery means 113, and the ordinary symbol display unit 59 (see FIG. 7). ) To display the fluctuation of the normal symbol. Further, when the fluctuation time determined by the fluctuation pattern elapses, the normal symbol is stopped and displayed at the determined symbol on the normal symbol display unit 59.

Further, the hold display control means 139 displays the number of holds related to the above-mentioned first special symbol, second special symbol, and ordinary symbol. Then, the display of these reserved numbers is performed by the first special symbol storage display unit 83, the second special symbol storage display unit 84, and the normal symbol storage display unit 85 of the main control display device 53 shown in FIG. Be told. In addition, the above-mentioned other display control means 140 controls the display on the main control display device 53 other than the above-mentioned first special symbol, second special symbol, ordinary symbol, and various hold displays.
<< Functions related to special games >>

Subsequently, the above-mentioned special game control means 116 will be described. When the special game control means 116 wins a big hit and the special symbol is stopped in a predetermined big hit mode, the special game control means 116 determines that the special game operating condition is satisfied, and as described above, determines a predetermined value according to the type of the big hit. A special game to be opened is executed in a mode (a predetermined number of unit games or an opening pattern of a large winning opening during a unit game).
<< Functions related to specific games >>

Subsequently, the above-mentioned specific game control means 117 will be described. The specific game control means 117 controls the above-mentioned probability change, time reduction, and the like. The specific game control means 117 shifts the game state after the end of the special game to a probabilistic state, a time saving state, or the like according to the type of big hit and the game result during the big hit. In this embodiment, the probability change state can be set as a specific game state if a V prize is won during the big hit. When the probability change state is reached, the probability change state continues until the next big hit. During the probability change state, the winning probability of the big hit by the first lottery means 111 and the second lottery means 112 is maintained at a value higher than the normal time which is the non-probability change time. In this embodiment, the probability change state ends when the special symbol is changed 10,000 times in the probability change state (see FIG. 28), but when the player plays a game, the probability change state ends 10,000 times. Since it is almost impossible to win a big hit by the time the game result is obtained, it is called "continue until the next big hit".

Further, in the time saving state, the total number of variable display times of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is the predetermined number of end condition times (for example, 20 times, 40 times, 100 times, 10000 times, etc.) counting from the end time of the special game. ) Will be continued. Although the details will be described later, the end timing of the time saving state that is set may differ depending on the game result (whether or not there is a V prize) during the special game (big hit game). Further, during the time reduction, the first pattern determining means 124 and the second pattern determining means 128 use the variation pattern for shortening the time so that the variation display time of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is substantially shorter than the normal state. Select.

Further, as described above, the ball entry facilitation game (electric chew support) is executed according to the time reduction as the specific game, and the operation of the ordinary electric accessory becomes easy, and the 1-2 start winning prize is obtained. The opening / closing door 91 arranged at the entrance of the mouth 62B can be easily opened. The opening / closing control of the opening / closing door 91 is controlled by the opening / closing control means 118 described later. The time saving state and the end timing of the ball entry facilitation game may not be synchronized. For example, the time saving state continues until the same timing as the probability change state, and the ball entry facilitation state is counted from the end time of the special game. It can also be configured to be continued until a predetermined number of end conditions (for example, 20 times, 40 times, 100 times, 10000 times, etc.) is reached.
<< Functions related to open / close control >>

Subsequently, the above-mentioned opening / closing control means 118 will be described. The opening / closing control means 118 controls the opening / closing operation of the ordinary electric accessory (opening / closing door 91) of the 1-2 starting winning opening 62B and the large winning opening 90. When the normal symbol is stopped in a specific mode, the open / close control means 118 sends an opening instruction to the starting port solenoid 76 to open the normal electric accessory of the 1-2 starting winning opening 62B. Further, the opening / closing control means 118 controls to send an opening instruction to the large winning opening (opening) solenoid 80 in the special game, and opens the large winning opening 90.
<< Functions related to advance information notification >>

Subsequently, the above-mentioned advance information notification means 119 will be described. When the advance information notification means 119 has a ball in the 1-1 start winning opening 62A, the 1-2 starting winning opening 62B, or the second starting winning opening 63, the symbol variation display corresponding to the entry is made. Is held or not, processing is performed to transmit the acquired information related to various random value values to the sub-board (here, the sub-main board 301) as advance notification information.

As the above-mentioned advance notification information, each of the above-mentioned winning / failing lottery values (first winning / failing lottery value or second winning / failing lottery value), each symbol lottery value (first symbol lottery value or second symbol lottery value), and each pattern Information such as what kind of winning / failing range, symbol range, and pattern range the lottery value (first pattern lottery value or second pattern lottery value) belongs to can be exemplified.

By transmitting such advance notification information, various pre-reading effects can be performed on the sub-board 104 side. As the look-ahead effect, a hold notice, a continuous notice, and the like can be exemplified, and details of these will be described later.
<< Functions related to command transmission >>

Subsequently, the above-mentioned main command transmitting means 120 will be described. The main command transmitting means 120 transmits a command (main command) from the main board 102 to the sub-main board 301. The command transmission from the main board 102 to the sub-main board 301 includes various information at various timings such as when the start prize is won, when the special symbol changes start, when the special symbol changes stop, and when a big hit occurs. ..
<Basic functions of sub-board>

Next, the basic functions of the above-mentioned sub-board 104 will be described. In this embodiment, the sub-board 104 is composed of a sub-main board 301 and a sub-sub-board 302, and fulfills various functions such as command reception from the main board 102, effect pattern determination, effect display control, and effect execution.

As shown in FIG. 6, the sub-main board 301 includes a main command receiving means 141, an effect pattern determining means 142, a sub-main command transmitting means 143, and the like. Further, the sub-main board 301 is provided with functional means such as a sound control means 144 for controlling the speaker output and the like, and an optical control means 145 for controlling the game effect lamp output and the like.

The effect pattern determined by the effect pattern determining means 142 includes information for designating the display effect displayed on the effect display device 60, and the sound effect and the light effect to be performed together with the display effect as needed. During the variable display of the symbol 190, an effect suggesting a high degree of expectation of a big hit is executed. Here, the "expectation level" in this embodiment can be rephrased as the "reliability level". In the following, "expectation level" describes the production stage (normal pattern, chance-up pattern, fixed pattern) that raises the expectation that it will be a big hit due to fluctuations when it appears among the same type of advance notice production patterns, and one production. About the probability that the hit fluctuation pattern is included in the fluctuation pattern corresponding to the effect of 1 when the hit fluctuation pattern (variation pattern in hit fluctuation) information and the deviation fluctuation pattern information (variation pattern in loss fluctuation) are confirmed. It may be used for each of the descriptions of what is described, and in general, "highly expected production" refers to a production that is often a big hit when the production occurs.

When the effect pattern is determined by the effect pattern determining means 142, the effect pattern information indicating the determined effect pattern is transmitted to the sub-sub board 302 as a sub-main command via the sub-main command transmission means 143. Further, the command transmitted from the sub-main board 301 to the sub-sub board 302 includes sound information and the like in order to read sound data, lamp data, and the like from the ROM of the sub-sub board.

As shown in FIG. 6, the sub-sub board 302 is provided with sub-main command receiving means 146, effect execution control means 147, and the like. Then, in the sub-sub board 302, the effect execution control means 147 sequentially outputs necessary image data to the liquid crystal unit 42 (see FIG. 4) based on the sub-main command from the sub-main board 301 to form an animation image. Then, the effect display device 60 displays the effect movie (effect movie).
<Example of specific mode related to specific game>

Next, a specific mode of the above-mentioned specific game will be described. As described above, as specific games, a special symbol probability variation function (probability variation), a special symbol variation time shortening function (time reduction), and a ball entry facilitation game (normal symbol probability variation function, normal symbol variation time reduction) The function, the combination of the opening extension function of the ordinary electric accessory, or the opening extension function of the ordinary electric accessory alone) is provided. Then, at least one of these various specific games is executed according to the result of the big hit lottery (stop display symbol of the special symbol) or the game result during the big hit.
<< Probability fluctuation game >>

The above-mentioned probability change changes the probability state of the game related to the special symbol after the big hit so that the probability of occurrence of the big hit is higher than that of the normal probability state. In the pachinko gaming machine that adopts ST, the duration of the probabilistic state (probability change period) is determined based on the number of fluctuations of the special symbol.

The number of fluctuations of the special symbol is determined as one from the variation display of the special symbol to the stop display. The probability variation period can be set in various ways in ST, but for example, the total number of fluctuations of the first special symbol and the second special symbol after the end of the special game is set to a predetermined number of times (for example, 100 times). .. In this way, the function that allows the probability variation period to end before the next big hit occurs can be referred to as ST or the number-cut probability variation. It is also possible to set the probability variation period to a long period such as 10,000 times, and in reality, a big hit almost always occurs during the ST period.
<< Game for shortening fluctuation time >>

The above-mentioned time reduction substantially shortens the fluctuation time of the special symbols (first special symbol and second special symbol) in the main control display device 53 as compared with the case of the normal game. Here, "generally shortening" does not mean that the game is shortened in all cases, and in some cases, the fluctuation time of the special symbol is equivalent to that of the normal game or longer than that of the normal game. It means that it can include. Then, according to this time reduction, since the fluctuation time of the special symbol is shortened, the starting winning openings (1-1 starting winning opening 62A, 1-2 starting winning opening 62B, and 2nd starting winning opening) are continuously made. Even if a prize is won in the mouth 63), the variable display and the stop display of the special symbol can be smoothly advanced at short intervals, and it is possible to secure many opportunities for a big hit lottery.

Further, the duration of the time saving state (time saving period) is determined based on the number of fluctuations of the special symbol, as in the probabilistic state. Then, in this embodiment, the time saving state is continued until the total number of fluctuations of the first special symbol and the second special symbol after the end of the special game reaches a predetermined number of times (for example, 100 times).

In the above example, the probability variation period and the time reduction period are set to the same period, but the probability variation period and the time reduction period may be different from each other. For example, the probability variation period can be set to 104 times, and the time saving period can be set to 100 times. Also, the time saving period is not limited to being constant. For example, the time saving period can be set to any one of 0 times, 20 times, 40 times, 60 times, 80 times, 100 times, etc., depending on the type of jackpot that has occurred. Further, it is possible to set the time saving period to a long period such as 10000 times so that a big hit always occurs during the time saving in reality.

In addition, the "time saving state" generally refers to a state in which a flag is set to use a tendency of the lottery result of the variable pattern lottery (different variable pattern lottery table) different from the case of not the time saving state. However, the tendency of the variable display time determined by the time saving state and the non-time saving state is reversed, that is, the non-time saving state (the state in which the lottery is performed based on the fluctuation pattern lottery table for normal time) is the time saving state. In some cases, the result may be a variable pattern lottery with a shorter variable display time than (a state in which a lottery is performed based on a variable pattern lottery table for a short time). Further, in the case of the time saving state, the table used for the variable pattern lottery may be switched depending on the relationship with other gaming states such as whether or not the time is shortened.

Further, it is possible to provide a so-called fall lottery function. The following can be exemplified as this fall lottery. For example, after the probability variation or time reduction reaches a predetermined number of times (for example, 50 times) less than the above-mentioned maximum number of fluctuations (here, 100 times), each change of the special symbol is performed until the maximum number of fluctuations is reached. A lottery (lottery to end a specific game) is executed to determine whether or not to end the probability change and time reduction. Then, when the specific game end lottery is won, the probability change and the time reduction are ended, and the game state from the next fluctuation returns to the normal state without the probability change and the time reduction.

Further, it is not limited to executing both the probability change and the time saving, and it is also possible to execute only one of them in the specific game. For example, depending on the type of jackpot won, it is possible to give only the time reduction and not the probability change, or to not give the time reduction and give only the probability change.
<< Game to facilitate ball entry >>

Subsequently, the above-mentioned ball entry facilitation game will be described. This easy-to-enter game is a game in which a function related to an ordinary electric accessory is set in an advantageous manner for the player, and the opening mode of the 1-2 start winning opening 62B can make it easier to accept the game ball than usual. It is in a state. When the ball entry facilitation game is executed, the first is determined by the control mode such as the time reduction related to the normal symbol, the probability fluctuation related to the normal symbol, the opening extension related to the normal electric accessory, and the combination of these control modes. -2 The ease of entering the ball into the starting winning opening 62B is enhanced, and an easy-to-enter state is formed. In relation to this "easy entry game" and the above-mentioned "base", "electric support", etc., the following are "high base", "high base state", "low base", "low base state", " Terms such as "non-electric support" are used. In the following, the "low base state" corresponds to the "non-electric support state", and the "high base state" corresponds to the "electric support state".

Among the various control modes described above in the normal symbol, the time reduction related to the normal symbol is a control mode in which the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is shorter than that in the normal state, and the probability fluctuation related to the normal symbol is the winning probability of the normal symbol. It is a control mode (probability change related to a normal symbol) that improves the above state from the normal state. Further, the opening extension related to the ordinary electric accessory is a control that opens (long opening) the opening time of the 1-2 start winning opening 62B longer than the opening (short opening) in the normal time (during non-specific game). It is an aspect.

As described above, the ball entry facilitation game during the specific game uses functions such as shortening the time of the normal symbol, changing the probability of the open lottery, and extending the opening of the normal electric accessory to the 1-2 start winning opening 62B. Increase the ease of entering the ball. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and one or two of these three functions may be used to enhance the ease of entering the ball into the 1-2 starting winning opening 62B. Further, at least one of the three functions may be switched between the period in which the function is performed and the period in which the function is not performed, depending on the game state. Further, in the case where the game is not an easy-to-enter game, the winning probability of the open lottery is set to 0, and a mode in which the normal electric accessory is not released at all can be adopted.

The duration of such a ball-enhancing game can be determined based on a short period of time related to the special symbol. For example, it is possible to adopt a control mode in which the ball entry facilitation game is continued during the time reduction related to the special symbol, and the ball entry facilitation game ends when the time reduction related to the special symbol is completed. Then, in this case, the fluctuation pattern of the normal symbol (normal symbol fluctuation pattern) in which the symbol variation is started after the time reduction of the special symbol is completed is provided for the normal time (during non-specific game). It is possible to make it determined from the fluctuation patterns.

It is also possible to set the period of the ball entry facilitation game to a period different from the time saving period. Further, it is possible to set the period of the ball entry facilitation game to a long period such as 10,000 times, and in reality, a big hit can be almost always generated during the ball entry facilitation game period.
<Main production of pachinko machines>
<< Basic display mode of production pattern >>

Next, various effects executed by the sub-main board 301 and the sub-sub-board 302 based on the command from the main board 102 to the sub-main board 301 will be described. Then, here, first, the basic display mode of the said effect symbol 190 (see FIGS. 8A and 8B) will be described. Regarding the effect symbol 190, extremely various display modes and control modes are defined with respect to matters such as its type, function, use, and cooperation with other effect displays. However, here, in order to avoid complicating the explanation, basic matters will be described, and more detailed matters relating to the effect symbol 190 will be described later as appropriate.

The effect symbol 190 is variablely displayed on the effect display device 60 as the special symbol is variablely displayed on the main control display device 53 (see FIG. 8A). Further, the effect symbol 190 is stopped and displayed on the effect display device 60 (see FIG. 8B) as the special symbol is stopped and displayed on the main control display device 53.

The stop symbol displayed when the effect symbol 190 is stopped is composed of a combination of three symbols, the left effect symbol 190a, the middle effect symbol 190b, and the right effect symbol 190c. Then, when the result of the big hit lottery on the main board 102 is a big hit, a combination of three doublets, such as "777" and "555", is used as a stop symbol representing the big hit. Is displayed. In addition, if the result of the big hit lottery is wrong, one or all of the production symbols are different from the other production symbols, such as "767", "928", and "331". The symbol 190 is stopped and displayed.

Here, the "stop symbol" and the "stop symbol" in the present embodiment mean that the three effect symbols 190 are "fixed stop". That is, even if the three effect symbols 190a to 190c are displayed in the display area 194 of the effect display device 60 while maintaining a combination of, for example, "767" and "928", that alone is "fixed stop". It does not correspond to what you did. Then, the state in which the effect symbol 190 has not reached the "fixed stop" while maintaining the combination can be referred to as the "temporary stop" state.

As a display mode of such "temporary stop", for example, a state in which the effect symbol 190 vibrates (sways) in small steps can be exemplified. Then, a mode of temporary stop in which the effect symbol 190 sways in small steps while maintaining the combination can be referred to as a mode of "sway fluctuation" or the like. Examples of the swaying mode of the effect symbol 190 in this "temporary stop" include vertical or horizontal linear movement and horizontal rotational movement, and the movement range may be about several millimeters.

Further, as the display mode of the above-mentioned "fixed stop", a state in which all the effect symbols 190a to 190c are stopped while maintaining the combination can be exemplified after the temporary stop state. Further, at the time of this "fixed stop", it is possible to perform an effect indicating that the fixed stop has been performed. Then, as an effect indicating that the confirmation is displayed, the state of the fixed stop is maintained for a predetermined time (for example, about 1 second), and the fixed effects 190a to 190c are added with special effects. (Design effect), lighting the LED (lamp) provided on the center decoration 64, and the like can be exemplified.

By producing the temporary stop (temporary stop display) in this way, it is possible to make it appear that a plurality of fluctuations are being executed during one fluctuation. In addition, depending on the effect of the temporary stop, whether or not to make a fixed stop for the player (in other words, whether to make a re-variation without a fixed stop, a hit with a fixed stop, or a loss from the fixed stop Etc.) can be fueled.

Here, as a symbol effect, each effect symbol 190a to 190c is illuminated only momentarily (for example, about 0.5 seconds), and a bright spot is circulated once or a plurality of times around each effect symbol 190a to 190c. It is possible to adopt various modes such as enlarging or reducing the symbols 190a to 190c, moving the effect symbols 190a to 190c by about several millimeters, and returning them to their original positions.

Further, in the above-mentioned "reach" display mode, the effect symbol that maintains the combination of reach may be displayed in the above-mentioned "temporary stop" mode. Then, after the reach display by this "temporary stop", the symbol (here, the middle effect symbol 190b) that has been variablely displayed constitutes an out-of-order combination (out-of-reach combination) and "temporarily stops" to perform the combination. It is possible to exemplify an effect such that "fixed stop" is performed and the variable display ends while maintaining the effect. Further, from the state in which the three effect symbols 190a to 190c are "temporarily stopped" by the combination of the detached reach, the middle effect symbol 190b resumes the fluctuation after displaying a predetermined cut-in image (cut-in effect). Then, a production (second half reach) in which the reach production develops into a highly reliable one (a one with a relatively high reliability related to a big hit) can be exemplified.

The scroll display mode of the effect symbol 190 is not limited to the above-mentioned vertical scrolling, and various display modes can be adopted. Then, as another display mode, for example, a side-scrolling mode in the horizontal direction (right to left, etc.) or a left effect symbol 190a to a right effect symbol 190c are individually rotated (rotated) around the vertical axis. , An example of a rotation mode in which a variable display is performed. Further, for example, the left effect symbol 190a to the right effect symbol 190c are enlarged in the display area 194 from the rear to the front, that is, from the back to the front of the screen along a straight or curved (turning) trajectory. A display mode such as sequential feeding can also be exemplified. Further, it is also possible to adopt a scroll display mode in which the effect symbol from the rear to the front descends from the upper side to the lower front side.

Further, the scrolling mode is not limited to adopting any one of the various modes as described above, and for example, when a predetermined effect is executed, the predetermined scrolling mode is switched to another scrolling mode. It is also possible. Further, for a plurality of effect modes, it is possible to make the scroll mode different for each effect mode.

Further, as a scroll mode for deterministically notifying the jackpot, a full rotation effect may be performed. In this full rotation effect, the decorative symbols such as the effect symbols 190a to 190c are scrolled at a low speed while being aligned.

In addition, when reach occurs, reach voice can be output as sound output. This reach voice is a notice that suggests a hit expectation or the like by a sound generated when the reach is established or after a predetermined time (for example, 1 second) has elapsed after the reach is established. By executing this reach voice, it is possible to suggest the degree of expectation of hitting, etc. in combination with the image display, the movement of the accessory, etc. when the reach is reached.

Further, in FIGS. 8A and 8B, a display mode in which the combination of the effect symbols 190 is stopped and displayed only in the middle stage in the vertical direction of the display area 194 is exemplified, and the effective line is in the horizontal direction. There is only one line. However, the number of effective lines is not limited to this, and for example, the number of effective lines can be set to 2 or 5.

Further, as illustrated in FIG. 8B, the effect symbol 190 is composed of a part meaning a predetermined symbol such as a number (element symbol which is the above-mentioned symbol element effect symbol) and a pattern representing a symbol other than the predetermined symbol. It is possible to compose by combining with the part (element symbol which is a non-symbol element production symbol). As a part consisting of a pattern representing a symbol other than a predetermined symbol, various design drawings and portraits, and combinations thereof can be exemplified, and various design drawings and portraits combined with the symbol can be shown as a moving image. It is also possible to. In the example of FIG. 8B, a heart pattern is adopted as a pattern representing a symbol other than a predetermined symbol.

Further, in the examples shown in FIGS. 8A and 8B, the reduced effect symbol display area 361 described above is superimposed on the screen. In the reduced effect symbol display area 361, the effect symbols (also referred to as "mini effect symbols" or "mini symbols") corresponding to the respective effect symbols 190a to 190c are smaller in size than the respective effect symbols 190a to 190c. It can be shown. By displaying the mini symbol in the reduced effect symbol display area 361, the situation of whether or not each effect symbol 190a to 190c is changing, and the situation when each effect symbol 190a to 190c is stopped (the situation at the time of temporary stop). (May include)) can be shown inconspicuously separately from each of the effect symbols 190a to 190c.

Further, even if the effect pattern related to the effect symbols 190a to 190c is provided so as to be invisible to the player by displaying the reduced effect symbol display area 361, the effect symbol is diversified. It is possible to show the player the situation of 190a to 190c. For example, when performing a background notice effect that covers the entire screen (a production with a high expectation of a big hit in which a specific character is displayed large in the background), this background notice effect is displayed with priority over the effect symbols 190a to 190c. In other words, by increasing the transparency of the effect symbols 190a to 190c so that the player can see them, the visibility of the background notice effect is not significantly reduced, and yet the reduced effect symbol display area 361 is displayed. It is possible to grasp the fluctuation status and stop status. Here, the mini symbol in the reduced effect symbol display area 361 is not limited to the three-digit display according to the effect symbols 190a to 190c, and may be, for example, two digits or one digit, and is represented by a symbol, a Chinese numeral, or the like. May be done. Further, in the reduced effect symbol display area 361, the two mini symbols of special figure 1 and special figure 2 may be displayed at the same time, or only the mini symbol corresponding to the special symbol which is the main body of the game state is displayed. It may be.

Further, in addition to such a reduced effect symbol display area 361, whether or not each effect symbol 190a to 190c is changing and which of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 is displayed is displayed. For example, it is possible to display a symbol indicated by a small one-digit number in an inconspicuous manner. Such a symbol can be referred to as a "guaranteed symbol", a "guaranteed symbol", or the like. The display position of the guaranteed symbol can be set so as not to be hidden even when a single or a plurality of movable effect members appear in front of the effect display device 60. Further, the display of the guaranteed symbol can be performed by providing a position that does not hide even if any movable effect member appears, or can be changed according to the movable effect member that appears.
<< Example of production pattern >>

Subsequently, the above-mentioned production pattern will be described. A large number of effect patterns are provided in a state associated with the variation pattern determined by the main board 102. Further, the effect pattern defines a mode of effect including the effect symbol 190. More specifically, the effect pattern defines an effect process such as a change process from the start of change to the stop of the change for the selected effect symbol 190, a background displayed in combination with the effect symbol 190, and story development. There is. And, there are some production patterns corresponding to the above-mentioned "with reach" and "without reach".

Of these, when the effect pattern of "with reach" is executed, the effect display device 60 performs a reach effect that becomes a big hit if one more effect symbol (here, the middle effect symbol 190b) is prepared. Then, when the result of the winning / failing lottery relating to the special symbol is a big hit, the doublet display such as "777" or "333" according to the type of the big hit is performed by the effect symbol 190 whose confirmation has been stopped. Further, when the result of the winning / failing lottery relating to the special symbol is out of order, for example, a combination indicating the out of place such as "767" or "515" is performed by the effect symbol 190 which has been confirmed and stopped.

Further, when the "no reach" effect pattern is executed, a non-reach combination in which the left effect symbol 190a and the right effect symbol 190c are not a reach combination, such as "928" and "331", is used. It is performed by the effect symbol 190 that has been fixed and stopped.

Some of these production patterns have various long and short fluctuation times, and in particular, the fluctuation pattern of "with reach" includes a fluctuation time of several minutes. In this embodiment, "no reach (about 3 to 10 seconds)" and "normal reach (10 to 20 seconds)" in the fluctuation pattern related to the above-mentioned special symbol (see FIGS. 11 (a) to 11 (c)). Degree) ”and“ Super reach (reach with high reliability of big hits) (about 30 seconds to 2 minutes) ”are provided with a non-reach effect pattern, a normal reach effect pattern, and a super reach effect pattern. Then, for example, a plurality of effect patterns are associated with one variation pattern in these effect patterns, and the number of effect patterns is wider than that of the above-mentioned variation pattern. Further, "super reach" can be paraphrased as "SP (special) reach".
<< Hold effect display related to special symbols >>

Next, the hold display (hold effect display) related to the special symbol performed in the effect display device 60 will be described. At the bottom of the display area 194 of the effect display device 60, as shown in FIGS. 8A and 8B, a first hold number display unit 196 showing the number of hold of the winning / failing lottery value in the first game, and a first The second hold number display unit 197 indicating the hold number of the winning / losing lottery value in the two games is displayed. In the following, in order to clarify the distinction between the functions of the first hold number display unit 196 and the second hold number display unit 197, a state in which both appear on the screen is illustrated, but the game at that time is illustrated. It is possible to make only the hold number display unit related to the special symbol that becomes the standard in the state appear on the screen. Further, although the individual hold display is represented by a perfect circle here for simplification of explanation and illustration, the hold display may be performed by other combinations of shapes and colors, character images, animations, and the like.

In this embodiment, when a hold related to the first game occurs, a predetermined hold display is performed on the first hold number display unit 196 described above. Furthermore, as the number of holds increases, a hold display is added. Then, when the number of holds reaches the upper limit, as shown in FIG. 8A, four hold displays are performed in the first hold number display unit 196.

Further, the hold display on the first hold number display unit 196 can be performed from the first display position to the fourth display position. That is, the first hold number display unit 196 includes the first display position to the fourth display position, and the rightmost portion of the first hold number display unit 196 as viewed from the player is the first display position. It has become. Then, a second display position, a third display position, and a fourth display position are provided in order toward the left end. Further, in the following, the hold display performed from the first display position to the fourth display position will be referred to as "ho 1", "ho 2", "ho 3", and "ho 4", respectively.

For example, in the effect display device 60, a hold occurs while the effect symbol 190 related to the first game is being performed and one hold display is not performed on the first hold number display unit 196. Then, the hold display is performed at the first display position at the right end (the position of "holding 1" described above). Then, at this time, it is assumed that no other hold display has been performed yet, and that "Ho 2" to "Ho 4" have not occurred. If a hold is further generated in the situation where the "hold 1" is generated in this way, the display related to the held hold is performed at the position of the "hold 2" to the left of the "hold 1". Then, when "Ho 1" and "Ho 2" are displayed and "Ho 3" and "Ho 4" are not displayed and a further hold occurs, "Ho 3" is displayed according to the number of holds that have occurred. And "Ho 4" are displayed.

Then, if the variation display executed when the "protection 1" occurs is completed and the other variation start conditions related to the first game are also satisfied, the reserved storage information related to the above-mentioned "protection 1" is stored. At the stage of being digested, the hold display of "Take 1" moves to the right side of the first hold number display unit 196. The fluctuation information display unit 195 is provided on the right side portion of the first reserved number display unit 196. The fluctuation information display unit 195 is an area for displaying information (the fluctuation information) related to the fluctuation display being executed at that time. That is, the hold display of "Holding 1" moves to the change information display unit 195 and changes to the change information display 198 when the change display related to the corresponding hold storage information is executed.

Here, when moving the hold display of "Ho 1" to the fluctuation information display unit 195, the display elements such as the size, color, and form of the item may be changed. In the examples of FIGS. 8A and 8B, the size is increased when the hold display of "Maintenance 1" is changed to the fluctuation information display 198. Further, in FIGS. 8 (a) and 8 (b), a state in which three hold displays of "hold 1" to "hold 3" are performed in the first hold number display unit 196 is illustrated.

Here, the display of a moving image representing a new hold display when a hold occurs can be referred to as a "occurrence display" or a "hold occurrence animation" related to the hold. In addition, when the hold is exhausted, in the first hold number display unit 196 (or the second hold number display unit 197), the display of the moving image when moving the hold display is "shift display" or "shift animation". It is possible to call it. Further, the display of the fluctuation information display 198 on the fluctuation information display unit 195 can also be referred to as a “holding digestion transmission image”, a “variation-corresponding image”, or the like. Further, in order to distinguish the number of holds from the hold number display area 367, the first hold number display unit 196 and the second hold number display unit 197 are separated from the first hold image display unit 196 and the second hold image display unit. It can also be called 197 or the like.

When the hold display in the “hold 1” is moved to the fluctuation information display unit 195 as described above, the standby order of the subsequent hold display is moved up, and the “hold 2” is shifted to the position of the “hold 1”. Further, when "ho 3" and "ho 4" are present, "ho 3" shifts to the position of "ho 2" and "ho 4" shifts to the position of "ho 3". Then, if a further hold occurs in such a situation, a new "hold 4" is generated, and the number of holds reaches the upper limit. Further, if a new hold does not occur, the hold display is shifted with the start of the next variable display, and the waiting order of each hold is raised.

In a broad sense, it can be regarded as a hold effect, including a state in which the hold display in "Ho 1" to "Ho 4" is changed to the change information display 198 in the change information display unit 195. Not limited to this, the hold display in "Ho 1" to "Ho 4" is set as the hold display, and the state changed to the change information display 198 in the change information display unit 195 is not included in the hold display. It is also possible.

In addition, when the variation display related to the effect symbol 190 is not performed and the number of holdings is 0, and there is a ball in the 1-1 start winning opening 62A or the 1-2 starting winning opening 62B, " The display of "Maintenance 1" is not performed (or is displayed for a moment), and the fluctuation information display 198 is directly (or via shift animation) displayed on the fluctuation information display unit 195. Then, only in such a case, it is possible to handle such that the fluctuation information display 198 in the fluctuation information display unit 195 is not included in the hold display.

Subsequently, the above-described second hold number display unit 197 will be described, but the same points as the first hold number display unit 196 will be omitted. In this embodiment, as shown in the figure, the second reserved number display unit 197 is located on the opposite side of the first reserved number display unit 196 (on the right side when viewed from the player) with the above-mentioned fluctuation information display unit 195 interposed therebetween. ), The relationships of "Ho 1" to "Ho 4" are arranged symmetrically in a color different from that of the first reserved image.

In addition, the hold display can be performed in various modes according to the gaming state. For example, when the probability of the big hit lottery is a normal probability and a high probability, and when the different production modes are controlled, the mode of holding display may be different from each other.

Further, the positional relationship between the first hold number display unit 196, the second hold number display unit 197, and the fluctuation information display unit 195 is not limited to the above, and can be changed in various ways. For example, in a pachinko machine of a type (digestion in the order of winning) in which special symbols and effect symbols 190 are variablely displayed in the order in which the starting prizes related to the first game and the second game are generated, 8 on the left side of the variable information display unit 195. It may be possible to arrange two pending displays. Further, in the pachinko gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, it is possible to make it possible that the hold display and the fluctuation information display 198 may be performed in association with the operation and effect related to the above-mentioned operation button 22. Further, in the parallel type pachinko gaming machine 10 as in the present embodiment, for example, only the first reserved number display unit 196 (or the second reserved number display unit 197) is displayed according to the gaming state, and the second special symbol is displayed. It is also possible not to display the hold even if the hold occurs (or to not display the hold even if the first special symbol is held).
<< Hold look-ahead effect related to special symbols >>

Next, a hold look-ahead effect, which is one of the advance notice effects (look-ahead effects) related to the special symbol, will be described. This hold look-ahead effect is an effect executed based on the above-mentioned hold storage information (first special figure hold storage information or second hold storage information). Further, in the hold look-ahead effect, a reach or a big hit occurs for a hold that is digested after the effect performed by using the effect symbol 190 or the like at that time by using the above-mentioned advance information notification function. It is executed as a production that suggests the expectation of doing.

For example, the hold display generated at the position of "hold 3" in the first hold number display unit 196 described above is a green hold display, unlike the display (for example, blue) which is the basic display mode in which the hold change is not made. It is shown that the degree of expectation such as the occurrence of reach is higher than that in the case of the normal blue aspect. Then, in addition to the coloring of blue and green, display modes such as yellow, red, gold, predetermined pattern, and rainbow color are provided, and the expectation of a big hit in the order of yellow, red, gold, predetermined pattern, and rainbow color rather than green. The production is such that it shows that the degree is high.

Here, as the display mode of the above-mentioned "predetermined pattern", an animal pattern such as a giraffe, a display mode including a predetermined character image, and the like can be exemplified. In addition to the color and pattern of the hold display, it is also possible to adopt items other than a perfect circle, a person image, and the like. Further, it is also possible to perform a look-ahead effect by combining the above-mentioned various display modes with a mode in which blinking or light emission is performed. Further, the hold that has won the look-ahead effect including the hold look-ahead effect can be referred to as, for example, "trigger hold".

The look-ahead effect related to the hold as described above may also be performed in the second game. Then, with respect to the second game, in addition to the basic color (orange), it is possible to provide display modes such as red, gold, rainbow, and a predetermined pattern. Further, as the hold display related to the second game, it is also possible to adopt an item other than a perfect circle shape, a person image, or the like.

Further, the look-ahead effect using the hold display in the first game and the second game as described above can be referred to as "hold change" or the like. Then, such a "hold change" includes a display mode different from the basic display mode as described above from the beginning of the hold occurrence, or a change in the display mode at a predetermined timing after the hold occurrence. and so on.

Among these, as those indicating the change in the display mode at the timing after the occurrence of the hold, for example, the hold occurs, the hold display is started, the hold is digested, and the hold display is, for example, "Hold 2". For example, the hold display changes while proceeding to "Take 1". Then, for example, when the hold occurs, the hold is displayed in blue (orange in the case of the second game) at the position of "hold 3", and when the hold is moved to the position of "hold 1", another color such as green is displayed. And so on.

Further, for example, after moving from the position of "Ho 3" to the position of "Ho 2" or from the position of "Ho 2" to the position of "Ho 1", the production is performed to some extent and then the hold change is performed. Sometimes. Further, in the effect after moving the position of the hold display, after the effect (hold change suggestion effect) is performed in a manner that arouses the expectation of the hold change, the hold may change or the hold may not change. The production related to the pending change may be performed.

In addition, as a hold change suggestion effect, the image object of the hold display gradually changes from a mode having a relatively low expectation to a mode having a high expectation, or returns to the original mode in the middle of the change to change to a hold change. In some cases, the effect may not be reached.

Further, in both the first game and the second game, when the fluctuation information display 198 is displayed, the hold display is changed from the basic color to a display mode such as red, gold, rainbow color, a predetermined pattern, or true. It may change to a display mode such as an item other than a circular shape or a person image to indicate the degree of expectation of a big hit.

Further, as the control mode related to the pending change as described above, the following can be exemplified. For example, when a hold occurs, a lottery (hold change pattern lottery) is performed to determine an effect pattern (hold change pattern) of the hold change. A hold change pattern table is used for this hold change pattern lottery, and in this hold change pattern table, there is a hold change, and when a hold change is executed (when there is a hold change), what kind of timing is used? Matters related to the determination of the effect pattern, such as what kind of display mode is to be executed, are stipulated. Further, as the pending change pattern, one for the first game and one for the second game are defined.

Further, when there are a plurality of holds that have won the hold change in "Ho 1" to "Ho 4", it is possible to cancel one of the hold look-ahead effects. More specifically, for example, when "Ho 4" occurs, the hold related to "Ho 4" wins the hold change pattern that changes to green, and any hold that has occurred earlier is If the hold change pattern that changes to rainbow color is won, it can be exemplified that the hold change related to the above-mentioned "ho 4" is canceled and not executed.

Further, for example, when "Ho 4" occurs as in the above example, the hold related to "Ho 4" wins the hold change pattern that changes to rainbow color, and all the holds that have occurred earlier. However, if the hold does not change up to the rainbow color and only changes to green, etc., the hold change that has occurred earlier can be canceled and not executed.
<< Continuous notice of special symbols >>

Next, as another pattern of the look-ahead effect, continuous notice (continuous effect) related to the special symbol will be described. There are genuine and pseudo continuous notices, and among these, the genuine continuous notice means that a continuous notice effect is performed over a plurality of variable displays related to a special symbol. ing. Further, the pseudo continuous notice means that an intermittent notice effect (pseudo continuous notice) is performed such that there are a plurality of changes in the special symbol for one variation display related to the special symbol.

As the above-mentioned "continuous notice", for example, the characters who are the main characters in the story of the production move to different rooms in sequence aiming at the room that is the final goal for each change related to the special symbol. Such things can be exemplified. In addition, as another aspect of "continuous notice", the character who is the main character wins by fighting (battle) with a different enemy for each change related to the special symbol, and the final target enemy is won. You can also exemplify what you are aiming for.

Further, the above-mentioned genuine continuous notice (hereinafter, may be simply referred to as "continuous notice") can be performed based on the advance notification information transmitted from the main board 102 to the sub-main board 301. More specifically, for example, based on the advance notification information received when the hold of "Ho 3" occurs, the sub-main board 301 is used as an effect pattern corresponding to the variation display related to the subsequent special symbols. It is possible to select the content including the continuous notice over the three variable displays.

Then, when the hold for one time is exhausted and the hold of the above-mentioned "ho 3" is shifted to the position of "ho 2", the first one of the selected continuous notice-related production patterns The effect pattern related to the notice is executed. Furthermore, when the hold is sequentially digested and the hold display moves from "ho 2" to "ho 1", the second notice of the three times is executed, and the change information is displayed from "ho 1". When moving to section 195, the final third notice is executed.

In addition, in the sub-main board 301, the fluctuation pattern related to the fluctuation display executed at the time when the above-mentioned "holding 3" is held, and the "holding 2" or "holding 1" occurring before that. It is also possible to confirm the pending storage information. That is, when the above-mentioned "ho 3" is held, information indicating that a predetermined reach effect with high jackpot reliability is executed or a jackpot is generated among various information already stored. If there is information indicating that the item is to be performed, it is possible to cancel the effect pattern related to the continuous advance notice selected when the hold of "Ho 3" occurs. In addition, depending on the degree of expectation of holding for "Ho 3", continuous notice is not given immediately from the next fluctuation, but after waiting for 1 change, the fluctuation of "Ho 1" and the trigger hold at the time of digestion, which is a look-ahead mode, 2 In some cases, it may be a continuous notice that spans fluctuations.

Further, as the above-mentioned pseudo continuous notice (hereinafter, may be referred to as "pseudo continuous notice"), the reach display is intermittently performed a plurality of times in the effect pattern related to the one-time variable display of the special symbol. Such things, things in which the characters repeat actions multiple times, things in which the effect symbol 190 is temporarily stopped and re-variated, and the like can be exemplified.

Further, it is possible to display a pseudo-continuous suggestion symbol at the time of pseudo-continuous notice. This pseudo-ream suggestion symbol is one of the special decorative symbols displayed when the expectation of whether or not a pseudo-continuous notice (so-called "pseudo-ream") occurs is raised. As the pseudo-ream suggestion symbol, for example, a semi-transparent effect of the pseudo-ream symbol accompanied by the character display of "NEXT" or "continuation" can be exemplified. The above-mentioned pseudo-ream symbol can also be referred to as a re-variable symbol, and is one of the special decorative symbols that more definitely indicates that the pseudo-ream occurs than the pseudo-ream suggestion symbol.

Further, as the pseudo-ream suggestion symbol and the pseudo-ream symbol, those displayed in a scroll display and those displayed in a certain area can be exemplified. Further, as the "constant area" referred to here, for example, a substantially central area of the display screen in the effect display device 60, the vicinity of the first hold number display unit 196 (or the second hold number display unit 197), and the like are exemplified. it can. Further, it is also possible to display the pseudo-ream suggestion symbol or the pseudo-ream symbol in a certain area through the scroll display.

The contents of the continuous notice as described above are merely examples, and various kinds of contents other than those described above can be adopted as the contents of the continuous notice.
<< Directed design related to normal design >>

Next, the effect related to the above-mentioned ordinary symbol will be described. In this embodiment, the effect display related to the normal symbol is not performed. However, it is possible to perform the effect related to the ordinary symbol as a part of the effect on the effect display device 60. Then, in the case of performing the effect display of the ordinary symbol in this way, it is conceivable that the effect symbol is displayed to such an extent that, for example, the off-off and the hit type can be distinguished.

Further, as described above, when the effect display device 60 is configured by a combination of a plurality of display bodies, it is provided with a relatively large display body and a display body smaller than this (may be a plurality of display bodies). It is possible. Then, a large display body can be referred to as, for example, a "main display body" or a "main liquid crystal", and a small display body can be referred to as, for example, a "sub display body" or a "sub liquid crystal". Further, when a relatively small display body as described above is provided, the effect symbol (199) related to the normal symbol may be displayed on, for example, a small display body. Further, for example, an LED indicator lamp in which two sets may be provided at a predetermined portion of the center decoration 64 described above, and this may be used as an effect display device related to a normal symbol.

Further, when performing an effect using the effect symbol related to the normal symbol, the hold effect display related to the normal symbol can be performed as a part of the effect on the effect display device 60. Further, as described above, when the effect display device 60 is composed of a plurality of display bodies such as a large display body and a small display body, the effect hold display related to a normal symbol is displayed, for example, a small display. It may be displayed on the body. In addition, for example, an LED indicator lamp in which two sets are provided at a predetermined portion of the center decoration 64 described above, thereby displaying the number of pending effects related to the ordinary symbols "1" to "4". May be good.

Regarding the sub display body (sub liquid crystal), not only the display of the normal symbol, but also, for example, the reduced effect symbol display area 361 and the hold number display area 367 described above, and the round number display area 368 and the count number display area described later. It can also be used for displaying 369 and the like.
<< Production related to limited frequency pattern >>

Next, the effect related to the limited frequency pattern (hereinafter referred to as "limited frequency pattern effect") will be described. The limited frequency pattern effect is provided as a part of the above-mentioned effect pattern. Further, the limited frequency pattern effect is an effect set so as to be likely to appear in a predetermined gaming state in response to a variation pattern determined in a specific period by the pattern determining means of the main board. The content of this limited frequency pattern effect is an effect content that shows a specific tendency, and as the content of the limited frequency pattern effect, for example, in a specific variation during a time-saving game, a predetermined variation pattern is used on the main board. It is possible to exemplify something that is determined and that always generates a highly reliable reach as a production.

In addition, as a game situation in which a limited frequency pattern effect is likely to appear, at the start of the game, immediately after a predetermined effect pattern is executed (for example, immediately after a small hit or a large hit without a ball), during a predetermined effect mode (probability change, (During the time saving game mode), immediately after the end of the special game, during the specific game state, and the final change of the specific game state can be exemplified. In addition to these, as a game situation in which the limited frequency pattern effect is likely to appear, the number of holds related to the first game (or the second game) has reached a predetermined number (for example, 4), or the hold is An example can be given when it does not exist. Further, in the situation where the limited frequency pattern effect is executed, the limited frequency table provided in advance according to the situation at that time is used, and the effect pattern to be executed is selected from the limited frequency pattern defined in the limited frequency table. It is supposed to be selected.
<< Production using operation buttons >>

Next, an effect using the above-mentioned operation button 22 (see FIG. 1) (hereinafter referred to as “button effect”) will be described. Regarding the pachinko gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, various controls are performed regarding the effect mode related to the operation button 22 and the relationship between the operation button 22 and the environment setting related to the volume control and the like described above. However, in order to avoid complicated explanation, basic matters will be explained here.

The operation button 22 is pressed and operated by the player when the button effect is executed, and exerts a function of giving the player the feeling that he / she is participating in the effect of the game or the winning / losing lottery. is there. As the button effect, for example, in the variable display process of the effect symbol 190 (see FIGS. 8A and 8B), the display area 194 of the effect display device 60 is displayed together with the symbol of the operation button 22 (also referred to as a button image). , "Press the button", "Press repeatedly", "Press and hold", etc., or a guide display that prompts the operation, such as a video of various indicators showing the remaining time and the amount of repeated hits. it can.

In addition, when displaying a button image or the like, it is possible to perform a preliminary effect that arouses the expectation of displaying the button image. Examples of this preliminary effect include an effect in which the button image gradually darkens from translucent to the display of the button image, and an effect in which the button image remains semi-transparent and is erased so as not to display the button image. be able to. Further, there are a plurality of types of indicators, and depending on their functions, they can be distinguished by being referred to as, for example, an "indicator for remaining time" or an "indicator for operation amount".

Further, as the button effect, when the player operates the operation button 22 according to the guide display described above, an effect in which the character makes a comment or an effect in which the ally character attacks the enemy character can be exemplified. Further, when the operation button 22 is operated, the above-mentioned movable effect member (reference numeral omitted) is activated to notify that the reach is reached. Further, a button effect may be performed during the reach effect. In that case, when the operation button 22 is operated, the above-mentioned movable effect member is activated to arouse expectations for a big hit.

Further, regarding the above-mentioned operation button 22, the operation of the operation button 22 is normally invalid, but the operation of the operation button 22 is valid during the button production period. The button operation valid period is a preset fixed time. Further, a plurality of types of button operation valid periods may be provided depending on the type of button effect.

It should be noted that the operation button 22 is combined with a vibration motor or a solenoid (not shown) to vibrate the operation button 22, or the operation range of the operation button 22 is expanded by using a drive source such as a motor to expand the operation button. It is also possible to adopt an effect mode such as sinking 22. Further, when the operation button 22 is recessed, the protrusion amount can be set to be relatively large (for example, about 5 to 10 cm).

Further, the operation button 22 is not limited to one having a small external dimension (for example, about several centimeters), and one having a hemispherical shape of about ten and several centimeters may be adopted. Further, as an operation input device (operation input means) such as the operation button 22, various other forms can be adopted. For example, an automobile operation handle and an aircraft operation lever related to the production content. , A model (figure) of a character with a touch sensor added can also be adopted. Further, as the operation input means, it is possible to install an operation button 22 (or a smaller operation button or the like) and a device having a form such as an operation lever, and use them properly according to the situation such as the content of the production. ..

In this embodiment, the operation button 22 is provided with a sinking mechanism and a vibration mechanism, and is capable of a sinking operation with respect to the upper ball plate 18 and a vibrating operation with the upper ball plate 18. The operation button 22 is provided on the upper portion of the lever device (lever device unit) 184 as shown in FIG. 21 (a). The lever device 184 is configured by attaching a motor (here, a stepping motor) 186 as a drive source, a movable mechanism portion 187, and a lever body 188 to the base body 185. Further, a decorative portion 189 that decorates the periphery of the operation button is provided on the upper portion of the lever body 188.

As shown in FIG. 1, the lever device 184 is built in the plate unit 16 of the game machine frame 11, and the above-mentioned decorative portion 89 and the operation button 22 are exposed from the upper ball plate 18. Further, as shown in FIGS. 1 and 21 (a), the lever device 184 accommodates the lever body 188 so that the decorative portion 189 forms a surface substantially continuous with the outer surface of the upper ball plate 18 under the normal state. doing.

However, when a predetermined effect is executed, as shown in FIG. 21B, the lever body 188 protrudes, and the decorative portion 189 and the operation button 22 rise at a predetermined angle and the amount of protrusion. In this case, although not shown, the decorative portion 189 and the operation button 22 are in a state of protruding from the outer surface of the upper ball plate 18. Here, the lever body 188 and the decorative portion 189 can be collectively referred to as a "lever". Further, it is also possible to include the operation button 22 in these and refer to them as "lever". Hereinafter, the lever body 188, the decorative portion 189, and the operation button 22 are collectively referred to as a “lever” and are designated by reference numeral L.

The lever L described above can be tilted forward as shown in FIG. 21 (c) in a protruding state as shown in FIG. 21 (b). Then, for example, during a predetermined reach effect, the lever L changes from the stored state to the protruding state, and the effect display device 60 displays a video showing how the lever L collapses or a character display of "pull the lever". , When the player pushes the lever L toward you, other movable production members etc. operate and cut-in production is performed, which develops into SP reach with higher expectation of big hits, SP reach continues, and whether it is correct or not. It is possible to perform a series of effects such as notifying that the result of the lottery is a big hit.

Here, it is possible to display the development symbol when the reach develops. The development pattern is one of the special decorative patterns indicating that the reach effect is generated. By displaying the development symbol, it is possible to definitively notify that the reach effect will occur.

Further, as shown in an enlarged view of FIG. 20A, a cross key 96 is provided in the vicinity of the operation button 22 as described above, and the operation button 22 is determined in a situation where environment setting or the like is performed. It may be used as a key or the like. Then, in this embodiment, the effect operation using the operation button 22 and the cross key 96 is performed in a situation where the effect display device 60 is performing a variable display such as the effect symbol 190 or a situation where the variable display is not performed. May be done. As described above, the cross key 96 also functions as a kind of operation input means that can be operated by a player or the like.

Subsequently, the guide displays such as "press the button", "press repeatedly", and "press and hold" described above distinguish and specify the operation mode (button operation mode) of the operation button 22. For example, the character display of "press the button" is used as a guide display when proceeding with the subsequent control process, assuming that the requested operation (request operation) has been performed if one operation (single operation) is detected. Illustrated. Those that request such a single-shot operation and generate some kind of effect by performing the single-shot operation are referred to as, for example, "single-shot operation effect", "single-shot push effect", "single-shot effect", "single-shot button effect", etc. Is possible.

Further, for example, the character display of "continuously hit" is exemplified as a guide display when a plurality of operations (continuous hitting operation) are requested operations. Those that request such a continuous striking operation and generate some kind of effect by performing the continuous striking operation are referred to as, for example, "continuous striking operation effect", "continuous striking effect", "continuous striking button effect", "continuous striking possible effect" and the like. Is possible. Further, the continuous hitting operation in which the button is pressed intermittently can be referred to as "continuous hitting", "continuous hitting push", "intermittent hitting operation" or the like.

In addition to the effect of encouraging repeated hits (pre-continuous hitting effect) as described above, the continuous hitting effect related to this continuous hitting operation can be considered to include the effect of subsequent repeated hits (during continuous hitting effect). As the effect during repeated striking, for example, each time the operation of pressing the operation button 22 is repeated at a relatively short interval, the image changes in response to the operation can be exemplified.

Further, as a continuous striking effect, an indicator (here, an indicator for the amount of operation) is displayed, and the amount indicated by the indicator increases as the pressing operation is repeated. The display of such an indicator can be started before the continuous hitting, or can be started after the continuous hitting is started.

Further, for example, the character display of "hold down" is exemplified as a guide display when a continuous operation (long press operation) for a predetermined time or longer is a request operation. Those that request such a continuous operation and generate some kind of effect by performing the continuous operation can be referred to as, for example, "long press operation effect", "long press effect", "long press button effect", or the like. It is a thing.

As described above, the effect using the operation buttons 22 and the like is basically performed with a guide display such as a button image prompting the button operation (front button effect). However, in the pachinko gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, it is possible to perform an effect of not performing the guide display or limiting the guide display so as to further diversify the effect of using the operation buttons 22 and the like. .. Such effects can be referred to as, for example, "back button effect" or "hidden button effect".

Further, the pachinko gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment is equipped with an automatic continuous striking function (automatic continuous striking function) that facilitates the above-mentioned continuous striking operation related to the operation button 22. This automatic continuous hitting function is used even when the button operation is performed only once or the repeated operation is performed at intervals considerably longer than usual in the situation where repeated hitting is required. It is a function that treats the button operation in the situation as if it was repeatedly hit.

More specifically, if a button operation in which the pressing operation continues for a predetermined time (for example, about 0.5 seconds or more) is detected in the situation where the continuous hitting effect is executed, the condition of the automatic continuous hitting is satisfied and the repeated hitting is performed. Control is being advanced as if it had been done. A button operation that satisfies the condition of automatic continuous striking can be referred to as "auto continuous striking operation" or the like.

In addition, since the automatic continuous striking function is installed side by side with the normal continuous striking function (normal continuous striking function), a player who wants to actually repeatedly hit the operation button 22 to enjoy the continuous striking effect and the continuous striking function can enjoy the automatic continuous striking function. It is possible to perform the normal continuous striking operation (normal continuous striking operation) as described above without using the function.
<< Production when a big hit occurs >>

Next, the effect when a big hit occurs will be described. When a big hit occurs, the production at the start of the special game (big hit start demo), the production during the special game (round production), the production at the end of the final round (win end demo), and the production at the end of the special game There is a production (demonstration of the end of the big hit). Here, the production of the above-mentioned jackpot start demo is a production during the period from the start of execution of the jackpot game (special game) to the start of execution of the first round (unit game) while the attacker (big prize opening) is maintained. The above-mentioned jackpot end demo is produced during the period from the end of the final round (unit game) to the end of the jackpot game (special game) while the attacker (big prize opening) is closed. It can be said that it is a production.

When the above-mentioned effect symbol 190 is confirmed and stopped, a display indicating that a big hit is started is displayed along with a sound such as a fanfare. As a display indicating that the big hit is started, the display of the big hit start demo screen shown in FIG. 25A can be exemplified. Furthermore, as an example of how to hit during a special game, a right-handed guidance effect (right-handed instruction display) is executed, and the player is instructed to increase the amount of rotation of the firing handle 20 to perform right-handed hitting. it can. Further, as the display of the content for guiding the right-handed strike, it is possible to display a message such as "Turn the steering wheel to the right" in the right-handed guide display area 383 of FIG. 25 (a).

Here, the production content at the start of the big hit may be different between the first hit (big hit on the low base) and the consecutive villa (big hit on the high base). Specifically, when the first hit is made, a display such as "Big hit start!" May be displayed, and when the consecutive villa is hit, a display such as "Big hit continuous!" May be displayed. In addition, for right-handed guidance, the message "Turn the steering wheel to the right" is displayed at the first hit, but at Renso, such a message is not displayed or a different display (simply "right-handed"). (For example, large characters are displayed for a short time) may be performed. In this way, the jackpot start demo production at the time of the consecutive villas may be shorter than the jackpot start demo production at the time of the first hit. In that case, of course, the jackpot start demo time is longer than at the time of the first hit. It will be shorter during the demonstration. Similarly, the time value of the big hit end demo production (big hit start demo time) may be shorter at the time of consecutive villas than at the time of the first hit.

As the production during the above-mentioned special game, a moving image having contents that cannot be seen unless the player wins a big hit can be exemplified. Further, at this time, a predetermined music is output from the speaker 21 (see FIG. 1) described above. Furthermore, as a video during the special game, for example, a picture of a predetermined character in a graphic novel adopted for the production of the pachinko game machine 10 fighting against a rival enemy, or a state of enjoying a jerk is drawn. Can be illustrated as an example. Here, (FIG. 25 (b)) exemplifies a scene of a video in which two women fight against an enemy together as a video during a special game.

It should be noted that the switching of the round during the special game is notified by, for example, "1R", "2R", ..., "1 round", "2 round", ... At the bottom of the screen. It is possible to do. Further, as a part of the effect during the special game, for example, it is possible to display the number of times the big hit occurs when the big hit occurs during the specific game and the big hits are continuous.

In the display example of FIG. 25B, a hold number display area 367 is displayed at the lower part of the screen to distinguish the hold numbers of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2. Similarly, in the display example of FIG. 25B, the reduced effect symbol display area 361, the round number display area 368, and the count number display area 369 are displayed. Similarly, in the display example of FIG. 25 (b), the number of consecutive villas related to a plurality of big hit games is displayed in the upper right part of the screen by displaying such as "probability change 1st time" or "acquisition number: 195 pieces". , The number of prize balls won in the consecutive villas is displayed.

Here, instead of displaying only the prize balls (by entering the large winning opening (90)) due to the game during the round, the number of winning prize balls is not displayed, but the same launch position as the large winning opening (90) ( A prize ball based on a ball entering a general prize opening (sign omitted) arranged in the launch direction) may also be displayed as the number of prize balls won. In addition, when more than a predetermined number of game balls, which is a condition for ending a unit game, are entered, that is, a so-called over-winning (a winning ball exceeding the specified count number in one round for a large winning opening), which is an excess winning amount. ) Occurs, an effect suggesting or notifying the occurrence (for example, a sound output such as "Yeah!" Or a display such as "Nice!" In the effect display) may be performed.

Further, as the effect during the special game, for example, it is possible to perform a specific effect (a specific effect during hitting) as shown in FIGS. 25 (c) and 26 (a) to 26 (c). 25 (c) and 26 (a) to 26 (c) exemplify the hitting specific effect screens A to D. These hitting specific production screens A to D are displayed as an opportunity to change the story development, or are inserted as a turning point of the production when the number of rounds is notified or the promotion effect to the probability change is performed during the big hit game. It can be used for such purposes as.

If the V-winning function is provided as described above, for example, at the start of the first round (starting round) of the jackpot game, a production to encourage the V-winning ("Right-handed and aim for V!"" It is possible to display the characters of. Then, if there is a V prize, it is notified that the probability will change after the big hit game. The effect for notifying that such a probability change will occur can also be referred to as the above-mentioned promotion effect.

Further, for example, when a big hit such as 10R and 5R is provided, as a promotion effect, an effect that arouses the expectation of whether or not it is changed from a low round hit (5R hit etc.) to a high round hit (10R hit etc.). (Round promotion production) can also be illustrated.

Subsequently, as the above-mentioned effect after the special game, an example relating to the result of the effect content during the special game can be exemplified. More specifically, it is possible to exemplify the content in which the winner expresses emotions according to the result of the battle between the characters. Such a post-special game effect can also be referred to as an ending effect or a result effect. In addition, this ending effect (result effect) and the like can be executed at the end of the final round in the jackpot game.

Further, as the effect after the special game, the one that additionally displays the number of consecutive big hits, the one that displays the number of prize balls acquired by the player by the special game at that time, and the like can be exemplified. It is also possible to add and display the number of times a big hit occurs when a big hit occurs during a specific game and the big hits are continuous. Further, regarding the succession of big hits, when the number of times of big hits reaches a predetermined number of times (for example, 20 times), it is possible to execute an effect pattern that has not been selected before that.

Although not shown, the screen at the time of the big hit end demo (big hit end demo screen) is displayed at the end of the special game. As an example of this jackpot end demo screen, there may be one that displays the characters such as "end" indicating the end of the jackpot game. Further, in this jackpot end demo screen, it is also possible to display the number of prize balls won during the jackpot game or during the consecutive villas as the above-mentioned ending effect (result effect).

In addition, if the pachinko machine is a type of pachinko machine that does not have the above-mentioned V-winning function, and whether or not it is in a probable change state changes depending on the game result (whether or not there is a V-winning) of the jackpot game, It is also possible not to notify whether or not the probability changes after the end of the special game during the special game or until the end of the special game.

For example, when a total of 10 rounds of special games are played, the player is informed whether or not the conditions for shifting to the probabilistic state are satisfied according to the V prize until the end of the 8th round. If the condition for shifting to the probabilistic state is satisfied after the end of the 8th round, the effect to that effect (specific effect during hitting) is performed over one or more rounds. It is possible to adopt an effect or a control mode.

Similarly, in a pachinko gaming machine including a jackpot that does not accompany a probability change, the game ball is placed in a predetermined area (the above-mentioned V winning opening) at a predetermined timing such as before the start of the special game, during the special game, or at the end of the special game. It is also possible to adopt an effect or control mode such that when it is detected in the area), it becomes a probable change.

Further, when a small hit occurs, it is possible to perform an effect of notifying the occurrence of the small hit. In addition, in a specific game state, an effect related to the occurrence of a small hit is executed, but in another game state (for example, a game state in which a special symbol that is a small hit is not the main body of the game), a small hit occurs. It can also be configured not to perform the effect of notifying.
<< Production by superimposing multiple production members >>

Next, various specific effects that can be carried out in the pachinko gaming machine 10 of this embodiment will be described with examples. First, it is possible to perform an effect by displaying the effect display device 60, displaying the light guide plate 88 described above, and superimposing the movable effect member. This type of effect is a complex effect by locating the movable effect member in front of the effect display device 60 and combining the display content of the effect display device 60 with the light decoration and movement of the movable effect member.

As an example, in a state where one of the movable effect members protrudes in front of the display area 194 of the effect display device 60, at least a part of the display area 194 of the effect display device 60 can be seen outside the movable effect member. For example, when an image of a burning flame is displayed on the effect display device 60, a combination effect in which the movable effect member performs light decoration or operation is executed in front of the flame. Further, in the light guide plate 88, for example, by performing an effect of blinking a flame pattern or an effect of blinking a ripple-like pattern, the difference in perspective between the light guide plate 88 and the effect display device 60 is obtained. It can exert a visual effect.

Further, in this state, by executing the effect by the movable effect member between the light guide plate 88 and the effect display device 60, the state of the movable effect member and the image of the effect display device 60 can be displayed on the light guide plate 88. It can be visually recognized by the player while being partially obstructed. Furthermore, by synthesizing changes in the pattern display before and after the movable effect member, a complicated situation display can be superimposed on the movable effect member, and the environment in which the movable effect member is placed can be expressed in a complicated manner. ..

As a result, more complicated effects can be performed and the effects can be diversified by the limited configuration of the light guide plate 88, the movable effect member, and the effect display device 60. Even when the light guide plate 88 is changed to, for example, a transmissive liquid crystal display body, a part of the transmissive liquid crystal display body can be visually recognized by a movable effect member behind or a part of the display content of the effect display device 60. By setting the transmission state to the extent possible, it is possible to perform an effect by superimposing as in the case of the light guide plate 88.

Further, as a mode of using the light guide plate 88, the transmissive liquid crystal display body or the like (referred to as the light guide plate 88 or the like here), a mode of emphasizing the light guide plate 88 or the like and a mode of combining with the effect display device 60 are adopted. It is possible. In the above-mentioned "mode for emphasizing the light guide plate 88 or the like", a color display is performed by using most of the display surface of the light guide plate 88 or the like to make a predetermined image stand out, and the display content of the effect display device 60 behind the light guide plate 88 or the like is displayed. This is a display mode that prevents the player's consciousness from facing as much as possible.

On the other hand, in the above-mentioned "mode in combination with the effect display device 60", the ratio of the area of the portion of the light guide plate 88 or the like where the color display is performed is suppressed to a predetermined degree, and the display of the effect display device 60 behind is suppressed. This is a display mode in which the player is directed to the content, and the display of the light guide plate 88 or the like and the display of the effect display device 60 are combined to show the player an effect. Then, in a predetermined case, the effect in the "mode of emphasizing the light guide plate 88 or the like" is executed, and in other predetermined cases, the effect in the "mode in combination with the effect display device 60" is executed. , Etc. are possible.
<< Production that suggests pending changes >>

Subsequently, various things can be further exemplified as the effect using the above-mentioned hold display. For example, a hold change suggestion effect suggesting that a hold change is performed is exemplified, and the change information display 198 of the change information display unit 195 shown in FIGS. 8 (a) and 8 (b) is temporarily deleted, and the change is made. The information display unit 195 displays character information (character state transition suggestion information) that suggests that the reserved color changes and the degree of expectation increases, for example, "color change?". Then, after displaying such state transition suggestion information, the fluctuation information display 198 in the fluctuation information display unit 195 may change to something that means a high degree of expectation, such as red or rainbow color. To do.

It is also possible to display the above-mentioned display such as "color change?" As one of the roulette eyes or one of the rotating drums (reels). For example, information displays such as "no change", "color change?", "Red", and "rainbow" are adopted as the roulette eyes and the design of the rotating drum, and the roulette and rotation are displayed on the fluctuation information display unit 195. Display the drum object. Then, in the fluctuation information display unit 195, the display of "no change", "color change?", "Red", and "rainbow" is sequentially changed, and the subsequent fluctuation information display is performed in a manner corresponding to the stopped information. It is conceivable that 198 will be done. It is also possible to display an object of a roulette wheel or a rotating drum without erasing the fluctuation information display 198.

Further, as another aspect of the effect using the hold display, when the hold change is performed in the first hold number display unit 196 and the second hold number display unit 197 in FIGS. 8 (a) and 8 (b), the hold is held. It is conceivable to proactively notify that a change has occurred or that a pending change will occur immediately afterwards, for example, by displaying pending change information such as "pending change", "red holding", or "rainbow hold". Be done. Here, such display of the hold change information may be performed at the center of the display area 194 in the effect display device 60, or the hold change is displayed in the first hold number display unit 196 and the second hold change display unit 197. It may be done in the vicinity of the hold display.

As described above, one or a plurality of types of hold change suggestion effects suggesting that the hold change is performed are provided, and the rate at which the hold change is made and the hold change are made depending on whether or not the hold change suggestion effect is executed and the type. It is also preferable that the degree of change at the time (for example, the rate at which the reserved color changes from blue to red differs between type A and type B) is different. In addition, when there are a plurality of hold displays and a hold change can be performed on a plurality of hold displays, it is not possible to know which hold change will be performed at the start of the hold change suggestion effect. Also, if it is configured in this way, it is possible to improve the interest from the viewpoint of whether the previously changed hold changes further or the unchanged hold changes.

Further, when the pending change suggestion effect is executed, the timing of the pending change can be various timings during the symbol change. For example, when the hold change suggestion effect uses an area dedicated to the hold change suggestion or an image object, a plurality of start / end may occur at an arbitrary timing that does not overlap with the fixed stop period of the decorative symbol (effect symbol). You can set the timing.

On the other hand, when the hold change suggestion effect is not dedicated to the hold change suggestion and is performed in conjunction with the change effect of the decorative symbol, for example, a pseudo decorative symbol suggesting a hold change is used by using the display area of the decorative symbol. It is possible to execute a hold change suggestion effect for displaying (for example, "hold change symbol"). Then, in this case, it is possible to set the timing at which the symbols in one or more rows are temporarily stopped and the timing at which the stop symbols are announced.

In addition to the various hold change timings described here, the hold color can be changed at the start or shift of the hold display. Further, in the pachinko gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, the hold change may be performed in association with the button effect.
<Various commands sent from the main board to the sub-main board>

Next, the main commands of various commands transmitted from the main board 102 to the sub-main board 301 will be described. First, the command transmission timing is as follows: during the initial screen display, during the customer waiting demo (standby demo), when the special symbol symbol changes, when the special symbol symbol is confirmed, when the special symbol symbol is confirmed, when the jackpot start demo There are times when the big hit medium and large prize openings are opened, when the big hit medium and large prize openings are closed, when the hit end demonstration is performed, and when the big hit end demo is completed. Of these, the initial screen display is the period from when the power of the pachinko gaming machine 10 is turned on until the customer waiting demonstration is started and the steady state is entered. In addition, a command is transmitted in any case when the start prize is won, when the power is restored, and when an error is detected. Further, the command transmission is executed even when the RWM is cleared.

Among these, the commands for clearing the RWM include commands for initializing the effect display, initializing the effect LED, and commands for various errors. The effect display initialization command is for displaying a predetermined effect symbol on the effect display device 60. The effect LED initialization command is to light a part of the game effect lamp when the communication is normal. The various error commands are for displaying an effect according to the error state.

As a command for the customer waiting demo, there is a customer waiting demo command. This customer waiting demo command is for setting the effect display device 60 and the game effect lamp for the customer waiting demo and erasing the sound.

The commands at the start of the symbol change of the special symbol include the number of stored symbols 1 and the number of stored symbols 2, the communication inspection 1, the communication inspection 2, the number of effects A to Z, the effect selection states 0 to 2, the variation additional information, and the symbol 1 effect. There are commands for pattern, symbol 2 effect pattern, symbol 1 character effect, and symbol 2 character effect. The symbol 1 storage number command indicates the number of reserved storages of the first special symbol, and the symbol 2 storage number command indicates the number of reserved storages of the second special symbol. The communication inspection 1 command and the communication inspection 2 command are for confirming whether or not normal communication is performed. The various commands of the number of effects A to Z indicate the number of times related to the effect according to the above-mentioned limited frequency table, and the various commands of the effect selection states 0 to 2 indicate the type of effect according to the limited frequency table. It is a thing. The variable addition information command indicates information for adding an element (effect component) that suggests, for example, a jackpot expectation degree, to the effect pattern. The symbol 1 effect pattern command is for transmitting a command corresponding to the variation pattern of the first special symbol, and the symbol 2 effect pattern command is for transmitting a command corresponding to the variation pattern of the second special symbol. It is a thing. The symbol 1 character effect command is for transmitting a command corresponding to the symbol of the first special symbol, and the symbol 2 character effect command is for transmitting a command corresponding to the symbol of the second special symbol. is there.

As a command for confirming the symbol of the special symbol, there are a command for stopping the symbol 1 effect pattern and a command for stopping the symbol 2 effect pattern. The symbol 1 effect pattern stop command and the symbol 2 effect pattern stop command are for stopping the first special symbol and the effect symbol 190 based on the second special symbol, respectively.

The commands during which the symbol of the special symbol is being confirmed include the number of times the fluctuation time is shortened 0 (at low probability), the number of times the fluctuation time is shortened AZ (at low probability), the number of times the fluctuation time is shortened 0 (at high probability), and the probability is changing (at high probability). There is a command (up to the specified number of fluctuations). These are for transmitting commands related to the game state at that time, and are used for effect mode display, time reduction number display, and the like.

The commands at the time of the jackpot start demo include the symbol 1 jackpot start demo, the symbol 2 jackpot start demo, and the command for specifying the launch position. The symbol 1 jackpot start demo command and the symbol 2 jackpot start demo command are for displaying a start demo based on the jackpot symbols of the first special symbol and the second special symbol. The launch position designation command is for notifying the player of the launch position when the player is made to strike the game ball by so-called left-handed or right-handed.

As commands when the big hit medium big winning opening is opened, there are commands of symbol 1 big hit medium demos 1 to 16 and symbol 2 big hit medium demos 1 to 16. These are for displaying the effect based on the jackpot symbol and the number of rounds of the first special symbol and the second special symbol.

As a command when the big hit medium big prize opening is closed, there is a big winning opening closing production command. This is for displaying the big winning opening closing effect.

As commands at the time of the jackpot end demo, there are commands for the end per symbol and the end demo for 2 symbols. These are for displaying the winning end demonstration effect based on the winning symbols of the first special symbol and the second special symbol.

The commands at the time of starting winning include commands for hit notice (hit notice effect), symbol notice (hit symbol notice effect), fluctuation notice (pattern notice effect), symbol 1 memory number, and symbol 2 memory number. Each of the hit notice, the symbol notice, and the change notice command is a command (look-ahead command) related to the above-mentioned look-ahead effect by the advance information notification means 157. Then, the winning notice command is for transmitting a random number range of the winning / failing random numbers, and includes information on winning / failing according to the lottery probability. The symbol advance notice command is for transmitting a random number range of symbol random numbers, and includes information related to the type of hit. Further, the fluctuation warning command is for transmitting a random number range of the fluctuation pattern, and can be used to specify the type of the fluctuation pattern group (no reach, normal reach, super reach, etc.). The commands for the number of stored symbols 1 and the number of stored symbols 2 are for transmitting the reserved number of stored numbers of the first special symbol and the second special symbol. Then, in this embodiment, as a result of the winning / failing lottery, information such as the presence / absence of the look-ahead effect and the period is transmitted to the sub-main board 301 by each command of the hit notice, the symbol notice, and the change notice.

The commands at the time of power failure recovery are communication inspection 1, communication inspection 2, game states A to E for power failure recovery, number of effects A to Z, effect selection states 0 to 2, symbol 1 character effect, symbol 2 character effect, There are commands such as a power failure recovery hit state, a special symbol 1 state at the time of power failure recovery, a special symbol 2 state at the time of power failure recovery, firing position designation, errors a to d, a symbol 1 storage number, and a symbol 2 storage number.

The commands of communication inspection 1 and communication inspection 2 are for confirming whether or not normal communication is being performed. The commands of the game states A to E for recovering from the power failure are for transmitting different commands depending on the game state at the time of the power failure. The commands of the number of effects A to Z indicate the number of times related to the effect according to the above-mentioned limited frequency table, and the commands of the effect selection states 0 to 2 indicate the type of effect according to the limited frequency table. is there. The symbol 1 character effect and the symbol 2 character effect command are for transmitting commands corresponding to the symbols of the first special symbol and the second special symbol.

The power failure recovery hit state command is for transmitting different commands depending on whether or not the command is hit. The command of the special symbol 1 state when the power is restored and the special symbol 2 state when the power is restored sends a command according to the state of the first special symbol or the second special symbol, such as waiting, changing, or hitting. Is for. As described above, the launch position designation command is for designating an appropriate launch position according to the situation. The errors a to d are for transmitting the presence / absence and type of the error. The commands for the number of stored symbols 1 and the number of stored symbols 2 are for transmitting the reserved number of stored numbers of the first special symbol and the second special symbol.
<Main control processing of the main board>

Next, the main control processing on the main board 102 of the pachinko gaming machine 10 having the above-described configuration will be described with reference to FIGS. 14 to 19 and the like. Prior to the explanation, the terms "special electric accessory", "conditional device", and "continuous operation device for accessory" used below will be described. All of these represent conceptual devices in the control processing of the pachinko gaming machine 10, and among these, the "special electric accessory" operates (opens) the opening of the grand prize opening 90. .. In addition, the "condition device" operates when a specific symbol combination is stopped and displayed as a special symbol, and the "accessory continuous actuating device" operates the special electric accessory continuously a plurality of times. Can be done.

The main control processing of the pachinko gaming machine 10 described here is the power-on processing (also referred to as “control start processing” on the main board) shown in FIG. 14, the initial setting processing shown in FIG. 15, and FIG. The setting change process shown in FIG. 17, the game progress interrupt process shown in FIG. 17, the (win / fail) lottery determination process shown in FIG. 18, and the power cutoff process shown in FIG. 19 are executed on the main board 102.
<Processing when power is turned on>

The power-on processing schematically shown in FIG. 14 is a control process that is started after a security check using the manufacturing code of the CPU 501 is performed by turning on the power of the pachinko gaming machine 10. In this power-on processing, the initial setting processing (S101) is executed as shown in the figure. In the initial setting process (S101), processing related to the set value is executed, and the contents of the initial setting process (S101) will be described later.

After the initial setting process (S101), the determination (S102) of whether or not the RWM clear button (RWM clear switch (544)) has been operated is executed. In this S102, if the RWM clear button is operated (S102: YES), the RWM clear process (S103) is executed, and the RWM clear information is transmitted to the sub side (sub-main board 301 side). Is done (S4). Further, the information indicating that the power is turned on normally (information on the power turned on normally) is saved in the RWM (S105), and the timer interrupt is enabled (S106). By permitting the timer interrupt (S106), the game progress interrupt processing (timer interrupt processing) can be performed in a predetermined cycle (here, 4 ms). Further, various random numbers are updated every time the loop processing (circular processing) is repeated (S107).

Here, as the random numbers updated in the random number update process (S107), various initial value random numbers such as an initial value random number per normal symbol, a symbol initial value random number per special symbol, and a soft initial value random number per special symbol are listed. Can be done. Further, when updating various random numbers, it is possible to use 2-byte soft random number update processing as a common control module. The random number updated in the random number update process (S107) is the software random number described above, and depending on the type of random number, the software random number updated in the random number update process (S107) and the hardware random number described above It is also possible to generate a random number value by the operation of.

If the RWM clear button has not been operated in S102 (S102: NO), it is determined whether or not the power off normal information is stored in the RWM (S111). Then, when the information on normal power off is stored in the RWM (S111: YES), the RWM check is performed (S112), and it is determined whether or not the data in the RWM (data in a predetermined range) is normal. It is done (S113). If the data in the RWM is not normal in this S113 (S113: YES), the process proceeds to the RWM clear process (S103).

In the above S111, when the information of normal power off is stored in the RWM (S111: NO), and when the data in the RWM is normal in the above S113 (S113: NO), the power is turned off from the RWM. The data of various information commands at the time is acquired (S116). Further, the acquired data of various information commands is transmitted to the sub-main board 301 side (S117), the solenoid recovery setting is performed (S118), and the above-mentioned S105 (process of saving the power-on normal information in the RWM). Move to.
<Initial setting process>

Next, the above-mentioned initial setting process (S101 in FIG. 14) will be described with reference to FIG. In this initial setting process, the setting process of each port register is executed (S121), and it is determined whether or not the setting key has been inserted (S122). When the setting key is inserted (S22: YES), the setting value changing process (S126) is performed, and the setting value changing process (S126) will be described later.

In the above S122, if the setting key is not inserted (S122: NO), the setting value information is read (read) (S123), and it is determined whether or not the setting value is abnormal (S124). .. If the set value is not abnormal (S124: NO), the initial setting process is completed, but if the set value is abnormal (S124: YES), the set value abnormality is notified (S128). Then, the set value abnormality information is transmitted to the side of the sub-main board 301 (S129), and thereafter, a loop state is established.
<Setting value change process>

Next, the above-mentioned setting value change process (S126 in FIG. 15) will be described with reference to FIG. In this set value change process, the RWM of the set value storage area is checked (S131), and it is determined whether or not the set value information is abnormal (S132). If there is no abnormality in the set value information (S132: NO), it is determined whether or not the RWM clear switch has been input (S133), and if the RWM clear switch has been input (S133: YES), the set value. The set value according to the information is displayed (S134).

If there is an abnormality in the set value information in S132 (S132: YES), the set value is forcibly set and the default value (here, "1") is set in the set value information (S141). Then, after the set value forced setting information is transmitted to the sub-main board 301 (S142), the set value is displayed (S133).

After the above S134, it is determined whether or not there is a change operation of the set value (S135), and if there is a change operation (S135: YES), the set value information at that time is incremented by +1 (S136). Further, it is determined whether or not the set value information has reached the set upper limit value (here, "6") (S137), and if the set value information has reached the upper limit value (S137: YES), the set value information at that time is set to ". 1 ”(S138). Then, it is determined whether or not the setting change is completed (whether or not the setting key is extracted) (S139), and if it is completed (S139: YES), the display of the set value is stopped (the display is erased in S140). Then, the setting value change process is terminated.

In the above S135, if there is no change setting (S135: NO), the process of adding the set value information (S136) to the process of setting the set lower limit value (here, "1") (S138) are not performed. , It shifts to the determination process (S139) whether or not the setting change is completed. If the set value information does not reach the upper limit value in S137 (S137: NO), whether or not the setting change is completed without performing the setting process (S138) of the set lower limit value in S137. To the determination process (S139). Further, if the setting change is not completed in S139 (S139: NO), the process returns to the setting value display process in S134.

In the above S133, when there is no input of the RWM clear switch (S133: NO), the set value corresponding to the set value information is displayed as in the above S134 (S146). Further, similarly to the above S139, it is determined whether or not the setting change is completed (whether or not the setting key is extracted) (S147), and if it is completed (S147: YES), the process proceeds to the above S139. The display of the set value is stopped (the display is erased in S140), and the set value change process is terminated. If the setting change is not completed in S147 (S147: NO), the process returns to the process of displaying the setting value in S136.

That is, in S133, when the RWM clear switch is input (S133: YES), the set value is displayed (S134), and the process for changing the set value (S135 to S138, etc.) is performed. It will be possible. However, in S133, when there is no input of the RWM clear switch (S133: NO), the set value is displayed (S146), but the process for changing the set value as in S135 to S138 is performed. The set value is displayed in a state where it is not possible (this state may be called a setting display mode).
<Game progress interrupt processing>

Next, the game progress interrupt process (FIG. 17) that is repeated for each timer interrupt of a predetermined cycle will be described. Although this game progress interrupt processing (also referred to as “timer interrupt processing”) has been omitted in the above description, it has a predetermined cycle (here, a 4 ms cycle) based on the cycle information set in the power-on processing (FIG. 14). It is repeated. As shown in FIG. 17, in the game progress interrupt processing, interrupt operation condition setting (S41, S42), recursion of interrupt processing time monitoring means (S43), game machine management (S45 to S70), interrupt permission (S45 to S70) S71) is performed in order to return to the processing before the game progress interrupt occurs.

Specifically, in the interrupt operation condition setting process (S41, S42), the interrupt operation condition setting value is stored in the game progress interrupt control register (S41) in order to clear the interrupt flag, and the interrupt operation condition setting. The value is set in the control register corresponding to the predetermined input terminal (S42). After that, the second recursive information is set (S43), and the second recursive information is further set in the interrupt processing time monitoring means register (S44). As will be described later, the second recursive information is a condition for recurring and restarting the monitoring timekeeping of the interrupt processing time monitoring means together with the first recursive information set in advance.

In the management of game machines (S45 to S70), the following processes are executed in order in order to manage the game machines. First, an input process (S45) is executed in order to monitor the input of a specific signal. Here, the objects to be monitored are various switches mounted on the game board surface, a saucer full switch, an open signal, a magnetic detection signal, a radio wave detection signal, a glass undetected signal, and a disconnection short-circuit power supply abnormality detection signal. Is.

Subsequently, various random number update processes (S46) are executed to update the normal symbol variation pattern random number and the variation pattern random number. Further, the initial value update type random number update process (S47) is executed to update the random number per normal symbol, the symbol random number per special symbol, and the soft random number per special symbol. Next, the initial value random number update process (S48) is executed to update the initial value random number per normal symbol, the symbol initial value random number per special symbol, and the soft initial value random number per special symbol. Further, in order to update the 2-byte timer, the timer subtraction process (S49) is executed, and in order to set the validity period of the second start winning opening 63, the validity period setting process (S50) of the second start opening is executed. ..

Further, the prize monitoring process (S51) is executed, the number of times the prize balls are paid out is stored, the output request of the external information for the board is created, and the transmission request of the command to be transmitted to the sub board 104 is performed. Subsequently, in order to control the payout control board 103, the prize ball control process (S52) is executed.

Next, when the game ball passes through the normal symbol operating gate (operating port 68), the normal symbol operating gate monitoring process (S53) is executed in order to store the random numbers related to the normal symbol, and the normal symbol display device or the normal symbol is executed. The normal symbol control process (S54) is executed in order to perform the process related to the electric accessory. Further, in order to monitor the start of fluctuation of the normal symbol, the normal symbol fluctuation start monitoring process (S55) is executed. Further, in order to monitor the winning of the first starting winning opening 62A, the 1-2 starting winning opening, and the second starting winning opening 63 of the game ball, the starting opening monitoring control process (S56) is executed. The special symbol control process (S57) is executed in order to perform the process related to the first special symbol display unit 70 or the second special symbol display unit 71. Subsequently, the special electric accessory control process (S58) is executed to perform the process related to the special electric accessory, and the process related to the valid period of the large winning opening is performed, so that the large winning opening valid period setting process (S59) is performed. Is executed, and the special symbol fluctuation start monitoring control process (S60) is executed in order to monitor the fluctuation start of the first special symbol and the second special symbol.

Next, anomaly detection processing (S61) is executed to monitor magnetism, disconnection / short circuit / power supply, radio wave monitoring, open / closed state of glass frame set / game board frame, and pair glass. Then, in order to detect the ball entry passage time abnormality, the ball entry passage time abnormality detection process (S62) is executed. Further, in order to request display of the number of times the special electric accessory is continuously operated, the error state, the number of balls on hold for operation of the normal symbol display device, and the number of balls on hold for operation of the special symbol display device, the game state display process (S63). ) Is executed, and the handle state signal inspection process (S64) is executed in order to monitor the touch state (including the state of the operation amount) of the firing handle 20. In addition, a special symbol display, a normal symbol display, an operation holding ball number display of the special symbol display device (70, 71), an operation hold ball number display of the normal symbol display device, a game state display, a special electric accessory The LED output process (S65) is executed in order to display the number of times that the is continuously operated and the error is displayed.

Subsequently, in order to output a signal for prohibiting / permitting the launch of the game ball, the launch control signal output process (S66) is executed, and in order to create and output a signal to be output to the test device, the test signal output process (S67) is performed. To execute. Further, in order to output the output data of the normal electric accessory solenoid and the large winning opening (open) solenoid, the solenoid output process (S68) is executed, and the effect control command is transmitted, so that the effect control command transmission process ( S69) is executed, and the external information output process (S70) is executed in order to output signals to the external terminals (various external output terminals of the external relay terminal board 46 (see FIG. 2)).

After that, the interrupt enable (S71) is executed, and the control process exits to the return (RET). Then, using the remaining time until the next game interrupt is executed, the above-mentioned circulation processing (repeated circulation processing including the random number update processing of S107) of the power-on processing (FIG. 14) is executed. ..
<< Handle status signal inspection processing >>

In the above-mentioned handle state signal inspection process (S64), in order to monitor the touch state of the firing handle 20, the handle state is inspected, and when it is determined as a result of the inspection that the handle state has changed, the handle state monitoring timer Is subtracted, the handle state is updated, the handle state monitoring timer is set, and a command transmission request for the handle state effect is performed. If it is determined as a result of the inspection that there is no change in the handle status, the handle status monitoring timer is set. When it is determined that the handle timer is being subtracted in the subtraction of the handle status monitoring timer, the subsequent processing related to the handle status is not performed.
<Lottery judgment processing>

Next, the above-mentioned lottery determination process (also referred to as “lottery determination process”) will be described. This lottery determination process is a process of determining whether or not a player has won (a process of performing a big hit lottery determination) using probability data. Further, the lottery determination process can be performed by, for example, the special symbol change start monitoring control process (S60) in the game progress interrupt process (FIG. 17) described above.

FIG. 18 is a flowchart showing an example of a lottery determination process relating to success or failure. In this lottery determination process, first, when the process proceeds to step S1022, the main CPU 501 sets 1 in a predetermined register (for example, C register) as the winning number data, and proceeds to the next step S1024. When the process proceeds to step S1024, the main CPU 501 sets 2 as the repetition count data and proceeds to the next step S1025. In the winning number data, "1" indicates a big hit and "2" indicates a small hit.

Proceeding to step S1025, the main CPU 501 acquires probability data from the lottery table. Specifically, the main CPU 501 specifies the address of the probability data according to the game state (probability fluctuation state or normal probability state) and the set value, and acquires the probability data corresponding to the specified address from the lottery table. And store it in the register. Then, the process proceeds to the next step S1026.

Proceeding to step S1026, the main CPU 501 determines whether or not the result is correct. Here, the main CPU 501 first stores the random number value acquired when winning the starting port in the comparison register (for example, DE register) for lottery for the winning / failing determination, and then acquires it in step S1025. The value stored in the calculated probability data is subtracted from the value of the comparison register to obtain the value of the new comparison register. In this way, the value of the comparison register is updated.

In the next step S1027, the main CPU 501 determines whether or not the user has won. Here, by subtracting the probability data from the value of the comparison register (for example, the DE register), when the value of the DE register becomes smaller than "0" (when a carry occurs), "1" is set in the carry flag of the flag register. Set. That is, the carry flag is set. Further, "carry occurs" means that "1" is set in the carry flag. Then, in step S1027, the main CPU 501 determines whether or not the carry flag has been won by determining whether or not the carry flag is set to "1".

Here, when the carry flag is not set to "1", the main CPU 501 determines that the item has not been won (No), and proceeds to the next step S1028. On the other hand, when the carry flag is set to "1", the main CPU 501 determines that the carry flag has been won (Yes), skips steps S1028 to S1033, and ends the process according to this flowchart. Here, the winning number data set at the time of "Yes" in step S1027 indicates the winning number determined by the lottery determination (for example, if the winning number is 1, the winning number is a big hit, if the winning number is 2, the winning number is a small hit). It will be.

In the next step S1028, the main CPU 501 updates the winning number data. Specifically, the main CPU 501 adds "1" to the value of the winning number data (for example, C register) to obtain a new winning number data (for example, C register) value. That is, the value of the winning number data (for example, C register) is updated. Then, the process proceeds to the next step S1029.

Proceeding to step S1029, the main CPU 501 updates the repetition count data. Specifically, the main CPU 501 subtracts "1" from the value of the repetition count data (for example, B register) to obtain a new repetition count data (for example, B register) value. That is, the value of the repetition count data (for example, the B register) is updated. Then, the process proceeds to the next step S1030.

Proceeding to step S1030, the main CPU 501 determines whether or not the number of repetitions has been completed. Specifically, the main CPU 501 determines whether or not the value of the repetition count data (for example, the B register) is "0". Here, when the value of the repetition count data (for example, B register) is "0", it indicates that the repetition count has ended, and the repetition count data (for example, B register) is not "0" ("0"). When (greater than), it indicates that the number of repetitions has not ended. Then, in step S1030, the main CPU 501 determines whether or not the number of repetitions has ended by determining whether the value of the number of repetitions data (for example, the B register) is "0".

Here, when the value of the B register is "0", the main CPU 501 determines that the number of repetitions has ended (Yes), and proceeds to the next step S1033. On the other hand, when the value of the B register is not "0", the main CPU 501 determines that the number of repetitions has not ended (No), and returns to step S1025.

Further, when "No" is set in step S1030, the hit / fail determination in step S1026 is performed again using the same probability data as the previous time. In the next step S1033, the main CPU 501 sets the value of the winning number data (for example, the C register) to “00 (H)” which is the non-winning data, and ends the process according to this flowchart.

With the above configuration, as described in step S1028, since the process of updating the winning number data is included in the lottery determination process, it is not necessary to store the winning number data in the lottery table. Further, by determining the winning number using the number of repetitions and the same probability data, it is not necessary to repeatedly set the same probability data in the lottery table, so that the amount of ROM used by the lottery table can be reduced.

In this example, one winning number is provided for each small hit and one for the big hit, and the type of the big hit or the small hit is determined by the symbol random number acquired separately at the time of the hit. However, these types are determined by this processing. Is also possible. In that case, if the value of the repetition count data in step S1024 is changed according to the number of types and the probability data for each winning number (range value corresponding to each winning number) is set, the same determination routine is used. It is also possible.
<Power off processing>

Next, the power off processing executed when the power is cut off will be described. As shown in FIG. 19, in the power off processing, the data of all used registers is saved in the RWM (S81), and the interrupt enable / disable state before the power off is saved (S82). Further, it is determined whether or not the power-on normal information is stored in the RWM (S83), and if it is not stored (S83: NO), the power-off abnormality information is stored in the RWM (S84). The process proceeds to the RWM access prohibition process (S88). On the other hand, if it is saved (S83: YES), the stack pointer value is saved in the stack pointer buffer (S85), the power off / normal information is saved in the RWM (S86), and the RWM checksum is calculated. Then, the checksum data is saved (S87). Then, the RWM is prohibited from accessing (S88), and the reset of the CPU 501 is waited while looping the control process.

Further, in this power off processing, even if both the first recursive information and the second recursive information described above have not been set, the CPU 501 functions as a forced recursive means, and the first recursive information and the second recursive information are performed. Information is set, the monitoring timekeeping of the interrupt processing time monitoring means is forcibly initialized, and the timekeeping is recursive. Further, the compulsory setting of the first recursive information and the second recursive information is performed in the present embodiment at a timing immediately after the start of the power interruption process and before the process of saving all used registers (S81). It has been evacuated. Then, when the power supply is restarted, the control process is started in a state in which the monitoring time is recursive. In other words, by forcibly recurring the monitoring timekeeping when a power failure occurs, it is possible to prevent the control processing from proceeding without the monitoring timekeeping recurring in the control process immediately after the power supply is restarted. It has become.
<Other control processing modes related to the main board>
<< Control mode related to command transmission timing >>

In this embodiment, the effect control command output from the main board 102 to the sub-main board 301 is temporarily stored in the command buffer by a command request before transmission. The command buffer has a plurality of buffers functioning as ring buffers, and is used once in the order of accumulation in the command buffer in the control process for command transmission (here, the effect control command transmission process (S69)). In the game progress interrupt process, one command (a pair of data of MODE and EVENT) is taken out from the command buffer and transmitted. It is also possible to adopt a method in which the command with the highest priority is sent first. Further, in various control processes, when a command that needs to be transmitted occurs, it is possible to transmit the command at any time. When such a method is adopted, the effect command is intensively transmitted in one control processing module such as the effect control command transmission process (S69) during one game progress interrupt process. Instead, each time a command transmission is required, the command transmission is sequentially performed in each control processing module. Therefore, it is unlikely that the command transmission will be carried over to the game progress interrupt processing from the next time onward. Then, for example, there is no delay in the command transmission at the start winning or the command transmission at the start of the fluctuation of the special symbol, and the command processing can be performed quickly.
<< Control mode related to update of hold memory >>

In this embodiment, as described above, a configuration in which no priority is set between the first game and the second game is adopted, and in parallel, one game can be executed while the other game is being executed. Games are adopted, and for each game, the reserved memory is digested in the order in which the starting prize is generated. Then, by updating the hold storage information according to the digestion, updating the total number of holds of the plurality of games, and storing the winning order, the hold storage information is updated as a whole. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, a configuration in which the first game is prioritized or a configuration in which the second game is prioritized can be adopted.

Further, in the present embodiment, in order to notify the sub-main board 301 that the hold storage has been updated, the symbol storage number command (symbol 1 storage number command or symbol 2 storage number command) is requested as described above. By including both the symbol 1 storage number command and the symbol 2 storage number command in one command, the required program and memory capacity can be reduced.
<< Control mode related to lottery of fluctuation pattern >>

Subsequently, various aspects related to the lottery of the variable pattern will be described. Any of the modes of determining the variation pattern described here may be selected and applied in one pachinko gaming machine 10, or may be used in combination as appropriate. Then, when a plurality of modes are used in combination, it is possible to use the modes properly based on factors such as the result of success or failure.

In this embodiment, as described above, the winning / failing result, the number of reserved balls, the special symbol (which may be a symbol group), and the variation pattern selection state (status information of the special symbol) are determined for determining the variation pattern. Although it is used as an element, a variation pattern table corresponding to the combination of these determinants is selected. Then, with the determination of the variation pattern table, the variation time associated with the variation pattern is determined using the variation pattern random number. Further, in the present embodiment, regarding the determination of the fluctuation pattern, the fluctuation pattern table is different depending on whether the result of the winning / losing lottery is a big hit or a miss. That is, in the case of a big hit, a variation pattern table is selected from among those associated with the status information of the special symbol such as the number of reserved balls, the special symbol (group), and the random number of success or failure. On the other hand, in the case of a loss, a variation pattern table is selected from among those associated with the game state, the special symbol, the number of reserved balls, and the winning / failing random number. Of these, regarding the fluctuation pattern in which the re-lottery time is given for the production in the case of a big hit, the re-lottery time is given based on the production state (presence or absence of a specific production, etc.) and the special symbol group. The presence or absence is determined, and the determined result is transmitted from the main board 102 to the sub-main board 301.

Further, when determining the fluctuation pattern and the fluctuation time, it is possible to determine the fluctuation addition information according to the determined fluctuation pattern number, and to determine the subsequent fluctuation time based on the fluctuation addition information. For example, when the selected fluctuation pattern corresponds to the limited frequency pattern production, it is conceivable that the extension of the fluctuation time corresponding to the variation pattern is determined ex post facto.

Further, as described above, by setting the command of the variation additional information as the command at the start of the symbol variation of the special symbol, the variation determined in advance in relation to the elements such as the game state and the winning symbol on the sub-main board 301. It is possible to perform an effect of adding the additional time to the time later. Then, in the case of determining the fluctuation time of the overall effect symbol in such an embodiment, it is possible to create various fluctuation patterns while suppressing the number of fluctuation patterns provided in advance as follows. Is. That is, considering the case of performing the above-mentioned pseudo-continuous notice (so-called "pseudo-ream"), when the fluctuation patterns of the pseudo-ream are simply set individually, the same number of fluctuation patterns as the number of types of effects are provided in advance. Need to keep. When the effect patterns such as the effect symbols on the sub-main board 301 are prepared for the variation patterns that are all individually determined on the main board 102 in this way, the total number of variation patterns on the main board 102 is large. Therefore, for example, it is conceivable that the number will reach more than 256. Therefore, in order to give an identifiable code to a large number of fluctuation patterns, it is necessary to increase the number of bits and the number of bytes for expressing the code as compared with the conventional case.

However, by using the fluctuation addition information (variation addition pattern), it is possible to form a fluctuation pattern ex post facto by connecting, for example, random number lottery fluctuation addition information to a relatively small number of basic fluctuation patterns. Is. As a result, a new fluctuation pattern can be formed by combining the fluctuation patterns, so that various fluctuation patterns can be created without making the number of fluctuation patterns provided in advance excessive. It should be noted that the random number value related to the variable addition information can also be transmitted from the main board 102 to the sub-main board 301 when the start winning prize is generated as a command for the look-ahead effect. It is also possible to set the appearance probability of the variable addition pattern so that the variable addition information can be easily added when the limited frequency pattern effect is executed. To further give an example of using the variable additional information, when the probability variation symbol "777" is displayed from the beginning as the combination of the effect symbols 190, the variable additional information is not set and the combination of the effect symbols 190 is used. Once the non-probability variation symbol "666" is displayed, the effect until the result of whether or not to promote to "777" is displayed (for example, the effect of shaking fluctuation and the development of the variation mode). (Representation, etc.) may be performed by setting variable additional information.

Further, in this embodiment, the fluctuation pattern is determined with the number of reserved balls as an element, and the reference fluctuation pattern table differs depending on the number of reserved balls. The fluctuation pattern table is provided corresponding to the number of reserved balls 0 to 4. The reason why the fluctuation pattern table corresponding to the hold 4 is provided in addition to the four hold 0 to 3 is as follows. For example, consider a case where a new variable display is started from a situation where the number of reserved balls is four, and the number of reserved balls becomes three. A state in which the number of reserved balls is 3 at a stage in which the control process during the game progress interrupt process being executed at that time does not reach the determination of the fluctuation pattern, which is the process during the later game progress interrupt process. When a new start prize is generated from, the number of reserved balls is added to 4 when the fluctuation pattern is determined. Therefore, the fluctuation pattern table is provided corresponding to the number of reserved balls 0 to 4 so that such a situation can also be a factor for determining the fluctuation pattern.

However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the variation pattern table may be provided corresponding to the number of reserved balls 0 to 3. In this case, in terms of control processing, it is possible to configure the configuration in which the starting prize is not added from the state of the number of reserved balls 3 to the determination of the fluctuation pattern. In addition, any aspect can be applied to the type of pachinko gaming machine in which the maximum number of holdings (for example, 8) other than 4 is set.

Further, the acquisition timing of the variable pattern random number can be set to the time of the variable pattern lottery. That is, since the fluctuation pattern random number is not a random number related to the operation of a special electric accessory or the like, as an element for performing an appropriate game, for example, in aiming for a fair game as compared with a random number of success or failure. The need for constraints is reduced. Therefore, it is conceivable that the variable pattern random number is not intentionally acquired at the time of starting winning, and for example, the variable pattern random number is acquired and stored at the time of the variable pattern lottery as a separately provided timing. By doing so, the number of information to be stored at the time of winning the start can be reduced, and the capacity of the program and the memory can be reduced.
<< Control mode related to symbol designation >>

In the symbol lottery, the symbol determination table to be used is determined based on the value of the upper byte of the code indicating the symbol random number, and then the symbol is determined from the determined symbol determination table based on the value of the lower byte of the symbol random number. Is also possible. For example, when the numerical range of the symbol random number is set to "0 to 999", the binary code code of these numerical values can be used. By doing so, the capacity of the memory and the program can be reduced. In addition, the game status such as the number of rounds and the number of time reductions is distributed to the winning symbols (which may be a symbol group), and the number of subsequent rounds, the number of time reductions, and the opening time of the large winning opening are determined according to the winning symbols. And the opening pattern may be determined. By doing so, it is not necessary to store or control the data unique to the game state, and the capacity of the memory and the program can be reduced. Further, information for transmitting the game state (game state designation information) to a command for transmitting a symbol or the like from the main board 102 to the sub-main board 301 (for example, each command of the symbol 1 effect pattern and the symbol 2 effect pattern in this embodiment). ) Can be added. This command is not transmitted to the sub-main board 301 immediately after being created, but is created, temporarily stored, and then transmitted to the sub-main board 301 after waiting for a predetermined timing.
<< Relationship between special symbol and production symbol variation time >>

As described above, the special symbol (first special symbol or second special symbol) and the corresponding effect symbol 190 are controlled to start and stop fluctuations in synchronization with each other. Depending on the case, the fluctuation time of the effect symbol 190 may be shorter to some extent than the fluctuation time of the special symbol (first special symbol or second special symbol).

That is, when the fluctuation of the special symbol or the fluctuation pattern is determined and the fluctuation of the special symbol is started, the fluctuation start command (command at the start of fluctuation) of the effect symbol is transmitted from the main board 102 to the sub-main board 301. However, the time required to send and receive a predetermined command (for example, the first command of the command at the start of fluctuation) or the command buffer (the ring buffer type is used in this embodiment) is set and waits. It is conceivable that the start of fluctuation of the effect symbol will be delayed from the start of fluctuation of the special symbol due to the influence of the time until all the commands (first-in commands) are sent. Further, when the fluctuation of the special symbol is stopped, the fluctuation stop command (command at the time of confirming the symbol of the special symbol) is transmitted to the sub-main board 301, but a predetermined command (for example, the first command of the command at the start of fluctuation at the time of determining the symbol) is transmitted. ) Is required to be transmitted and received, and the degree of congestion of the command buffer (the degree of the number of commands waiting to be transmitted) may delay the stoppage of fluctuation of the effect symbol.

In this way, the fluctuation time of the effect symbol is set (adjusted) to some extent with respect to the fluctuation time of the special symbol based on the command transmitted at the start of the fluctuation, and by performing the fluctuation fluctuation, the special symbol changes to the next. I try to avoid the situation where the last symbol is stopped and displayed after starting. Due to the processing delay due to the number of commands, the display during fluctuation may straddle the next fluctuation, but at the end of the fluctuation, there are fewer commands sent to the sub-main board 301 than at the start of the fluctuation, so the amount of delay Is suppressed, and the effect symbol can be almost certainly fixed during the display fixed time of the special symbol (the symbol fixed time related to the special symbol).
<< Preliminary judgment of winning / failing lottery result >>

First, in the present embodiment, as described above (FIGS. 9A and 12), the winning / failing random number range in the first lottery and the second lottery is "0 to 65535", and the winning / failing random number range " 0 to 65535 ”is divided into a plurality of random value range (here, A to N) as shown in FIG. 13 (a).

Then, as shown in FIG. 13A, among the "0 to 65535", "0 to 205" belongs to the classification of the look-ahead code A, and "206" is the classification of the look-ahead code B. Belongs to. Further, the hit / fail random value values "207" to "210" belong to the classification of the look-ahead codes C to F, respectively. Further, the winning / failing random number values "211-615" belong to the classification of the look-ahead code G, and the winning / failing random number values "616 to 618" belong to the classification of the look-ahead code H.

Subsequently, the hit / fail random value values "619 to 621", "622-624", "625-627", and "628 to 630" belong to the classification of the look-ahead codes HL, respectively. Further, the winning / failing random number values "64874 to 65534" belong to the classification of the look-ahead code M. Further, in this embodiment, the winning / failing random numbers "631 to 64873" and "65534" belong to the classification of the look-ahead code M.

FIG. 13B shows the contents of each look-ahead code. As shown in the figure, the look-ahead code A means that all settings are hits (big hits) regardless of the set values. Subsequently, the look-ahead code B means that when the set value is "2" or more, it is a hit regardless of whether it is a normal time or a probability change time. That is, if the read-ahead code B is set value "2" or more, it will show a hit in both normal probability and high probability, but if the set value is "1", it will show a loss. Further, the look-ahead codes C to F mean that if the set value is "3" or more to "6", it will be a hit in both the normal time and the high probability time regardless of the probability state.

Subsequently, the look-ahead code G means that any set value will be a hit as long as the probability is changing. That is, the look-ahead code G shows a hit when the probability is high, but shows a miss when the probability is normal. Further, the look-ahead code H means that if the probability change is in progress, a hit is made with a set value of "2" or more. Further, the look-ahead codes I to L mean that if the probability is changing, the set value is "3" or more to "6" and the hit is made. Further, the look-ahead code M means that the hit is a small hit, and the look-ahead code N means that the look-ahead code N is out of order regardless of the set value or the probability state.

Using the look-ahead code grouped in this way, for example, the main board 102 determines the look-ahead code to which the acquired random number value belongs, and the information (command) corresponding to the determined look-ahead code is used as the above-mentioned advance notification information. It is possible to transmit to the sub-main board 301. Then, on the side of the sub-main board 301, it is possible to perform a hit advance notice effect as a look-ahead effect in relation to the hit / fail determination result without waiting for the hold to be digested.

Further, since the pre-reading codes B to F and the pre-reading codes H to L described above are commands (codes) to be transmitted when the set value N (or more), when the effect is determined on the sub-main board 301, the effect is determined. As an effect content that is executed as an effect that suggests a set value, an effect that suggests a set value N (or more) can be executed (when the actual set value is N or N or more), but on the contrary, it is less than the set value N. It is also possible to execute an effect that suggests (when the actual set value is less than N-1).

Further, in the present embodiment, the pre-judgment of the type of the special symbol and the pre-judgment of the type of the variation pattern related to the special symbol are also made based on the random number range as in the case of the result of the winning / failing lottery described above. It is supposed to be done. The types of special symbols and the types of fluctuation patterns related to the special symbols are provided in large numbers compared to the types of results of the winning / failing lottery, and the number of look-ahead codes (number of groups) is also larger than in the case of the winning / failing lottery. It has become. However, as a method of pre-judgment based on the random number value range, although the random number value range and the types of lottery results to be grouped are different, it is possible to perform the same as the pre-judgment related to the hit / fail judgment as described above. .. Therefore, here, detailed description of the preliminary determination based on the random value range for the symbol advance notice effect and the pattern advance notice effect will be omitted.

By performing the preliminary determination based on such a random value range, it is possible to round the information, and it is possible to create a command related to the preliminary determination with a small amount of information. That is, when the number of random numbers exceeds 256, the number of bytes required to represent the random values exceeds 1 byte. Therefore, assuming that the random number value information is transmitted to the sub-main board 301 as it is (as raw information) for the preliminary determination, the information for identifying which random number is transmitted is transmitted by MODE and the random number is transmitted. In some cases, a 2-byte command (MODE, EVENT) must be transmitted in two steps in order to notify the random number value in order to store and transmit in EVENT.

However, as in this embodiment, by converting the acquired random value into information indicating the range to which the acquired random value belongs and transmitting it to the sub-main board 301, the amount of information to be transmitted can be reduced to be smaller than the number of random value values, and the information is disturbed. Even when the number of numerical values exceeds 256 (1 byte), it is possible to command the attribute of the acquired random value value with the amount of information of 1 byte. In addition, on the side of the main board 102, in case a situation occurs in which the pre-reading information is not desired to be transmitted as described later, a code indicating that fact (for example, indefinite or undetermined) is provided. , It is also possible to send a command indicating the code to the sub-main board 301 side.

Further, in the above, an example in which information that can estimate the lottery result is transmitted is shown as the preliminary determination result, but the main board 102 does not determine anything with respect to the acquired random number value and sub-mains the random number value stored as hold. It may be a specification that transmits to the board 301 and predetermines whether or not to perform the look-ahead effect on the sub-main board 301 (modification example 1 relating to the pre-judgment), or the table for pre-judgment as described above. The lottery table itself (win / fail lottery table, fluctuation pattern table, etc.) used for lottery at the start of fluctuation or the result of lottery processing using a table equivalent thereto is notified to the sub-main board 301 as a preliminary judgment result. (Modification 2 according to the preliminary determination).
<Main control processing of sub-board>

Next, the main control processing of the above-mentioned sub-board 104 will be described. Here, as the main control processing, various interrupt processing which is exception processing and processing related to these will be described with reference to FIGS. 22 to 24.
<< Interrupt factor and priority level >>

First, in this embodiment, in the sub-main board 301 constituting the sub-board 104, a predetermined signal (reset signal) to the reset terminal provided on the CPU 521 is used as an interrupt factor (factor generation source) that the CPU 521 gives the highest priority. There is input and various abnormalities occur. Of these, the reset signal is input when the power is turned on, when an external reset is performed, when the watchdog timer times out, etc., and the sub-main initial setting process described later is accompanied by the reset signal input. (See FIG. 22) is executed.

On the other hand, the interrupt when various abnormalities occur is executed depending on whether or not the watchdog timer function (watchdog function) is effectively set. That is, if the watchdog function is enabled, the processing of the CPU 521 shifts to, for example, a predetermined infinite loop so that the processing time exceeds the set time of the watchdog timer when a predetermined abnormality occurs. To do. Then, when the runaway is detected due to the timeout in the watchdog function, the sub-main initial setting process (see FIG. 22) described later is executed. When the above-mentioned various abnormalities and the input of the reset signal occur at the same time, the reset by the input of the reset signal (sub-main initial setting process) is prioritized.

Another cause of interrupt generation in the sub-main board 301 is the reception of a command (main command) from the main board 102. It is determined that the command is being received from the main board 102 by detecting the rise of the strobe signal (effect data strobe signal serving as a timing signal) from the main board 102. When this main command reception interrupt occurs, the main command reception process (not shown) is executed. The priority level of the main command reception interrupt is set to the next highest level 7 after the above-mentioned highest priority.

Further, when the above-mentioned watchdog function is enabled, an interrupt is generated when a runaway detection of the CPU 521 is performed without going through a process of intentionally timing out as in the case of the above-mentioned various abnormalities. (Runaway detection interrupt) occurs, and the sub-main initial setting process (see FIG. 22) described later is executed. The priority level of the interrupt by such a normal watchdog timer is level 3, which is four steps lower than the above-mentioned level 7. In this embodiment, the level 4 to 6 interrupts between the level 3 and the above-mentioned level 7 are not executed.

Further, as another interrupt generation factor, there is transmission / reception with the sub-sub board 302. The interrupt related to transmission / reception with the sub-sub board 302 (sub-sub command reception interrupt) is generated when a reception command (sub-sub command) from the sub-sub board 302 is input. The reception command from the sub-sub board 302 conveys to the sub-main board 301 that the sub-sub board 302 has normally received the command when the command (sub-main command) is received from the sub-main board 301. Then, when an interrupt related to transmission / reception with the sub-sub board 302 occurs, command transmission / reception management processing is executed. The command transmission from the sub-main board 301 to the sub-sub board 302 is performed when the monitoring toggle signal from the sub-sub board 302 is normally transmitted, as will be described later. The priority of interrupts related to transmission / reception with the sub-sub board 302 is level 2.

Further, another interrupt generation factor is communication with the sub-sub board 302. Interrupts related to communication with the sub-sub board 302 (sub-sub communication interrupts) are generated every predetermined cycle (500 μs in this embodiment) as described later. Then, when an interrupt related to communication with the sub-sub board 302 occurs, communication processing with the sub-sub board is executed. The priority of the interrupt related to communication with the sub-sub board 302 is the same level 2 as the interrupt related to transmission / reception with the sub-sub board 302 described above.

Furthermore, other interrupt generation factors include communication with the RTC clock (real-time clock), generation of timer interrupts (sub-main timer interrupts), interrupt requests for various lamps, etc., and these have the lowest priority. It is set to 1. Of these, at the time of an interrupt related to communication with the RTC clock, communication processing with the RTC clock is executed. Further, the above-mentioned timer interrupt is intended to be used in general game production such as solenoid output processing, motor output processing, and game timer management processing. The timer interrupt is immediately activated by the setting at the time of initialization (initial setting), and the timer interrupt is repeated every predetermined cycle (about 1 ms in this embodiment). Then, when a timer interrupt occurs, a timer interrupt process (see FIG. 24), which will be described later, is executed.
<< Sub-main initial setting process >>

When the power of the sub-main board 301 is turned on, as in the case where the power of the pachinko gaming machine 10 is turned on, the sub-main initial setting process shown in FIG. 22 is executed. In this sub-main initialization process, first, a predetermined address is set as a stack pointer (S201), and then all interrupts are disabled until various initial settings are completed (S202). Further, in the hardware initialization process (S203), basic settings related to the hardware (register setting, port initialization, etc.) are performed, and in the RWM initialization process (S204), the RWM initialization is performed according to a predetermined condition. Is done. Then, in this RWM initialization, the initial value is prepared for the variable with the initial value, and 0 is cleared for the variable without the initial value. Further, in the RWM initialization process (S204), ROM data (control program, etc.) is expanded to the RWM.

Further, in S205, interrupts other than reception of the main command are prohibited, and subsequently, a power failure recovery error detection process (S206) for setting various error information is executed. In this power failure recovery error detection process (S206), a process is performed according to circumstances such as game characteristics. That is, the sub-main board 301 is provided with a function of dealing with various errors including vibration errors and radio wave errors. However, the functions for dealing with these various errors are selected in advance, and the error detection function is exhibited only for the valid errors. For example, there are 1 type and 2 types that combine so-called 1 type and 2 types of game characteristics, and a type that gives a V prize like the pachinko game machine 10 (so-called ball accuracy specs, small hit V specs, etc.). The vibration error detection function is effective for models in which it is determined whether or not a predetermined hit occurs when the game ball passes through a specific area. In addition, unlike the pachinko gaming machine 10 of this embodiment, in a model in which the winning / failing lottery is performed only by a random number lottery, even if it has a vibration error detection function, that function is selectively invalidated in advance. Therefore, it is possible to prevent special measures for vibration errors and the like from being taken.

Subsequently, in the all lamp extinguishing process (S207), an extinguishing request is made to turn off all the lamps, and in the watchdog timer operation start process (S208), based on the setting of using the watchdog timer as the watchdog timer. The watchdog timer is activated. In FIG. 22, the main process (S209) is connected to the processes S201 to S208, but the processes S201 to S208 are the sub-main initial setting processes, and the main process (S209). Is performed after the sub-main initial setting process (S201 to S208). Further, in the main process (S209), the main process of the game is managed, and the details of the main process (S209) will be described later.

A sleep process (S210) is arranged after the main process (S209). Normally, this sleep process (S210) is not executed because the reset operation that performs the sub-main initial setting process is not returned from the main process (S209), but as shown by the dashed arrow in the figure, When this sleep process (S210) is executed for some reason, the transition to the low power consumption mode is performed.
<< Main processing on the sub-main board >>

In the above-mentioned main process (S209), as shown in FIG. 23, the RWM placement address acquisition process (S221) is executed, and in this RWM placement address acquisition process (S221), the program area expanded in the RWM is checked. The start address of the expanded program area is acquired so that it can be performed.

Next, all interrupts are permitted in order to enable interrupts in subsequent processing (S222). Further, in the device initialization process (S223), initialization operations of various devices such as motors, solenoids, and lamps are performed. In the subsequent watchdog clear process (S224), if the setting to use the watchdog timer is made, the watchdog timer is cleared. Further, in the symbol update process (S225), the out-of-order symbols related to the effect symbols 190a to 190c are determined by the counter.

As the counter used here, a three-digit counter of "111" to "999" can be exemplified. For example, when the acquired counter value is "757", the effect symbols 190a to stop display are displayed. It is possible to make 190 "757". When the acquired counter value is a combination of stitches such as "111", it is possible to offset the numerical value of a predetermined digit such as "121" to make a combination of deviations.

This symbol update process (S225) may not be executed depending on the adopted method for determining the outlier symbol. For example, when the missing symbol is determined by lottery, it is not executed. Specifically, it has the data of a lottery sheet (lottery table) incorporating all the symbol combinations, and uses the lottery sheet to draw the missing symbol. A control mode as determined can be exemplified.

In the subsequent error effect management process (S226), the error state is monitored, and various error notifications are executed according to the monitoring result.

Next, in the advance notice lottery management process (S228), a lottery for determining the advance notice effect is executed, and the lottery for this advance notice effect is the efficiency of the loop process (main loop process) described later in the main process (S209). It is divided into several times to improve efficiency). That is, when a plurality of advance notice effects are executed during one fluctuation, the lottery process for the multiple advance notice effects is not all performed in one main loop, but a plurality of main loops. It is executed after multiple lottery divided into. In addition, the timing of the lottery is related to the timing of the appearance of the notice effect during the fluctuation. For example, for a notice effect that appears at a relatively early timing, such as immediately after the start of fluctuation, the priority of the lottery time is set high, and by performing the lottery at the timing according to the priority, image control is performed as soon as possible. Commands can be sent to the sub-sub board 302 on the side. The various processes performed in the advance notice lottery management process (S228) will be described later.

Next, in the device management process (S229), when there is a device operation request such as a real-time clock (RTC), a lamp, or a speaker, a process for operating the corresponding device is executed.

Further, in the command analysis process (S230), when it is necessary to start the process for responding to the command (main command) received from the main board 102 or when the command data exists in the above-mentioned command buffer, the command analysis is performed. Do. Then, when the command is analyzed (S231: YES), the process returns to the watchdog clear process (S224), and the main loop is executed. Immediately after receiving the command from the main board 102, since there is command data in the command buffer, the main loop is executed and the process returns to the watchdog clear process (S224) and thereafter. However, if the command buffer becomes empty before the main loop is repeated and the next timer interrupt described later is executed, it is not necessary to perform command analysis, and command analysis is not performed. In such a case, the random number update process (S232), which has a lower priority than the command analysis, is executed by using the generated time without proceeding to the main loop (S231: NO). This random number update process (S232) is a soft random number update process. Further, in this command analysis process (S230), the fluctuation pattern (sub-variation pattern) in the sub-main board 301 is determined. Further, when the data of the lottery sheet (lottery table) incorporating all the symbol combinations is possessed and the control mode for determining the out-of-order symbols is adopted by using the lottery sheet, the command analysis process (S230) is used for directing. Determine the design.

Regarding the processes (S230, S231) related to these command analysis, in other words, for a certain command, immediately after receiving the command, the main process does not proceed to the subsequent processes (here, the random number update process (S232)). The other processes (S224 to S231) in the loop process (S224 to S232) are repeated, and if there are no more commands in the command buffer, the process proceeds to the subsequent processes, and as a result, the command analysis process is performed for a certain main command. Immediately after the start of (S230), command analysis is executed, so the program module placed later does not proceed, and when command analysis is no longer performed in the command analysis process (S230), the program module placed later is reached. It can be said that it is something to move forward. If, for example, a checksum calculation is performed after the command analysis determination process (S231), this process is also executed immediately after the command is received, as in the random number update process (S232). It can be said that this is a process that is not performed.

In the random number update process (S232), the lottery random number (software random number) related to the production is updated, and each time the random number update process (S232) is executed, the software random number related to the sub-main board 301 is a new value. Will be updated to. Then, the value sequentially updated in the random number update process (S232) is used as a random number for lottery in various production modes in the above-mentioned advance notice lottery management process (S228) and the like. Further, the value generated by the random number update process (S232) is for lottery after being calculated with the hardware random number for lottery of various production modes in the same manner as the generation of the predetermined random number on the main board 102 described above. It may also be used as a random number.
<< Sub-main timer interrupt processing >>

Next, the timer interrupt processing will be described with reference to FIG. 24. The timer interrupt process occurs every 1 ms, which is a predetermined cycle. Since this timer interrupt processing is level 1 interrupt processing having the lowest priority, first, as shown in the figure, interrupts of priority level 2 or higher are permitted (S261). Further, the port input process (S262) is executed, and the port data input process and output process are performed. In this port input process (S262), a process (input process) for confirming a port connected to various sensors (magnetic sensor, vibration sensor, position sensor of movable effect member, push button input detection sensor, etc.) and Information output (output processing) is performed from ports connected to various devices (motors, solenoids, lamps, etc.).

Further, in the port input process (S262), in addition to these ports, a process related to the power supply voltage monitoring port to which a signal indicating a power failure (power failure signal) is input at the time of power failure is also performed. .. Then, when this power failure signal is input, the processing of the CPU 521 prohibits all interrupt processing and shifts to a transfer processing for backing up the stored information. The backup function of the sub-main board 301 will be described later.

Subsequently, the device control data output process (S263) is executed, and device control data output for driving various motors, solenoids, lamps, and the like is performed. For example, in the device management process (S229) of the main process shown in FIG. 23, when a drive control pattern in which a predetermined motor is excited for 100 ms and then degaussed for 100 ms is determined, this device is used. In the control data output process (S263), a time count process of 100 ms is performed.

Further, the effect timer update process (S264) is executed, and the timer value update process (S265) for measuring a predetermined timing in various effects is performed. Then, the button control timer update is executed, and the effective time management timer for managing the period during which the operation of the push button (operation button 22) is valid is updated.

Further, the push button monitoring control process (S266) is executed. This push button monitoring control process (S266) is for controlling the operation button 22 described above, which is a sub-button (push button) for effect, and is a process according to the input state (operation state) of the operation button 22. To execute.

Next, the update of the task control counter (S267) is executed, and the control counter (multitask counter) used for a plurality of predetermined tasks is updated. This control counter updates the count value once every 1 ms, which is the timer interrupt cycle, with 16 times as one unit. Then, in this embodiment, the task control counter counts the values from 0 to 15 in order every 1 ms, and loops the count of the values from 0 to 15.

Further, as one of the predetermined tasks, the one related to the game effect lamp can be exemplified. Many of the driving modes of the game effect lamp are performed in synchronization with the image in the effect display device 60, and the display switching of one frame (one unit image frame) of the moving image is about 16 ms or about 32 ms (about 33 ms). It is often performed in a cycle such as (sometimes) (16 ms cycle in this embodiment). Therefore, the control counter is designed so that the generation cycle of the control counter related to the game effect lamp forms a relationship such as an integral multiple or an integer 1/1 with the control unit time (16 ms or 32 ms) in the moving image display. ing. As a result, it becomes easy to design a lamp effect that matches the timing with the image.

Regarding the control counter, for example, if a certain process related to the game effect lamp is performed at 16 ms intervals, the process is performed at the timing when the value of the control counter becomes one predetermined value such as 3. .. Further, for the processing performed at 8ms intervals such as the image CPU runaway monitoring processing described later, the processing is performed at two timings where the difference is 8 as in the case where the control counter becomes 1 and 9. Will be done.

Further, when the cycle generated by the control counter is adjusted to a relatively short cycle such as one cycle (1 ms) of a timer interrupt (sub-main timer interrupt), it is about 30 seconds as in the control of error notification or the like. If the control for counting a relatively long time is performed, the data length to be secured for counting 30 seconds becomes long, and the number of required memories also becomes large. Therefore, the cycle of the control counter is set longer than one cycle (1 ms) of the timer interrupt, and the relationship between the control cycle related to the other superposed effects (image effects) and an integral multiple or a fraction of an integer. Therefore, the cycle in which the control counter goes around is set to a predetermined cycle (16 ms in this case). Another use of the control counter updated in the task control counter update process (S267) is runaway monitoring (described later) for the sub-sub board 302.

Next, the image CPU runaway monitoring process (S268) is executed, and the runaway monitoring process for the image CPU of the sub-sub board 302 is performed. Here, in this embodiment, the CPU of the sub-sub board 302 is integrated with the image controller 526 in FIG. As described above, the sub-sub board 302 outputs a predetermined signal (monitoring toggle signal) that repeats on and off for each frame display of the moving image control. When the toggle signal from the sub-sub board 302 does not change continuously for a predetermined period (for example, 1600 ms corresponding to about 50 to 100 frames), it is determined that an abnormality such as a runaway of the image CPU has occurred, and the sub A reset signal (external reset signal) is transmitted from the main board 301 to the sub-sub board 302. After receiving this reset signal, the sub-sub board 302 executes a reset process (sub-main initial setting process) for initializing the state of the sub-sub board 302.

Following this image CPU runaway monitoring process (S268), an error management timer process (S269) is executed. In this error management timer processing (S269), the error management timer is subtracted, and a predetermined processing is executed when a timeout occurs. Examples of the process at the time of timeout include the process of terminating the above-mentioned error notification. Note that this error management timer counts once for every 16 timer interrupts, and the processing related to error management using the error management timer is also one of the predetermined tasks using the control counter described above. It is one. When this error management timer processing is completed, the process returns to the original processing before the timer interrupt in the sub-main main processing (see FIG. 23). Here, since the target of interrupt permission is restricted in S261 described above, although not shown, the process returns to the main process of the sub-main after all interrupts are permitted.
<< Communication processing with sub-sub board >>

Next, the communication process with the above-mentioned sub-sub board 302 will be described. In command transmission (transmission of sub-main command) from the sub-main board 301 to the sub-sub board 302, an interrupt (sub-communication interrupt) related to communication with the sub-sub board 302 is generated at regular intervals (here, 500 μs), and the interrupt is interrupted. This is performed by executing communication processing with the sub-sub board 302 each time. In the communication process with the sub-sub board 302, a buffer check is performed in order to confirm the existence of data to be transmitted, and if there is data, this data is read. Then, the read data is set in the transmission buffer, the settings related to command transmission are updated, and the communication process with the sub-sub is completed.
<< Command transmission / reception management processing >>

Further, when the sub-main board 301 transmits a command to the sub-sub board 302, the above-mentioned reception command (sub-sub command) indicating that the command (sub-main command) can be normally received from the sub-sub board 302 side is sub-main. It is transmitted to the board 301 side. In this command transmission / reception management process, the command is read, the command analysis is executed, and then the command is saved. When receiving a sub-sub command, command reception interrupt processing is executed on the sub-sub board 302. For this command reception interrupt processing, set a flag for executing command reception interrupt processing in the above-mentioned sub communication interrupt. Is executed by. That is, since the input of the sub-sub command from the sub-sub board 302 occurs after the transmission of the sub-main command from the sub-main board 301, the command reception interrupt processing is performed incidentally to the processing related to the sub-communication interrupt. It has become something to be said.
<< Control processing on the sub-sub board >>

In the sub-sub board 302, similarly to the sub-main board 301, the sub-sub initial setting process started after the power is turned on, the main process executed after the sub-sub initial setting process, and the sub-sub timer interrupt generated in a predetermined cycle with respect to the main process. The timer interrupt process executed in connection with the operation, the sub-main command reception process which is the interrupt process generated in connection with the reception of the sub-main command, and the like are executed. Of these, in the sub-main command reception process, when the sub-main command from the sub-main board 301 is received, the above-mentioned reception command (sub-sub command) indicating that the sub-main command has been normally received is transmitted. Will be executed.
<About special game characteristics related to specific game states>

Next, characteristic matters regarding game characteristics (including game specifications) and production modes in the pachinko gaming machine 10 of this embodiment will be described using a game flow (game flow). Here, the game flow related to the basic game will be mainly described, and the matters that can be examined in more detail based on the basic game will be described later.

In the pachinko gaming machine 10 of this embodiment, as a feature point, the number of electric support (duration of the normal figure high probability state) in the first specific game (special figure high probability, normal figure high probability) after the big hit game is the big hit symbol. It is different depending on the type of. In addition, in the game with a high probability (during probability change) of the special figure when shifting to the first specific game, the predetermined number of fluctuations (for example, 20 times, 30 times, 40 times, 50 times, or 60 times) is reached. If the big hit does not occur (if the loss continues), the second specific game (a state called "small hit rush"), which is an advantageous game state for the player, has a high probability of special figure and a low probability of normal figure. State).

The specifications of such a pachinko gaming machine 10 can be referred to as, for example, "electric support frequency variation type V probability small hit rush". As a condition for shifting to the small hit rush, as described above, there is a situation where the number of electric support is 0 in the first specific game, but other situations will be described later.

FIG. 27 shows the main game characteristics of the pachinko gaming machine 10 of this embodiment by a game flow (game flowchart). The game flow shown in FIG. 27 is a game flow when a normal game is performed according to the intention of the designer, and when an irregular game is performed, it is not necessarily shown in FIG. 27. It should be explained that the game flow is not shown. Examples of the irregular game described here are "Don't intentionally make a V prize at a jackpot that makes it easy to win a V", and "In a game mainly composed of Special Figure 1 (Special Figure 2), it is not the main player of the game. An example is a game method such as "playing so that only the fluctuation of the special figure 2 (special figure 1) or the fluctuation of the special figure 2 (special figure 1) increases".

First, as shown at the left end in the figure, in the normal gaming state before the big hit (first hit) occurs, one of the plurality of production stages is executed. In this embodiment, four production stages, a first production stage (first stage) to a fourth production stage (fourth stage), are provided as a plurality of production stages in the normal gaming state.

Further, in this embodiment, the first stage is the default production stage. Then, at the start of the first game immediately after the power is turned on, if the player does not perform an operation for changing (selecting) the production stage, the production in the first stage is started and the operation for changing the production stage is performed. If there is, the production on the production stage according to the operation is executed. After that, if there is an operation to change the production stage, the production on the selected production stage is executed.

Here, the stage of such an effect can also be referred to as an effect mode or the like. Furthermore, these stage and mode changes (selection) are, for example, "stage selection", "stage change", "stage change", "stechen", "mode selection", "mode change", "mode change", etc. It is possible to name it.

Further, in the normal game state, the subject of the fluctuation related to the special figure is the game of the special figure 1, and the game aiming at the 1-1 start winning opening 62A (Fig. 1) is performed by the left-handed firing intensity. It can be advanced. Here, various explanations can be made for the "subject of fluctuation related to the special figure", but for example, it means a game that is a standard (premise) in terms of gameplay. That is, the game progress is determined on the premise that the game that is the subject of the fluctuation (either the game of the special figure 1 or the game of the special figure 2) is performed, and the player is the subject of the fluctuation. By playing the game on the side (either the game of Special Figure 1 or the game of Special Figure 2), an appropriate (standard) game can be played according to the design of the game.

Here, the game that becomes the "subject of the fluctuation related to the special figure" described above is, for example, "subject game", "main game", "standard game", "normal game", "regular game", or , "Regular game" and the like. On the other hand, for example, a game that does not become a "subject of fluctuation related to a special figure" such as a game of special figure 2 in a normal game state is, for example, a "non-subject game", a "non-main game", and a "game that does not become the main". It can be referred to as a "non-standard game", a "non-normal game", a "non-regular game", or an "irregular game".

Also, regarding the launch of the game ball, in the normal game state, the game mainly aimed at the 1-1 start winning opening 62A by left-handed hitting performed with a relatively weak firing intensity, so that in the normal game state, Left-handed is the "main game". The "subjective game" related to launch is also referred to as "main game", "standard game", "normal game", "regular game", or "regular game", as in the case of special figure fluctuation. It is possible.

And, for right-handed games played against the situation where left-handed games are the main players, for example, "non-subjective games", "non-main games", "non-standard games", "unnormal games" , "Non-regular game", or "irregular game" and the like.

In the following, regarding the special figure fluctuation and launch, the situation when the main game is played will be mainly explained, and the situation when the main game is not played will be supplementarily explained as appropriate.

Regarding the game of Special Figure 1 which is the main game in the normal game state, the jackpot probability differs depending on the set value, but for example, when the set value is "1" (when the set value is 1), it is about 1/220. .. In the following, the case of setting 1 will be described as an example.

The jackpot of Special Figure 1 that can occur in the normal gaming state can be referred to as a "first jackpot". This first jackpot is the first bonus (here, the probability variation bonus, 4R probability variation jackpot shown in FIG. 10), which has a relatively high degree of advantage (advantage) for the player, or the second, which has a relatively low degree of advantage. It is one of the bonuses (here, the non-probability bonus, the 4R normal jackpot shown in FIG. 10). Whether the jackpot is the first bonus or the second bonus is determined by the type of symbol determined by the first symbol lottery. The specific correspondence between the type of symbol and the type of hit will be described later.

In this embodiment, the selection ratio of the jackpot symbol according to the special figure 1 is determined so that the generation rate of the first bonus is 40% and the generation rate of the second bonus is 60%. In addition, the number of balls that the player can expect to acquire in the big hit at this time is about 400 (pieces) by 4R.

Further, when the first bonus (probability variation bonus) is won, the shielding member (not shown) of the large winning opening 90 to the V winning opening is controlled to be open so that the V winning is likely to occur at the large winning opening 90. Therefore, when the first bonus is won, the right-handed game is performed as usual, and if the game ball enters the big winning opening 90, a V winning is almost certainly generated, and the probability changes after the big hit game. It becomes a game state. Such a big hit may be referred to as, for example, "V easy big hit" below. In addition, the distribution of the game balls related to the V prize may be referred to as "V certain distribution" or the like.

Further, the special figure (special figure 1 and special figure 2) that becomes the V easy big hit may be referred to as "V easy symbol" or the like. This "V easy symbol" is related to the determination of the probability variation, and can be called a "probability variation symbol" or the like. However, in this embodiment, as described above, V winning is a condition for generating the probabilistic state, so that the "V easy symbol" does not directly (immediately) determine whether or not the probabilistic change occurs. It is just a design that decides to make it prone to change. In this respect, the "V easy symbol" is different from the general "probability variation symbol" that immediately determines the presence or absence of the probability variation.

Regarding the above-mentioned explanation of "a right-handed game is performed as usual", as an example of a game that is not normal (a non-subjective game, an unusual game, etc.), for example, a player The situation where the left-handed hit is continued, the situation where the player intentionally stops firing and makes a so-called stop hit, or the game ball is clogged (retained) in the game area 52 and the game ball flows down. The situation where it disappeared can be mentioned.

Further, when the above-mentioned second bonus (non-probability change bonus) is won, the shielding member (not shown) of the V winning opening is kept closed so that the V winning is not generated at the large winning opening 90. When this second bonus is won, the large winning opening 90 is not controlled so as to facilitate V winning, and V winning is almost certainly not generated. In the following, such a big hit may be referred to as, for example, "V non-easy big hit" or "V difficult big hit".

In addition, the special symbol (special symbol) that becomes the V non-easy jackpot may be referred to as "V non-easy symbol" or "V difficult symbol". This "V-easy symbol" or the like is related to the determination of the probability variation as in the case of the "V-easy symbol", and can be called a "non-probability variation symbol" or the like. However, the "V non-easy symbol" does not directly (immediately) determine whether or not the probabilistic change occurs, but merely a symbol that determines the state in which the probabilistic change is unlikely to occur. Therefore, the “V non-easy symbol” and the like are different from the general “non-probable variation symbol” that immediately determines the presence or absence of the probability variation.

Here, in the big hit based on the "V non-easy pattern", the shielding member (not shown) in the V region is opened without being closed, but it is extremely short time (0.3 seconds, etc.) so that the ball does not easily enter. It is also possible to adopt a control mode in which only) is opened. The details of the control mode of the V region and the large winning opening 90 will be described later.

Of the above-mentioned two types of bonuses (first bonus and second bonus) that can occur as the first jackpot, the first bonus, which is easy to win a V, shifts to the first specific game after the jackpot game. This first specific game is a specific game in which the jackpot probability of the special figure is high (high probability of special figure), there is electric support (high probability of normal figure), and the time is shortened of the special symbol.

Further, when the first bonus is won and the game shifts to the first specific game, when the predetermined condition is satisfied, the game shifts to the second specific game in which the small hit rush state occurs. Then, there are cases where the game shifts to the second specific game through the first specific game, or shifts to the second specific game without going through the first specific game. Of these first specific games and the second specific game, Details will be described later.

On the other hand, the second bonus, which is not easy to win V (difficult to win V), is, as a standard, to shift to the third specific game after the big hit game. This third specific game is a specific game in which the jackpot probability of the special figure is low (low probability of special figure), there is electric support (high probability of normal figure), and the time is shortened of the special symbol. The specific game that shortens the time of the special game includes the time reduction when the special figure has a high probability and the time reduction when the special figure has a low probability. However, in order to distinguish the third specific game from other specific game states, the following Then, it may be called "normal time reduction".

During the above-mentioned first specific game, the second specific game, and the third specific game (normal time reduction), right-handed is the main game related to the launch. Then, in a situation where a right-handed game is the main subject, the effect display device 60 performs a right-handed effect that urges the player to perform a right-handed game. As this right-handed effect, various ones can be adopted.

Further, during the first specific game after the first bonus related to the first jackpot and during the third specific game (normal time reduction) after the second bonus, the right side substantially shown in FIGS. 1 and 20 (b). In the unit 92, the 1-2 start winning opening 62B is controlled to perform a long opening, which is a relatively long opening, with the winning of the normal drawing. Then, during the first specific game or the third specific game (normal time reduction), since the situation has a high probability of normal drawing as described above, the 1-2 start winning opening 62B can be easily opened. Therefore, during the first specific game or the third specific game (normal time reduction), the ratio of the time during which the 1-2 start winning opening 62B is open is larger than that in the game states other than these.

Further, during the first specific game or the third specific game (normal time reduction), since the ratio of the time when the 1-2 start winning opening 62B is open is large as described above, the right unit 92 is inside. Most of the game balls that have entered can be entered into the 1-2 starting winning opening 62B. Then, during the first specific game or the third specific game (normal time reduction), no game ball enters the second start winning opening 63, or even if it does occur, the 1-2 starting winning opening It is extremely small compared to the number of balls entering 62B.

Of the first specific game and the third specific game (normal time reduction), for the third specific game (normal time reduction), the end condition of the normal time reduction is until the number of fluctuations of the special figure reaches 100 times. There is. If there is no ball entering the second start winning opening 63 during the normal time reduction, the normal time reduction ends when the number of fluctuations in the special figure 1 reaches 100 times. In addition, when there is a ball entering the second start winning opening 63, when the number of fluctuations reaches 100 times with the total of special figures 1 and 2 or with the second starting winning opening 63 alone, Normal time reduction ends.

If a big hit does not occur during the normal time reduction, the game state exits the normal time reduction (time reduction) and returns to the normal game state. However, when a big hit (second big hit) occurs during the normal time reduction (when there is a pullback), it shifts to the second bonus or the third bonus as shown in the lower part of the figure. The rate at which pullback (big hit) occurs during normal time reduction can be, for example, about 37% as shown in FIG. 27.

The second bonus in the second jackpot can be the same as the second bonus in the first jackpot described above. Then, after the end of the jackpot game related to the second bonus in the second jackpot, the normal time is shortened again.

On the other hand, in the third bonus, the control of the jackpot is the same as that of the first bonus in the first jackpot, but the control related to the setting of the specific game after the jackpot is different, and if it is a symbol that is a V winning easy symbol, The game state directly shifts to the second specific game without going through the first specific game. Therefore, if the third bonus is won in the second big hit, the second specific game can be performed without going through the game characteristics of the first specific game, but the details of the first specific game and the second specific game Will be described later.

In this embodiment, regarding the third bonus, the selection ratio of the jackpot symbol according to the special figure 1 is determined so that the generation rate of the second bonus is 60% and the generation rate of the third bonus is 40%. .. In addition, the number of balls that the player can expect to acquire in the big hit at this time is about 400 (pieces) by 4R.

Subsequently, the above-mentioned first specific game will be described. This first specific game is mainly a game of special figure 1 by right-handed hitting, and is performed in a probability state with a high probability of special figure. In this embodiment, the winning probability of the big hit during the first specific game is about 1/66. Further, although the details will be described later, there are six types of electric support times related to the first specific game: 0 times, 20 times, 30 times, 40 times, 50 times, and 60 times. The number of electric support related to the first specific game is determined by the type of the symbol at the time of the first jackpot described above and the types of the symbols of the third jackpot and the fourth jackpot described later.

Although not shown in FIG. 27, in the first bonus of the first big hit or the third big hit, and in the fourth big hit, when the big hit in which the number of electric support given at the time of V winning is 0 is won, the first It shifts to the state of the second specific game described above without going through the specific game. In addition, if the jackpot with 20 to 60 electric support times is won, the game is performed with the determined number of electric support times (20 to 60 times) as the maximum number of continuations after shifting to the first specific game. .. Then, if the loss continues and no big hit occurs within the determined number of electric support times (20 to 60 times), the first specific game ends and the game shifts to the second specific game described above.

Regarding the number of times of various electric support, the relationship between the selection ratio of the jackpot symbol and the number of times of electric support (0 to 60 times) is defined so that the average number of times becomes a predetermined number. In this embodiment, the average number of times is 45. Therefore, theoretically, the first specific game automatically shifts to the second specific game if the number of fluctuations (number of games) continues to deviate until it reaches 45 times (if it continues to be addicted). be able to. Here, the number of times of electric support of 0 to 60 times described above can be referred to as, for example, the "number of transitions", and the average number of times (45 times in this case) can be referred to as, for example, the "average number of transitions".

Further, in this first specific game, a big hit (third big hit) may occur before the number of fluctuations reaches the above-mentioned number of transitions (here, 20 to 60 times). This third jackpot is the same as the first jackpot in terms of specifications, and it is possible to make the first bonus at a rate of 40% and the second bonus at a rate of 60%. In addition, the number of balls that the player can expect to acquire in the third big hit can be about 400 (pieces) by 4R.

As shown in FIG. 27, when the first bonus related to the third big hit is generated in the first specific game, the game state of the first specific game is returned again after the big hit game. In addition, when the second bonus is generated, the game shifts to the fourth specific game (normal time reduction) after the big hit game. This fourth specific game (normal time reduction) is a game performed in a game state with a low probability of a special figure and a high probability of a normal figure, similar to the third specific game (normal time reduction) described above. This fourth specific game may also be referred to as "normal time reduction" below.

Regarding the 4th specific game (normal time reduction), as in the normal time reduction of the 3rd specific game, the special figure 1 alone, the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 total, or the 2nd start winning opening 63 alone When the number of fluctuations reaches 100, the normal time reduction ends. Then, the game state exits the normal game state (time reduction) and returns to the normal game state. Further, although not shown, the big hit generated during the fourth specific game (normal time reduction) is the above-mentioned second big hit. The rate at which the pullback occurs during the time reduction can be, for example, about 37%, as in the case of the third specific game. In addition, the third specific game that shifts after the first big hit and the fourth specific game that shifts after the third big hit may be configured so that the number of electric support given is different even if the same big hit symbol is used. It is possible.

In the first specific game, if a big hit occurs within the number of transitions (20 to 60 times in this case), a battle is a production in which a predetermined character fights (battle) as a production at the time of reach. A reach effect (described as battle reach in FIG. 27) is executed. As the battle reach effect at this time, for example, three types of the first battle reach effect to the third effect battle reach effect can be provided, and one of the battle reach effects can be selected and executed. And, in any battle reach production, the relationship between the jackpot symbol and the fluctuation pattern (and the production pattern) so that if the battle is won, it becomes the first bonus of the third jackpot, and if it is defeated, it becomes the second bonus. Is stipulated.

Further, in the present embodiment, there is a case where the battle reach effect is shifted to the second specific game which is a small hit rush. Here, the effect when shifting from the battle reach effect to the second specific game is one of the effects executed during the change of the special symbol based on the limited frequency (special change pattern table) described later. The production when shifting from the battle reach production to the second specific game is, for example, an example in which a predetermined character may participate in the battle, and when the character participates in the battle, the character shifts to the second specific game. it can. Although the frequency of using battle reach (the production of battle reach is determined) is set high as an effect of notifying the transition of the second specific game, the transition to the second specific game is performed by using another effect. It is also possible to notify.

Subsequently, the second specific game will be described. The second specific game is a game in which the probability change from the first specific game continues and the small hits become a small hit rush in which small hits can occur frequently. Then, the second specific game is performed in a game state in which the game of the special figure 2 is the game of the main body related to the symbol variation, and the special figure has a high probability and the normal figure has a low probability. In this embodiment, the jackpot probability of the special figure in the second specific game is about 1/66.

In the second specific game, since the probability is low, it is difficult to open the 1-2 start winning opening 62B, and many right-handed game balls are provided with the 1-2 starting winning opening 62B. It passes through the area and reaches the second starting winning opening 63. In the game of special figure 2 using the second start winning opening 63, the big hit symbol is assigned to the big hit and the small hit. Then, when a small hit occurs, the large winning opening 90 is opened in a predetermined manner. As a mode of opening the large winning opening 90 at the time of a small hit, as described above, one opening for each small hit can be exemplified for about 1.2 seconds.

In the second specific game, the game of special figure 2 is the main game, and in special figure 2 (second lottery), a small hit is won with a high probability (see FIG. 9). Then, when the large winning opening 90 is opened due to a small hit, it is possible to expect a ball to enter the large winning opening 90.

Further, the jackpot that can occur in the second specific game is the fourth jackpot. Then, the period from the start of the second specific game to the end of the big hit game of the fourth big hit can be referred to as, for example, a "composite bonus". In the fourth big hit big hit game included in this combined bonus, the number of balls that the player can expect to get is about 400 (pieces). And, in the compound bonus, the amount of balls that can be obtained changes according to the duration of the small hit rush, but in general, the total of the small hit rush and the 4th big hit can be expected to be about 1500 shots (pieces). It has become like.

All of the jackpot symbols according to the special figure 2 shift to the probabilistic state after the jackpot game. That is, all the jackpot symbols according to the special figure 2 are "V easy symbols". Then, even during the big hit game of the 4th big hit, the probability variation distribution control (control for making the V prize) that makes it easy to win is performed, and the first specific game (electric support 0) that is theoretically in the probability variation state at a rate of 100%. In the case of a big hit symbol of the time, it shifts to the second specific game). Further, after shifting to the first specific game, if the deviation continues (if addicted) until the number of games reaches the number of transitions (20 to 60 times) as described above, the second specific game is performed again.

Therefore, in the first specific game, by continuing the deviation until the number of transitions (20 to 60 times), the player can take out the ball by the small hit rush in the second specific game state and the big hit game related to the fourth big hit. It is possible to get the ball out in. Furthermore, when shifting to the second specific game, the probability of becoming a big hit (third big hit) in Special Figure 1 is much lower than in the first specific game, so the player can use the first first specific game related to the consecutive villa. Therefore, the probability variation game (the game with a high probability of special figure) can be looped in the order of the second specific game and the first specific game thereafter.

Also, in the first specific game after the second time, if the number of fluctuations reaches the number of transitions (20 to 60 times) without becoming a big hit, the special figure 2 shifts to the second specific game which is the main body of the game. Since there is a high possibility that the subsequent big hit is the big hit according to the special figure 2 in which only the "V easy symbol" is the big hit symbol, the loop of the probabilistic game can be continued. Furthermore, in the fourth jackpot, if the jackpot with 0 transitions is won, after the jackpot game of the fourth jackpot, the second specific game (small hit rush) of the compound bonus is performed without going through the first specific game. I will be back.

Here, when the big hit of the special figure 1 occurs during the first specific game (when the third big hit occurs before reaching the number of transitions of 20 to 60 times), after the big hit (not shown in FIG. 27). Except for some rare big hit symbols (special figure 1-4R time saving no symbol) that will be a small hit rush transition, it is not shifted to the second specific game (small hit rush). However, although the description is omitted in FIG. 27, the jackpot of Special Figure 1 (the third bonus related to the second jackpot during the fourth specific game and the "V easy symbol" of Special Figure 1 during the normal time reduction. When a big hit) occurs, it may shift to the second specific game as described above.

Such game characteristics can also be explained as follows. For example, in the above-mentioned game characteristics, the condition for shifting from the first specific game to the second specific game is 45 times in average number of shifts. Further, the first specific game is performed in a probabilistic state. Therefore, the pachinko gaming machine 10 can give the player the recognition that the first specific game is equivalent to the ST machine of 45 times by obtaining the information of the specifications (specifications). ..

Furthermore, since the jackpot probability in the first specific game is about 1/66, the value of the denominator of the jackpot probability at the time of high probability (66 in this case) becomes larger than the value of the average number of transitions (45 in this case). There is. Then, when the player pays attention to the relationship between these numerical values and examines the ease of winning, these numerical values are difficult to give the impression of winning a big hit within the game period of the number of transitions.

And, if you guess the idea of the player who made such a study, "If the jackpot probability is 1/66, there is no way to make consecutive chans in 45 STs. Even if you stay in a row, you should do two consecutive chans. It can be considered that it is easy to reach a negative feeling of giving up.

However, since the pachinko gaming machine 10 of this embodiment shifts to a combined bonus including a small hit rush (second specific game) after the first specific game, the value of 45 times, which is the average number of transitions, is rather rather. It is possible to derive the idea that if you do not hit the jackpot within 45 times, you can increase the number of balls you get. For this reason, it is highly likely that the player will shift to a small hit rush by using a numerical relationship that leads to the player's negative feelings (the idea that he cannot usually win). You will be able to derive new ideas.

Then, the pachinko gaming machine 10 utilizes the relationship between the number of transitions to the compound bonus (here, the average number of transitions) and the jackpot probability at the time of probability change, and the player's loss in the first specific game and the compound bonus. It can be said that it is possible to draw a positive (favorable) idea for the small hit rush in.

Further, when the pachinko gaming machine 10 shifts to the second specific game, the subject of the game shifts from the special figure 1 (first lottery) to the special figure 2 (second lottery) composed of only V easy symbols. As a result, the continuation of the probabilistic state is almost guaranteed. Therefore, by shifting from the first specific game to the second specific game, the fourth specific game, which is disadvantageous among the specific games, and then the normal game thereafter. By shifting to a state where the anxiety of the transition is removed, it is possible to give the impression that further benefits can be enjoyed in addition to the transition to the state of small hit rush.

Next, the relationship between the types of special symbols (Special Figure 1 and Special Figure 2) and the content of the specific game will be described based on the charts (FIGS. 28 and 29). First, the structure of the charts of FIGS. 28 and 29 will be described. In both charts, the various item names shown in the left side portion and the upper portion are common except for one. Therefore, the common item names in both figures and tables will be described mainly with reference to FIG. 28, and the item names in FIG. 29 will be described with reference to those different from those in FIG. 28.

In FIG. 28, the item names of “special symbol number”, “symbol name”, and “symbol group name” are listed in order from the left end, and these are also common in FIG. 29. Further, in FIG. 28, the item name of "time reduction when passing through the probabilistic operating region" (at the time of winning V) is given, whereas in FIG. 29, "time reduction when not passing through the probabilistic operation region" ( Item names (at the time of non-V winning) are listed.

Of these, the "special figure number" common to both figures and tables means a number assigned individually to all special symbols (special figure 1 and special figure 2). In the example described here, 32 types of special symbols are provided, and special symbol numbers 0 to 31 are assigned to these special symbols. Subsequently, the "design name" is a unique name given to each special figure, and in the example described here, the symbols 1 to 32 are sequentially assigned to the above-mentioned symbols 0 to 31. It has a name.

Subsequently, the "design group name" means the name of each symbol group composed of a plurality of jackpot symbols. The "symbol group" refers to a group of symbols that controls the same special game. In the example described here, the symbol group name is "off", and the jackpot symbols are "special figure 1_4R time-saving no symbol", "special figure 1-4R time-saving symbol 1" to "special figure 1-4R time-saving symbol 6", and " A total of 16 types are provided: "Special Figure 2_4R Time-saving Design 1" to "Special Figure 2_4R Time-saving Design 6", and "Special Figure 2_Special Electric Operation Design 1" to "Special Figure 2_Special Electric Operation Design 2", which are small hit symbols. Has been done.

Of these, the above-mentioned symbol 1 (special symbol number 0) is associated with "off", and symbols 2 to 3 (special symbol numbers 1 and 2) are associated with "special diagram 1-4R time saving no symbol". It is tied. Further, two symbols 4 to 13 (special figure numbers 3 to 12) are associated with each of the "special figure 1_4R time-saving symbol 1" to the "special figure 1-4R time-saving symbol 5" in order. Further, three symbols 14 to 16 (special symbol numbers 13 to 15) are associated with the "special diagram 1-4R time-saving symbol 6".

Further, two symbols 17 to 28 (special symbol numbers 16 to 27) are associated with each of the "special figure 2_4R time-saving symbol 1" to the "special figure 2_4R time-saving symbol 6" in order. In addition, three symbols 29 to 31 (special symbol numbers 28 to 30) are associated with the "special diagram 2_special electric operation symbol 1", and the symbols are associated with the "special diagram 2_special electric operation symbol 2". 32 (special figure number 31) is associated.

Here, in the pachinko gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, the jackpot symbols "special figure 1_4R time saving no symbol", "special drawing 1-4R time saving symbol 1" to "special drawing 1-4R time saving symbol 6", "special drawing 1_4R time saving symbol" Of the 2_4R time-saving symbols 1 to "special figure 2_4R time-saving symbols 6", the symbols 14 to 16 constituting the symbol group "special figure 1_4R time-saving symbols 6" are "V difficult symbols", and the jackpot game It is a group of symbols that do not win a V prize when a normal game is played in. All other jackpot symbols are "V easy symbols".

Therefore, the number of time reductions shown in FIG. 28 is the number of time reductions given when a normal game is performed with a big hit based on the "V easy symbol" excluding the symbol group "special figure 1-4R time reduction symbol 6" (when V prize occurs). The number of time reductions shown in FIG. 29 indicates the number of time reductions given when a normal game is performed with a big hit based on the symbol group "Special Figure 1-4R Time Saving Symbol 6" (when V prize is not generated). It is a thing. The other time reduction times shown indicate the time reduction times given when a normal game is not performed, that is, when an irregular game is performed during a big hit, and the number of time reductions shown in the game flow of FIG. 27 is shown. It is a big hit different from the 1st big hit to the 4th big hit.

As shown in FIGS. 28 and 29, the symbol 1 is a “missing” symbol common to the special figures 1 and 2. Further, the symbols 2 to 3 are the symbols without the time reduction according to the special figure 1, and the symbols 4 to 16 are the symbols with the time reduction according to the special drawing 1. Further, symbols 17 to 28 are symbols with a time reduction related to special figure 2, and symbols 29 to 32 are special electric operation symbols (small hit symbols) also related to special figure 2. In addition, since the presence or absence of the probability change and the number of time reductions (the number of times of electric support) given are determined by the presence or absence of the V prize, the symbol group names "no time reduction" and "with time reduction" are tentative names. Regarding the symbol group name, the name related to the probability change is not described, but since the jackpot will be a probability change if there is a V prize, there is a distinction as to whether or not there is a time reduction and the number of time reductions (electric support) given, but the probability change There is no distinction between the presence and absence of.

The "time reduction number" of "when passing through the probabilistic operating region" in FIG. 28 means the time reduction number of times when V is won, and the "time reduction number" of "when not passing through the probability variation operating area" in FIG. 29 means a non-V prize. It means the number of time reductions.

In FIGS. 28 and 29, the “time reduction number” of “when passing through the probabilistic operation area” and the “time reduction number” of “when not passing through the probabilistic operation area” are “Special Figure 1” and “Special Figure 1 and Special Figure 2”. It is divided into the column of "Total (including special 2 alone)". Furthermore, in the columns of "Special Figure 1" and "Total of Special Figure 1 and Special Figure 2 (including Special Figure 2 alone)", "Special Figure Low Probability / General Figure Low Probability" and "Special Figure High Probability", respectively.・ There are columns for "Low probability of normal figure", "Low probability of special figure / High probability of normal figure", and "High probability of special figure / High probability of normal figure", and the game when the big hit symbol is stopped and displayed. It is shown that the number of time reductions (the number of electric support) set after the big hit game may differ depending on the state.

In FIG. 28 (the same applies to FIG. 29), the above-mentioned “special figure 1” means the number of time reductions in the special figure 1 alone. In addition, the above-mentioned "total of special figure 1 and special figure 2 (including special figure 2 alone)" means the total number of time reductions of special figure 1 and special figure 2 and the number of time reductions of special figure 2 alone. ing.

In this embodiment, although the relationship between the subject and the non-subject is defined between the special figure 1 and the special figure 2, the priority of the game is not set. Therefore, even if the special figure 1 is the main component in the short period of time and the special figure 1 is changing, if there is a start prize of the special figure 2, the change of the special figure 2 (the change of the special figure 2). ) Is also performed. In addition, even during the short period of time when the special figure 2 is the main body and the change of the special figure 2, if there is a start prize of the special figure 1, the change of the special figure 1 (the change of the special figure 1). Is also done. For this reason, not only the number of time reductions (electric support end condition) for special figure 1 alone, but also the number of time reductions (electric support end condition) for "total of special figure 1 and special figure 2 (including special figure 2 alone)". It has been decided. That is, the pachinko gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment confirms whether any of the two end conditions is satisfied as the end condition of the time saving (electric support), and shifts the game state when any one of the conditions is satisfied. The process of causing (terminating the electric support state) is performed, and as one condition, the count value obtained by counting the number of fluctuations of the special figure 1 in the specific gaming state has reached the "time reduction number of times of the special figure 1 alone". Another condition is whether or not the total value of the counts of the number of fluctuations of the special figures 1 and 2 in the specific gaming state is "the total of the special figures 1 and 2 (including the special figure 2 alone). ) Has been reached.

Further, the above-mentioned "special symbol low probability / normal symbol low probability" means that the jackpot probability related to the special symbol is low probability and the hit probability related to the normal symbol is also low probability. Such a game state is a normal game state or a big hit game in which neither the probability change of the special figure nor the electric support is performed. For this reason, the game state of "special figure low probability / normal figure low probability" corresponds to the above-mentioned normal game state or big hit game.

Further, "special symbol high probability / normal symbol low probability" means that the jackpot probability related to the special symbol is high probability and the hit probability related to the normal symbol is low probability. Such a gaming state corresponds to the above-mentioned second specific gaming state (a gaming state in which a small hit rush occurs).

Further, "special symbol low probability / normal symbol high probability" means that the jackpot probability related to the special symbol is low probability and the hit probability related to the normal symbol is high probability. Such a gaming state corresponds to the time saving state (third specific gaming state) described above.

In addition, "special symbol high probability / general symbol high probability" indicates that the jackpot probability related to the special symbol is high and the hit probability related to the normal symbol is also high. Such a gaming state corresponds to the above-mentioned first specific gaming state.

As described above, the symbol 1 (special figure number 0) shown in FIG. 28 (and FIG. 29) is an outlier symbol common to the special figures 1 and 2, and the special figure 1 (or special figure 2) If this symbol 1 is drawn by lottery, the lottery result will be out of order. Further, symbols 2 to 3 (special symbol numbers 1 to 2) are assigned to the jackpot symbols without time reduction (special diagram 1-4R time reduction no symbol 1) according to special diagram 1, and symbols 4 to 16 (special symbol number 3) are assigned. ~ 15) are assigned to the jackpot symbols with time saving (special figures 1_4R symbols with time saving 1 to 6) according to the special figure 1. As described above, as for the special figure 1, a symbol without a time reduction and a symbol with a time reduction are provided.

In addition, symbols 17 to 28 (special symbols 16 to 27) are assigned to jackpot symbols (special figures 2_4R time-saving symbols 1 to 6) according to special figure 2. Further, the symbols 29 to 32 (special symbol numbers 28 to 31) are assigned to the small hit symbols (special electric operation symbols) according to the special diagram 2. As described above, as for the special figure 2, the symbol without the time reduction is not provided, and the big hit symbol with the time reduction and the small hit symbol are provided.

Here, the "special figure 2_special electric operation symbol 1" of the symbols 29 to 31 (special symbol numbers 28 to 30) is a small hit in which the time required for the start demonstration of the small hit game is relatively short, and the symbol 32 "Special figure 2_special electric operation symbol 2" of (special figure number 31) is a small hit in which the time required for the start demonstration of the small hit game is relatively long.

The game state (third specific game state, fourth specific game state) of the time reduction (normal time reduction) shown in the above-mentioned game flow (FIG. 27) is the "V difficult symbol" shown in FIG. 28 (and FIG. 29). It corresponds to the specific game state that shifts after the big hit based on "Special Figure 1_4R Time Saving Symbol 6" of symbols 14 to 16 (special figure numbers 13 to 15). Then, as the jackpot symbol of special figure 1 (or special figure 2) in the normal game state, the first specific game, or the third specific game, the symbols 14 to 16 (special figure numbers 13 to 15) shown in FIGS. 28 (and 29) are shown. ), The second bonus of the first jackpot, the second bonus of the second jackpot, or the second bonus of the third jackpot, which is the second bonus of the first jackpot, is the normal time-saving game state (third specific). It shifts to the game state or the fourth specific game state).

As described above, the specific game state (third specific game state or fourth specific game state) during the normal time reduction shifts after the big hit game when a big hit without V prize (V prize non-easy big hit) is won. It is a specific game state to be played. For this reason, regarding the specific gaming state (third specific gaming state or fourth specific gaming state) during the normal time reduction, the chart of FIG. 29 relating to the "time reduction number of times when the probability variation operating area has not passed" corresponds to the gaming state. Will be.

For example, if a big hit occurs in the main game (game of special figure 1) in the normal game state and the big hit symbol is "special figure 1-4R time saving symbol 6" which is a V difficult symbol, the time saving after the big hit game If there is no V prize during the big hit in a normal game, the end conditions related to are the line of "Special Figure 1_4R Time Saving Symbol 6" in FIG. 29 and the "Special Figure 1" "Special Figure Low Probability. "Special figure probability change: 0 times, normal figure probability change: 100 times" or "total of special figure 1 and special figure 2 (including special figure 2 alone)" described at the position where it intersects with the column of "normal figure low probability" There are two "special figure probability change: 0 times, normal figure probability change: 100 times" described at the position where it intersects with the column of "special figure low probability / normal figure low probability". Then, the end condition for the time reduction of the special figure is 100 times with the total number of fluctuations of the special figure 1 or the special figure 2 or the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 (the same as the number of times of the normal figure probability change in FIG. 29). The special map will change, and the end condition for the probability change of the normal map will also be 100 special map changes.

Here, the thick frame Q in FIG. 29 is a big hit symbol whose end condition in the thick frame Q is a big hit in which it is difficult to win a V prize as designed (Special Figure 1-4R Time Saving Symbol 6) (in FIG. 10, "Normal". It is set when the V prize is not won in the big hit game based on (shown as big hit), and indicates that it is about the specific game that is the main body when the probability variation operation area is not passed as designed. ing. Then, the area other than the thick frame Q shown in FIG. 29 is a special figure probability change given when a normal game is not executed and a V prize is not won in a big hit symbol other than "special figure 1-4R time saving symbol 6". The number of times and the number of probable changes in the normal figure (the number of times of electric support) are shown, and the state of the specific game shown in FIG. 29 is controlled to shift to "normal time reduction".

For normal time reduction (when the probability variation operation area has not passed), the end condition for "Special Figure 1-4R Time Reduction No Symbol" is the total of "Special Figure 1" and "Special Figure 1 and Special Figure 2 (including Special Figure 2 alone)". "Special figure low probability / normal figure low probability", "special figure high probability / normal figure low probability", "special figure low probability / normal figure high probability", "special figure high probability / normal figure high probability" Also, "Special figure probability change: 0 times, Normal figure probability change: 100 times".

Further, the termination conditions related to "Special Figure 1_4R Time-saving Symbol 1" to "Special Figure 1_4R Time-saving Design 5" and "Special Figure 2_4R Time-saving Design 1" to "Special Figure 2_4R Time-saving Design 6" are " For both "Special Figure 1" and "Total of Special Figure 1 and Special Figure 2 (including Special Figure 2 alone)", "Special Figure Probability Change: 0 times, General Figure Probability Change: 100 times".

On the other hand, at the time of winning V (when passing through the probability variation operation region) shown in FIG. 28, the end conditions related to "special figure 1-4R time saving no symbol" are "special figure 1" and "special figure 1 and special figure". "Total of 2 (including special 2 alone)", "Low probability of special figure / low probability of normal figure", "High probability of special figure / low probability of normal figure", "Low probability of special figure / high probability of normal figure", " Regarding "special figure high probability / normal figure high probability", it is also "special figure probability change: 10000 times, normal figure probability change: 0 times".

Furthermore, the end conditions of "Special Figure 1_4R Time-Reduced Symbol 1" to "Special Figure 1-4R Time-Reduced Symbol 5" are "Special Figure Probability Change" in "Special Figure 1" and "Special Figure Low Probability / General Figure Low Probability", respectively. : 10000 times / normal figure probability change: 20 times "," special figure probability change: 10000 times / normal figure probability change: 30 times "" special figure probability change: 10000 times / normal figure probability change: 40 times "," special figure probability change: 10000 times -Public figure probability change: 50 times "," Special figure probability change: 10000 times, P-figure probability change: 60 times ".

Similarly, regarding the end conditions of "Special Figure 1_4R Time Saving Symbol 1" to "Special Figure 1-4R Time Saving Symbol 5", in "Special Figure 1" "Special Figure High Probability / General Figure Low Probability", "Special Figure 1_4R Time Saving Symbol 5" Figure probability change: 10000 times, normal figure probability change: 0 times ". Although not shown in the game flow of FIG. 27, this set value is set in the second specific game, such as the remaining hold of the special figure 1 immediately after the second specific game, or the special figure 1 generated during the second specific game. In the case of a big hit with a V winning easy symbol on hold, it means that the game is controlled so as to return to the second specific game without going through the first specific game.

Furthermore, regarding the end conditions of "Special Figure 1_4R Time Saving Symbol 1" to "Special Figure 1-4R Time Saving Symbol 5", "Special Figure 1" "Special Figure Low Probability / General Figure High Probability" and "Special Figure High Probability"・ For "High probability of normal figure", "Probability of special figure: 10000 times, Probability of normal figure: 20 times", "Probability of special figure: 10000 times, Probability of normal figure: 30 times", "Probability of special figure: 10000 times, Normal figure" Probability change: 40 times, "Special figure probability change: 10000 times, Normal figure probability change: 50 times", "Special figure probability change: 10000 times, Normal figure probability change: 60 times".

Furthermore, the end condition relating to "total of special figure 1 and special figure 2 (including special figure 2 alone)" is "special figure 1_4R time saving symbol 1" to "special figure 1-4R time saving symbol 5". In "low probability / low probability of normal figure", "special figure probability change: 10000 times, normal figure probability change: 100 times" is set.

Similarly, regarding the end conditions of "Special Figure 1_4R Time Saving Symbol 1" to "Special Figure 1_4R Time Saving Symbol 5", "Special Figure 1 and Special Figure 2 Total (including Special Figure 2 alone)" "Special Figure High Probability"・ In the case of "low probability of normal figure", "special figure probability change: 10000 times, normal figure probability change: 0 times".

Furthermore, regarding the end conditions of "Special Figure 1_4R Time Saving Symbol 1" to "Special Figure 1-4R Time Saving Symbol 5", "Special Figure 1_4R Time Saving Symbol 5" "Special Figure 1 and Special Figure 2 Total (including Special Figure 2 alone)" "Special Figure Low Probability" -In both "high probability of special figure" and "high probability of special figure / high probability of normal figure", "special figure probability change: 10000 times, normal figure probability change: 100 times".

Further, the "special figure 1-4R time-saving symbol 6" is not the main body at the time of V winning (when passing through the probability variation operation region) as described above, but the end condition of this "special figure 1-4R time-saving symbol 6" is ". "Special figure 1" and "Total of special figure 1 and special figure 2 (including special figure 2 alone)" "Special figure low probability / general figure low probability", "Special figure high probability / general figure low probability", "Special figure low probability" The "special figure low probability / normal figure high probability" and "special figure high probability / normal figure high probability" are also "special figure probability change: 10,000 times, normal figure probability change: 10,000 times". That is, in the pachinko gaming machine 10 of this embodiment, when a big hit is made with a V difficult symbol, even if a normal game is not performed and an unintended V prize is generated, 10,000 times until the transition to the second specific game occurs. It is necessary to play a game in which the result of the winning / failing lottery is out of order, and if the game shifts to the first specific game without going through a substantially normal game, it is set to be impossible to shift to the second specific game. It means that you are.

In addition, regarding the end conditions of "Special Figure 2_4R Time Saving Symbol 1" to "Special Figure 2_4R Time Saving Symbol 6", in "Special Figure 1", "Special Figure Low Probability / General Figure Low Probability", respectively, "Special Figure Probability change: 10000 times, normal figure probability change: 10000 times ".

Furthermore, regarding the end conditions of "Special Figure 2_4R Time Saving Symbol 1" to "Special Figure 2_4R Time Saving Symbol 6", "Special Figure 1" "Special Figure High Probability / General Figure Low Probability" and "Special Figure 2_4R Time Saving Symbol 6"・ For "High probability of normal figure" and "High probability of special figure / High probability of normal figure", "Probability of special figure: 10000 times / Probability of normal figure: 20 times" and "Probability of special figure: 10000 times / Probability of normal figure: 30", respectively. "Times", "Special figure probability change: 10000 times, Normal figure probability change: 40 times", "Special figure probability change: 10000 times, Normal figure probability change: 50 times", "Special figure probability change: 10000 times, Normal figure probability change: 60 times" It has become.

Furthermore, regarding the end conditions of "Special Figure 2_4R Time Saving Symbol 1" to "Special Figure 2_4R Time Saving Symbol 6", "Special Figure 1 and Special Figure 2 Total (including Special Figure 2 alone)" "Special Figure Low Probability"・ In the "low probability of normal figure", "special figure probability change: 10000 times, normal figure probability change: 10000 times", respectively.

Similarly, regarding the end conditions of "Special Figure 2_4R Time Saving Symbol 1" to "Special Figure 2_4R Time Saving Symbol 6", "Special Figure 1 and Special Figure 2 Total (including Special Figure 2 alone)" "Special Figure High Probability"・ For "Low probability of special figure", "Low probability of special figure / High probability of normal figure", and "High probability of special figure / High probability of normal figure", "Special figure probability change: 10000 times, Special figure probability change: 100 times", respectively. ing.

Here, the narrow frame P in FIG. 28 is a big hit (“normal” big hit in FIG. 10) assuming that the V prize is not won during the big hit game, and the end condition in the thin frame P is the main body in the original design. It shows that it is about a game that does not become.

"Special figure low probability / normal figure low probability", "special figure high probability / normal figure low probability", "special figure low probability / normal figure high probability", "special figure high probability / normal figure high probability" Of these, the one corresponding to the normal gaming state is "special figure low probability / normal figure low probability". Then, when a big hit in which the number of times of "high probability of normal figure" (corresponding to "probability change of normal figure" shown in the lower part of FIGS. 28 and 29) is other than 0 times, the game state and big hit at the time of winning are won. Depending on whether or not there is a V prize in the game, a predetermined number of electric support (probability change of the normal figure, high probability of the normal figure) is given in the specific game after the big hit game.

For example, as shown in FIG. 28, in the normal game state (when the special figure is low probability and the normal figure is low probability), the big hit of "special figure 1-4R time saving symbol 1" is won, and V prize is generated during the big hit game. In that case, in the first specific game that shifts after the big hit game, 20 times of electric support will be given as shown in "Public map probability change" in the column that intersects with "Special figure low probability / Fudo figure low probability". To.

Under the same conditions, if you win any of "Special Figure 1-4R Time Saving Symbol 2" to "Special Figure 1-4R Time Saving Symbol 5" and a V prize occurs during the big hit game, 30 times and 40 times, respectively. , 50 times, or 60 times, the corresponding number of times of electric support is given. Then, these 20 to 60 electric support times are the number of transitions, which is a condition for shifting from the first specific game that shifts after the big hit to the second specific game described above. In addition, as shown in FIG. 28, in these hits, 100 times of normal figure probability change is set as the electric support end condition of "total of special figure 1 and special figure 2 (including special figure 2 alone)". Since the fluctuation display in FIG. 2 rarely occurs except for some situations during a normal game, the electric support end condition based on the number of fluctuations in the special figure 1 is designed as a basic transition condition to the second specific game. There is.

Here, among the various specific games as described above, the second specific game, which is a small hit rush, and the fourth big hit after that, are in a series of continuous production states as a period of the compound bonus ( It is possible to produce the production (contents of production).

That is, in the gaming state from the small hit rush to the fourth big hit, it is conceivable to perform a continuous production so as to make the transition of the gaming state from the small hit rush to the fourth big hit as inconspicuous as possible. .. Then, regarding the production during the period from this small hit rush to the 4th big hit, the 4th big hit has already occurred to the player from the time of the small hit rush, and the actual big hit game (4th big hit big hit game). It is conceivable to carry out in a manner that can give the impression that it continues for a longer period of time.

By doing so, the player gives the impression that the second specific game (small hit rush) is a big hit and a big hit (fourth big hit) occurs at the stage of shifting to the second specific game (small hit rush). Can be given to. Further, the game recognizes that a big hit occurs in the first specific game before the second specific game, and the big hit game is executed for a longer period of time than the actual big hit (fourth big hit) big hit game. It becomes possible to give to a person. Then, by combining such an effect and the gaming state, the player's feeling of jealousy can be increased.

In addition, the game state from the start of the second specific game (small hit rush) to the end of the big hit game of the fourth big hit is regarded as a big hit extended to include the second specific game, and has been explained so far. It is possible to call it a "composite bonus" or the like. Alternatively, it can also be called a "composite jackpot" or the like. Further, it can be regarded as a specific game extended to include a big hit game of the fourth big hit, and can be referred to as, for example, a "composite specific game".

Further, the opening mode of the big winning opening 90 in the second specific game (small hit rush) and the opening mode of the big winning opening 90 in the big hit game of the fourth big hit are the same in appearance from the player. It is possible to do. By doing so, the continuity between the second specific game and the fourth big hit can be secured, and it can also be secured by the big winning opening 90, which is longer than the actual big hit (fourth big hit) big hit game for the player. It is possible to give the recognition that the jackpot game is being executed over a period of time.

Further, the opening mode of the big winning opening 90 is not limited to exactly the same mode for the second specific game (small hit rush) and the big hit game for the fourth big hit, and can be said to be substantially the same. It is conceivable that some of them may be common. For example, the opening time is exactly the same, but the closing time between opening and opening may be different by several seconds (1 second, etc.), or the opening time may be different by several seconds (1 second, etc.). It can be illustrated as such.

Further, the opening mode of the grand prize opening 90 is referred to as an "opening mode", the closing mode between opening and opening is referred to as a "closing mode", and the combination mode of opening and closing is referred to as an "opening / closing mode". It is possible to distinguish by calling.

Further, the game characteristics related to the first specific game and the second specific game described so far can be described as follows. For example, the special figure that is the main body of the fluctuation changes from special figure 1 to special figure 2 during the probability change (during the first specific game) and during the small hit rush (during the second specific game) when both are right-handed. It can be said that it is a game to play.

In addition, since the distribution (presence or absence of V prize) at the time of the big hit in Special Figure 2 is performed in a mode of theoretically shifting to 100% probability variation by the control that facilitates the V prize, the small hit rush of the second specific game After that, it can be said that the probability change is guaranteed because the special figure 2 becomes the main game.

In addition, in the game state in which the special figure 2 is the main body, there is a ball entering the 1-1 starting winning opening 62A and the 1-2 starting winning opening 62B, and the reservation related to the special drawing 1 remains. When the big hit according to the special figure 1 occurs, this big hit is not a big hit by the main game. A hit in such a non-subjective game (non-subjective game) can be referred to as an "accident hit" or the like. Similarly, it can be said that the big hit (and small hit) when the ball enters the second start winning opening 63 in the game state in which the special figure 1 is the main game is also an “accident hit”.

It is possible to deal with such accidents as follows. For example, for the probability variation hit (V easy hit) of the special figure 1 during the small hit rush mainly in the special figure 2 (during the high probability of the special figure and the low probability of the normal figure), the number of time reductions associated with the big hit symbol (The number of transitions that is the condition for shortening the time) should be set to 0. By doing so, it is possible to play a game in which the influence of an accident is minimized.

For example, during the small hit rush, the game ball that did not enter the large winning opening 90 heads for the second starting winning opening 63, and the frequency of entering the second starting winning opening 63 is considerably high. Conceivable. Therefore, it can be said that hold is likely to occur during the small hit rush. Then, when the fluctuation that causes the big hit of the special figure 1 (for example, the first big hit due to the accident hit) starts during the small hit rush, the fluctuation pattern table according to the special figure 1 during the second specific game is used. , The fluctuation time of the big hit fluctuation of the special figure 1 is set to be long, and the fluctuation and the small hit game related to the special figure 2 can be executed a plurality of times without immediately shifting to the first specific game. Will be done.

However, for example, for the probabilistic hit of Special Figure 1, by taking measures such as setting the number of time reductions (time reduction end condition) to 0 as described above, the small hit rush (second specification) continues after the hold is exhausted. You can return to the game). Then, after the big hit game in which the game ball passes (V passage) in the V region, the first specific game is not performed even once (without passing through the first specific game), and the second specific game (small hit) is performed. It can be directly transferred (returned) to (rush).

Such measures are not limited to the above-mentioned second specific game (during the small hit rush), but for example, the special figure during the normal time saving (during the third specific game or the fourth specific game) in which the special figure 1 is the main body. The relationship between the jackpot symbol of 2 and the end condition of the specific game can be similarly applied. For example, the jackpot symbol of the special figure 2 during the normal time reduction (during the third specific game or the fourth specific game) is set so that the number of transitions is 0 times. By doing so, it is possible to provide a game property such that the accident hit is shifted to the second specific game without going through the first specific game.

In addition, the condition for ending the electric support during the probability change (during the first specific game) is that, as a standard, the number of fluctuations of the special figure 1 is determined by the jackpot symbol (corresponding to the jackpot symbol) N times (here). It is to reach the number of fluctuations (0 to 60 times) (which is set to be 45 times on average). However, in addition to these fluctuation times, a condition for ending a specific game is also provided for 100 fluctuations. Then, the end condition of 100 fluctuations can be counted by the special figure 2 alone or the total of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2.

Here, the number of times "100 times" counted in the special figure 2 alone and the total of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 is premised on the execution of a non-subject game, and cannot usually be reached. It can be said that it is the number of times. That is, as a situation in which a starting prize related to a special figure that is not the main body occurs, for example, during the electric support period by the 1-2 starting winning opening 62B, the game ball moves to the 1-2 starting winning opening 62B. The case where the ball is not entered, passes through the area where the 1-2 start winning opening 62B is provided, and accidentally enters the second starting winning opening 63 can be mentioned.

Further, in the situation where the game shown in Special Figure 2 is the main game, for example, the 1-2 start winning opening 62B opens for an extremely short time (0.3 seconds, etc.), and accidentally during this short opening. An example can also be given when there is a ball entering. Further, for example, when the player does not properly adjust the firing intensity or cannot immediately respond to the change in the game state, a start prize with a special figure that is not the main body occurs. Can be considered.

And, such a situation is a rare situation, and it is unlikely that it occurs 100 times in a time saving period of 100 times, for example. Therefore, by setting the end condition of the specific game state to 100 times, it is possible to prevent the specific game from ending only by a non-standard (irregular) start winning prize.

Further, in the pachinko gaming machine 10, when the jackpot (fourth jackpot) generated during the second specific game of the combined bonus returns to the first specific game after the jackpot game, the probability is changing (during the first specific game). ), The condition for ending the electric support is, as a standard, the number of fluctuations shown in Special Figure 1, so that the fluctuations due to the hold that occurred during the second specific game above are not counted in the number of transitions. Become. That is, in the first specific game performed after the compound bonus (after the special figure 2 big hit), it is considered that the remaining hold (remaining hold) related to the special figure 2 that occurred at the time of the small hit rush is initially consumed.

However, the fluctuation due to this remaining hold is not counted in the number of fluctuations until the next small hit rush is reached, but even if the remaining hold is hit, the big hit game according to Special Figure 2 is V easy. Since it is composed only of big hits based on the symbol, it usually re-enters the gaming state of the first specific game. Therefore, the player does not suffer a disadvantage (or lose a profit) due to the remaining hold.

Further, in the pachinko gaming machine 10, the period of the first specific game (probability change) for shifting to the second specific game (small hit rush) may change depending on the type of the winning jackpot symbol. Then, it can be said that the period until the subject of the game becomes the special figure 2 in which the jackpot symbol is only the V-easy symbol differs depending on the type of the winning jackpot symbol. Therefore, in the pachinko gaming machine 10, it can be said that the probability variation continuation rate (the degree of expectation of continuous probability variation from the first specific game to the second specific game) varies depending on the number of fluctuations associated with the jackpot symbol.

Here, even if the winning jackpot is a jackpot that is easy to win V (easy to V), if you happen to not win a V prize during the jackpot game, low probability and high base (low probability / high probability of normal figure) It is possible to shift to a specific gaming state (here, a normal time saving state of 100 times with electric support), and not to shift to a gaming state that is advantageous to the player, such as shifting when a V prize is won as standard. is there.

In addition, the following can be considered as a modification related to the game property as described above. First, as a first modification here, for example, it is not limited to the electric support number variation type (transition number variation type) in which the number of electric support (transition number) is changed based on the jackpot symbol, and for example, any big hit symbol ( Even in the case of the V easy symbol), it may be a fixed type (fixed number of electric support times, fixed number of transitions type) in which only 45 times are set as the number of electric support times (probability change number of normal figure). By doing so, even if the player can win the consecutive villa, for example, he wins only the jackpot with 60 transitions and devotes a lot of time to the first specific game. Can be prevented.

Further, the first modification is not limited to the above, and even if the number of transitions is fixed, most (for example, about 90%) is 45 times, and the remaining part (for example, about 10%). Only the jackpot may be a premium rare jackpot such as 0 times or 10 times of electric support.

In such a fixed type (all or most of them have a fixed number of times), it can be said that the goal becomes clear to the player. In other words, in the case of the variable type, if only the big hits with a relatively large number of transitions are won, it is difficult to shift to the second specific game (small hit rush), and the player is in the second specific game (small). It becomes difficult to enjoy the hobby (interestingness) of (hit rush). However, by making it a fixed type, it is possible to shift to the second specific game (small hit rush) without much bias, and the player can stably enjoy the taste of the second specific game (small hit rush). .. However, it can be said that by making it a fixed type, the game quality and the production become monotonous, and the number of balls to be output obtained by the first specific game is stable (less rough).

Subsequently, as a second modification here, by configuring the special figure 1 so that the V easy big hit can be obtained at a rate of 100% and the special figure 2 big hit can be a V non-easy big hit, after the big hit game. In the first specific game of, before the end condition is satisfied (the number of transitions to the second specific game is reached) a predetermined number of times (for example, about 10 times before), the probability variation loop guaranteed state (always shifts to the second specific game). It is also possible to think of a game-like property that makes it a state of being played. Furthermore, in this gameplay, if the second specific game (small hit rush) is reached after the electric support runs out (after the number of transitions is reached), there is a possibility of winning a big hit that normally falls (V difficult big hit, which is a non-probable variable big hit). It is conceivable to have.
<Matters that can be examined in more detail based on the basic game>

In the above, the game characteristics and effects of the pachinko gaming machine 10 have been described with some modifications, but individual gaming states can also be examined in more detail. Then, as a result of detailed examination, the pachinko gaming machine 10 can be as follows. Then, it is considered that a configuration as described below can be adopted for a series of game states and individual game states.
<< About the judgment time related to the end of the specific game state >>

First, when considering a series of games that start from the normal game state, the control of the transition (transition) of the game state determines whether or not the end conditions of the specific game such as probability change and electric support are satisfied (end). The success or failure of the condition is determined), but the determination of whether or not such an end condition is satisfied shall be made at the start of the fluctuation.

That is, for example, for example, a specific game (first specific game) in which electric support is given 20 times, whether or not the period of the specific game has been completed by the CPU 501 of the main board 102 or the CPU 521 of the sub-main board 301. The determination is made at the start of the 20th variation, which is the final variation. Then, during the 20th fluctuation, the period of the specific game (here, the first specific game) has ended due to control.

By doing so, in the pachinko gaming machine 10 in which the game of the special figure 1 and the game of the special figure 2 are not prioritized and can be advanced in parallel, for example, it is determined that the specific game is ended. Even if the change of the special figure 2 (or the special figure 1) is started during the change of the special figure 1 (or the special figure 2), since the specific game has already been completed, the special figure 2 (or the special figure 1) It is possible to prevent the game from being played under the same game conditions (big hit probability, time reduction, electric support, etc.) as during the specific game. It should be noted that such a control mode can be referred to as, for example, "game state transition control at the start of fluctuation".
<< About open control of V area >>

Next, opening / closing control of the V winning opening (V area, specific area) will be described. The opening control of the V winning opening (V area, specific area) can be performed by a method (combination control method) that combines the detection of the game ball and the symbol control. For example, in the first round (1st round) of the big hit game, when the big winning opening 90 is opened, the shielding member (not shown) blocking the V region takes a very short time (for example, 0.3 seconds). Open and close immediately. This short-time opening can be performed in the same manner regardless of whether the type of the jackpot symbol is a V-easy symbol or a V-non-easy symbol. It should be noted that the V winning is not generated except by chance when the shielding member that closes the V region is opened very slightly.

Here, when the type of the jackpot symbol is a V-easy symbol, the first first game ball subsequently enters the grand prize opening 90 and is detected (counted) by the above-mentioned jackpot count detection device 78A. When it is detected), the shielding member in the V region is opened again. The opening of the V region at this time is continued for a relatively long time. Then, the opening at this time is performed until the end of the round (1R, which is the start round), or until (immediately after) the opening of the large winning opening 90 in the round (1R) is completed. Is possible.

It should be noted that the start of the continuous opening of the V region is not limited to the detection of the first ball entering in the start round of the jackpot game, for example, the detection of the second or third count in the start round. It is possible to do so when it is done.

Further, as an opening mode of the large winning opening 90 during the first round, which is the first round, for example, an aspect in which the open state of the large winning opening 90 is continued from the start to the end of the round (a mode in which only one opening is performed in one round). ), And the mode in which the large winning opening 90 is intermittently opened a plurality of times in one round can be exemplified. Then, as an intermittent opening mode in the large winning opening 90 at this time, for example, opening for about 1.2 seconds is repeated via a predetermined interval time (for example, 1 second) as in the case of a small hit. You can think of things.

Further, as a specific embodiment related to symbol control, for example, when it is determined that the jackpot symbol is a V-easy symbol on the main board 102, a long-time open permission flag (long) related to the shielding member in the V region is used. (Opening permission flag) is set, and after opening for a short time, after detecting the entry of a predetermined count (for example, the 1st count), the V area is shielded so as to be long open on condition that the permission flag is established. It is conceivable to control the members.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the jackpot symbol is a V non-easy symbol (V difficult symbol), the permission flag is set even if a predetermined count (for example, the first count) is detected after opening for a short time. Since it is not established, it can be considered that the control for long opening is not performed. Here, the V non-easy symbol corresponds to the "special figure 1-4R time-saving symbol 6" of the symbols 14 to 16 (special figure numbers 13 to 15) described with reference to FIGS. 28 and 29.

By adopting a method (combination control method) that combines the detection of the game ball and the symbol control as described above, the possibility of entering the V region can be reduced to zero when the V non-easy symbol is won. It is possible to prevent the occurrence of V-balls while securing a small amount. Further, it is possible to standardize the control process at the start of the start round between the case where the V easy symbol is won and the case where the V non-easy symbol is won.
<< About the normal game state (special figure low probability state, normal figure low probability state) >>

Next, the normal gaming state will be examined. First, in the normal gaming state, when the player makes a right-handed hit, the ball can enter the special drawing 2 starting port (second starting winning opening 63). Therefore, the fluctuation patterns according to the special figure 2 are the fluctuation patterns of ultra-long fluctuations (for example, 3 minutes), which are fluctuations for an extremely long time. By doing so, even if there is a change in the special figure related to the game that is not the main subject, the time required for one change can be lengthened, and the number of changes per predetermined time can be suppressed to a small value. In addition, a part of the fluctuation patterns according to the special figure 2 may be a fluctuation pattern of a long fluctuation having a fluctuation time (for example, about 1 minute) slightly shorter than the ultra-long fluctuation (for example, 3 minutes), or a long fluctuation pattern. It may be configured so that it can be executed by combining fluctuations and ultra-long fluctuations.

By doing so, it is possible to reduce the efficiency of progress related to the non-subject game, and it is possible to prevent the number of balls from being increased due to the non-subject game. Here, it is possible to issue a warning (right-handed warning) when it is detected that the player is right-handed in a situation where the left-handed player is the main player in the game. Then, by giving a right-handed warning, it is conceivable that the player can be embarrassed and stop the non-subject right-handed. However, it is not always the case that there is no one who keeps right-handed without paying attention to such embarrassment, so it is effective to take measures other than right-handed warning so that it can be adopted together or alone. is there.

In order to give a right-handed warning, for example, a game ball detection device (sensor) is placed on the right shoulder portion (when viewed from the front) of the center decoration 64, or any of the game balls provided on the right unit 92. Using a detection device (sensor), it is possible to detect a right-handed hit in a non-subject game.

In addition, as a specific example of a right-handed warning, voice output such as "right-handed", "stop right-handed", "return the steering wheel", etc. is performed as a warning sound of sufficient volume. It is conceivable to display a left-pointing arrow and the character "left-handed" in the upper right corner or the upper left corner of the screen of the effect display device 60, or to combine these as appropriate.

Further, regarding the accident hit (big hit according to special figure 2) in the normal gaming state, it is a big hit that makes it easy to win a V (V easy). Therefore, as described above with reference to FIG. 28, the special figure high probability (ST). It is possible to set the end condition of the above to 10,000 times, the end condition of the high probability (electric support) to 10,000 times, and the like. In this way, by setting the number of games (number of fluctuations), which is normally not easy to reach (impossible), as the end condition, the probability change and the electric support state until the next hit are substantially continued, and it is small. It is possible to provide a game property that does not rush into the hit rush (second specific game). Then, it is possible to provide the player with a game property such that when a non-subject game is played, the small hit rush does not occur forever.

In addition, during the period in which the special figure 1 is the main body as in the normal gaming state, the above-mentioned first reserved number display unit 196 (and the second reserved number display unit 197) for the special figure 1 (the same applies to FIG. 2). It is conceivable not to perform the hold display for the purpose of clearly indicating the effect as in (see FIG. 30 (a)). However, the hold number display area 367 is displayed in any corner or the like on the screen of the effect display device 60, and the hold display in the sense of compensation (also referred to as guarantee or guarantee) (also referred to as compensation hold display). It is conceivable to do. Further, this can be applied even during the normal time reduction and the first specific game, which will be described later. Further, it can be applied to at least one game state during a normal game, a normal time reduction, and a first specific game.
<< About the normal time saving game state (special figure low probability state, normal figure high probability state) >>

Subsequently, the normal time-shortening gaming state (the third specific gaming state, the fourth specific gaming state) will be described. As described above, the normal game state is that after the big hit game, when the V prize non-easy big hit (big hit of 100 electric support times) of the special figure 1 is won in the normal game state or the first specific game state. It can be migrated. Then, in the normal game state of shortening the time, the game of the special figure 1 becomes the main game. Furthermore, since the first and second start winning openings 62B are open during the electric support, there is almost no (not at all) entry into the starting opening (second starting winning opening 63) of the special figure 2. ).

As described above, at the time of the first specific game, if the deviation related to the special figure 1 continues up to the above-mentioned number of transitions (45 times on average), the game shifts to the second specific game, but when the big hit of the special figure 1 occurs. The big hit is the third big hit, and even after the big hit game, it does not shift to the second specific game (small hit rush).

On the other hand, if the big hit of the special figure 1 occurs during the normal time reduction (during the third specific game state or the fourth specific game state), the game may shift to the second specific game (small hit rush). In other words, even if the same symbol is used for a big hit during the normal time reduction and during the first specific game, if the V is entered at the big hit during the normal time reduction (second big hit), the electric support will be a big hit of 0 times and the big hit. After the game, the player directly shifts to the small hit rush (second specific game).

Therefore, it can be said that the jackpot (pullback) of the special figure 1 during the normal time reduction has a greater benefit to the player than the jackpot of the special figure 1 during the first specific game. In addition, in terms of the benefits of such a big hit, it can be said that the normal time reduction is more advantageous than the probability change (during the first specific game).

Further, regarding the fluctuation of the special figure 2 in the normal time saving state, the fluctuation pattern (the fluctuation pattern for the special figure 2 low probability / high base) can be a long fluctuation (for example, about 1 minute). By doing so, even if there is a change in the special figure related to the non-subject game, the number of times can be suppressed to a small number. Then, during the normal time reduction when the player wants to play the game in Special Figure 1, the taste of the game in Special Figure 2 is suppressed, the taste of the game in Special Figure 1 is enhanced, and the player is made to play in Special Figure 1. Can be guided to the game of.

Here, it is also possible to make the end conditions of the third specific game and the fourth specific game, which are normally shortened, different from each other. For example, it is possible to leave the end condition of the third specific game as 100 times and set the end condition of the fourth specific game to 50 times, which is less than that of the third specific game (normal time reduction). Then, also in this case, as described above, it is possible to perform the effect associated with the same variation pattern in the third specific game and the fourth specific game.
<< About the first specific game (high probability of special figure / high probability of normal figure) >>

Subsequently, the time of the first specific game will be described. As described above, the game state of the first specific game shifts after the big hit game related to the V easy big hit (with electric support) of Special Figure 1 and Special Figure 2. Then, in the gaming state of the first specific game, the game of the special figure 1 becomes the main game related to the symbol variation. Further, since the first and second start winning openings 62B are opened during the electric support, there is almost no entry into the starting opening (second starting winning opening 63) of the special figure 2.

As described above, when the fluctuation of the special figure 1 reaches a predetermined number of transitions (N = 0 to 60 times, etc.) determined by the jackpot symbol, the second specific game (small), which is another specific game state, is reached. Hit rush). Here, even if there is a change in the special figure 2 during the first specific game, the electric support end condition based on the special figure 1 change number, which is the standard end condition (electric support end condition) of the first specific game. It should not be added (does not affect) to the counting information (see the column of "Total of special figure 1 and special figure 2 (including special figure 2 alone)" in FIG. 28).

Further, as described above, regarding the special figure, the jackpot probability in the high probability is about 1/66, and the electric support end condition (special 1) varies depending on the jackpot symbol, but 45 times on average (average transition). The number of times is 45 times). Then, the numerical value of the average number of transitions (45 in this case) is smaller than the numerical value of the denominator (66 in this case) related to the jackpot probability at the time of high probability. Therefore, as described above, it is possible to guide the player to a positive idea that there is a high possibility of shifting to the small hit rush.

Further, regarding the game state of the first specific game, as described above, the jackpot related to the main game in the first specific game state (the jackpot in Special Figure 1) is a battle-type jackpot, and the battle effect is produced. After that, it shifts to a big hit game. In the battle production, if the result of the battle is victory, the game shifts to the first specific game after the big hit game, and the first specific game continues with the big hit game (the big hit game related to the third big hit) in between. If the result of the battle is defeat, the game shifts to the normal time reduction, which is the fourth specific game, through the big hit game.

If the jackpot during the first specific game (third jackpot) is a jackpot with 0 electric support (no electric support), the game does not shift to the first specific game after the jackpot game (skipping the first specific game). , Shift to the second specific game. Then, the jackpot that enables such a transitional form can be regarded as a premium and highly rare jackpot, and a game property can be constructed.

Further, when the type of the third jackpot is a jackpot with electric support and the game shifts to the first specific game after the jackpot game, or as described above, the third jackpot without electric support directly shifts to the second specific game. In the case of doing so, it is possible to use the same moving image for directing (directing moving image). The "same production" here is a production that can give the player the impression that it is the same, such as a production that progresses on the same background on the image or a production in which the same character appears and develops a story. Can be exemplified.

Further, not limited to this, it is also possible to adopt different effects depending on the case of shifting to the first specific game after the third big hit and the case of directly shifting to the second specific game. The "different production" here is an example of a production that can give the player an impression that it is different, such as a production that progresses in a different background on the image or a production in which different characters appear to develop a story. can do. It is also possible to have both the case where the production is performed with the "same production" and the case where the production is performed with the "different production".

Further, as described above, when a predetermined character participates in the battle production developed due to the out-of-order fluctuation, the game shifts to the second specific game, resulting in a small hit rush. Here, when the battle effect is executed as an out-of-order variation effect when the number of transitions is reached, an effect such as a predetermined character participating in the battle is performed to shift to the second specific game from the next variation. It is possible to do something like this. Not limited to this, the battle effect develops after the fluctuation before reaching the number of transitions (for example, one time before the number of transitions), and when a predetermined character participates in the battle, the first from the start of the fluctuation of the number of transitions. 2 It is also possible to shift to the production state of a specific game. In the pachinko gaming machine 10 of this embodiment, since the method of determining the end of the game state (probability change, electric support) at the start of the change is adopted, one change before the electric support end condition (special 1) is satisfied. It is configured to develop into a battle production in the fluctuation of, and it is controlled to shift to the production state of the second specific game (small hit rush, compound bonus) immediately after the electric support end condition (special 1) is satisfied. It is configured.

Here, in order to perform a predetermined effect (for example, the above-mentioned battle effect) within a specific number of fluctuations (or a specific range of fluctuations), an electric support end condition (a condition for shifting to the second specific game) ( At the time when the special 1) is satisfied, it is preferable to perform the limited frequency pattern effect using the above-mentioned limited frequency table for the fluctuation according to the special figure 1. Then, the limited frequency table and the limited frequency pattern effect related to the first specific game can be as follows.

For example, the limited frequency table and the limited frequency pattern effect are individually set in the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 according to the jackpot symbol, and the number of fluctuations of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 is counted independently. By doing so, it is controlled to transition each limited frequency table and limited frequency pattern effect. Then, in this case, even if the fluctuation of the special figure 1 is repeated, it is not added to the number of fluctuations for switching the limited frequency table for the special figure 2, and the limited frequency table for the special figure 2 is not switched. To. The same applies to the opposite case, and even if the fluctuation of the special figure 2 is repeated, the limited frequency table for the special figure 1 is not switched.

By doing so, a pachinko gaming machine of the type in which the game of special figure 1 and the game of special figure 2 are executed in parallel without setting a priority between the game of special figure 1 and the game of special figure 2. In No. 10, even if the end condition (number of fluctuations) of the specific game is different between the special figure 1 and the special figure 2, it is possible to perform appropriate control without discomfort to the player.

Further, as a specific control mode, the following can be exemplified. For example, with respect to the limited frequency pattern effect of the special figure 1 and the limited frequency pattern effect of the special figure 2, the counting by the counter of the number of fluctuations is performed separately for the special figure 1 and the special figure 2. By doing so, the limited frequency table and the limited frequency pattern effect can be individually transitioned between the special figure 1 and the special figure 2.

Further, for example, regarding the limited frequency pattern production during the first specific game, two times (N-2 times and N-1 times) before the number of transitions (here, N times) which is a transition condition to the second specific game. A predetermined limited frequency table is used for the fluctuation according to the special figure 1 of (times), and the final fluctuation (Nth fluctuation) is switched to another limited frequency table. Such a control flow is a limited frequency table and a limited frequency, such as the remaining 2nd time (N-2nd time), the remaining 1st time (N-1st time), and the remaining 0th time (Nth time) with respect to the special figure 1. It can be said that the pattern effect is a transition.

Then, an effect indicating that a predetermined limited frequency table is used to shift to the second specific game at the change one time before the end of the electric support (N-1st time) is performed (“small hit rush rush effect”). , "Small hit rush final production", "blessing production", etc.) is executed. That is, the player can recognize the gaming state (here, the second specific gaming state) that shifts after the Nth variation in the variation one time before the final variation (Nth variation). As an example of the effect indicating the transition to the second specific game, a predetermined character is displayed in the battle effect as described above.

In this way, by notifying the transition to the second specific game in the special figure 1 change before the end of the first specific game 1 change, as described above, the determination of the end condition of the specific game is made when the change starts. In the pachinko gaming machine 10 as described in the above, it is possible to appropriately switch the effect accompanying the transition of the gaming state. Then, during the final change of the first specific game (during the Nth change), the gaming state of the pachinko gaming machine 10 is already the second specific game (small hit rush), and the main game (here, here). Even if the game of the special figure 2) is performed, it is possible to prevent a situation in which the effect indicating that the game state shifts cannot be executed until the effect related to the game of the special figure 1 is completed.

In addition, for example, the final fluctuation (Nth fluctuation) according to the special figure 1 may be the fluctuation (big hit fluctuation) in which the jackpot is won. Assuming such a case, it is conceivable that the jackpot fluctuation in Special Figure 1 has a fluctuation time of a certain length (such as a fluctuation pattern of a long long fluctuation). For example, when the jackpot change of Special Figure 1 is performed in the final change of the first specific game, the change is long enough to execute the battle effect in the same manner as the change during the first specific game (excluding the final change). It is configured so that the time and the like are determined (note that, as the production, the small hit rush production is displayed, and the battle production and the like are not displayed). By doing so, during the fluctuation period, the game of as many subjects as possible under the game conditions (high probability of special figure / low probability of normal figure) of the second specific game that has already shifted in terms of control ( Here, the game of Special Figure 2) can be performed. Then, during the fluctuation period of the final fluctuation of the special figure 1 related to the first specific game, a large number of special figures 2 which are the main components of the second specific game are executed, and the player can make as many balls as possible by small hits. Can be acquired by.

In addition, regarding the game of Special Figure 1 during the first specific game, when the game progresses with the remaining 2nd time (N-2nd time), the remaining 1st time (N-1th time), and the remaining 0th time (Nth time), it is limited. The frequency table is from the limited frequency table for the first specific game (special figure high probability, normal figure high probability medium limited frequency table, etc.) during the remaining 0th (Nth) change (or at the start of the change). , The limited frequency table for the second specific game (special figure high probability, normal figure low probability medium limited frequency table, etc.) will be switched.

Furthermore, as explained so far, even if the "small hit rush rush effect" is performed in the N-1th variation related to the first specific game, the final variation (Nth variation) of the first specific game is in progress. Is already in the period of the small hit rush (second specific game) in terms of control, during which the player can experience the period of the small hit rush. Therefore, it can be said that the "small hit rush rush effect" is not excessively far from the content of the game that the player can experience, and is a game control and effect control within an appropriate range.

It should be noted that, by performing the "small hit rush rush effect" in the N-1th variation, it is possible to optimize the switching of the effect due to the transition of the game state, but the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, the final variation related to the specific game. During (Nth variation), an effect indicating the transition to the second specific game may be performed.

In this case, since the electric support ends at the start of the final change (Nth change) of the first specific game, the blessing effect (small hit rush rush effect) is executed during the Nth change. In parallel with this, the small hit rush by the game of Special Figure 2 has started.

Here, in the production indicating the transition to the second specific game (blessing production, small hit rush rush production, etc.), since the production is designed with the second specific game as a compound bonus, the production symbol 190 is used. It is conceivable to display three-digit doublets (for example, "7" symbols are aligned). However, when the game of Special Figure 1 related to the first specific game progresses to the final fluctuation (Nth fluctuation), the N-1th fluctuation is not a jackpot fluctuation but a missed fluctuation (missing fluctuation). It is desirable to make it different from the display mode of the effect symbol 190 showing the big hit of the special figure 1.

Therefore, it is conceivable that the effect symbol 190 in the effect (blessing effect, small hit rush rush effect, etc.) indicating the transition to the second specific game is a special symbol different from the one for notifying the big hit. And, as this special symbol, for example, although it is a symbol in the form of the number "7", it is conceivable that the font is different from the effect symbol for notifying the big hit, or the decorative part is different. Be done.

Further, when notifying that the second specific game is to be performed by this special symbol, since the deviation fluctuation is actually executed, for example, the display in the above-mentioned reduced effect symbol display area 361 (mini symbol). Display) may be performed in an off-the-shelf manner. Further, as a mini symbol, it is also possible to provide a symbol having a special aspect corresponding to the special symbol.

Further, the special symbol is not limited to, for example, a three-digit alignment (doublet with the same symbol), and may be a form that is not generally recognized as a jackpot symbol or a combination (for example, a special symbol). It is not similar to the effect symbol 190 used for the variable display, and may be composed of a decoratively designed character string such as "○○ bonus"). In particular, in the pachinko gaming machine 10, as described above, when a big hit (third big hit) occurs in the first specific game, the battle effect is passed through, so the pachinko game machine 10 shifts to the second specific game. Whether or not it can be indicated to the player by a production element other than a special symbol. Therefore, even if the special symbol has a mode that is not generally recognized as a jackpot symbol or a combination, the notification of the gaming state to the player is not ambiguous.

Further, for example, in general, a big hit effect display by an effect symbol 190 such as a "7" symbol is indispensable, but an effect indicating that the second specific game will be started (blessing effect, small hit rush rush). In the production, etc.), it is also possible to intentionally not perform the big hit production display, which is usually considered to be indispensable.

Further, regarding the fluctuation of the special figure 2 which is not the main body during the first specific game, the fluctuation pattern can be set to an extremely short fluctuation (ultra-shortened fluctuation), and the fluctuation time can be set to, for example, about 0.6 seconds. .. That is, if the fluctuation pattern related to the special figure 2 during the first specific game is a long fluctuation (for example, one of 1 minute or more), the second specific game (small hit rush) is entered, and the first specific is still specified. A situation arises in which the fluctuation according to the special figure 2 during the game continues, and the second specific game (small hit rush) is not started until the fluctuation is completed.

However, as described above, regarding the fluctuation of the special figure 2 during the first specific game, by setting the fluctuation pattern to an extremely short fluctuation (ultra-shortened fluctuation), even if the holding of the special drawing 2 occurs, the holding is held. It is possible to immediately digest and shift to the second specific game. In addition, in the first specific game that becomes the fourth big hit in the second specific game and shifts when the combined bonus ends, before the fluctuation of the special figure 1 starts or until the special figure 1 change is performed several times. In the meantime, since the special figure 2 hold can be digested, an accident hit related to special figure 2 suddenly occurs in the middle or the latter half of the first specific game, and the counting information of the electric support end condition (special 1) Can be prevented from being reset.
<< About the 2nd specific game (high probability of special figure / low probability of normal figure) and 4th big hit (combined bonus) >>

Subsequently, the gaming state (combined bonus gaming state) from the time of the second specific game to the big hit game of the fourth big hit will be described. The second specific game (small hit rush), which is the previous game in the compound bonus, is the first specific game as described above, when the number of fluctuations reaches the number of transitions (20 to 60 times) without becoming a big hit. It is a game state to shift.

In addition to this, the second specific game will be transferred even if there is a V prize among the big hits related to Special Figure 1 or Special Figure 2 and a big hit of 0 times of electric support occurs. It has become. Then, the conditions for shifting to these second specific games can be referred to as, for example, "shift conditions".

The second specific game is a game state in which the special figure 2 is the main subject of fluctuation, and the small hit is won at an extremely high rate (about 1/1 excluding the big hit) during the second specific game. In addition, here, in order not to make the explanation complicated, the explanation will be made on the premise that only the big hit or the small hit is won and the loss is not won. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and it may be out of order. It is also possible to appropriately reduce (lower) the small hit frequency (small hit occurrence frequency) so that the small hit winning rate is, for example, 80% or less.

Here, by setting the probability of a small hit (number of places) high (50% to 100%, etc.) as described above, is the total of the probability of a big hit and the probability of a loss equal to the probability of a small hit? It becomes smaller. Further, by providing the function of changing the setting as described above, for a certain setting value (for example, N), "hit probability when the setting value is N or more" = (or ≈) "when the setting value is less than N". It is possible to establish the relationship of "probability of loss".

Then, in the winning / failing random number value range (0 to 65535), the ratio of the number of missing random numbers is smaller than, for example, the winning / failing lottery according to the special figure 1, and the losing is less likely to occur. For this reason, for example, it is considered that the difference in the tendency regarding the frequency of occurrence of loss between different set values is easily manifested and can be easily perceived by the player.

Therefore, for example, when the player uses the same pachinko gaming machine 10 before and after changing the set value, the tendency of occurrence of loss and the tendency of appearance of the effect related to the loss (including the look-ahead effect) may be different. Based on this, it becomes possible to provide new playability such as guessing the difference in settings (setting guessing). As a result, the pachinko gaming machine 10 can be further improved in taste.

However, when the set value is set relatively low, the random value that becomes a big hit is small and the deviation fluctuation is likely to occur. Therefore, in the case of the deviation, a special effect with a limited appearance frequency is positively performed. It is also considered that the low set value is easily perceived by the player. Therefore, it is conceivable to make it difficult (or not to select) a special one for the production of the deviation, and not to emphasize the deviation in the production. It may be better not to direct it.

Further, in the compound bonus, the fluctuation of the special figure 2, the small hit, and the big hit of the special figure 2 (the fourth big hit) during the second specific game can occur, but the fluctuation time of the special figure 2 The relationship between the small hit game associated with the small hit and the big hit game related to the fourth big hit can be defined as follows.

For example, the total of one fluctuation time (variation period) in Special Figure 2 and the required time (required period) for one small hit game is the opening / closing time of the big winning opening 90 in the fourth big hit big hit game. It is possible to determine the relationship between each of these times so that the total time (opening and closing period) is almost the same.

The above-mentioned "time required for one small hit game (required period)" can be set as one opening time of the large winning opening 90 in the small hit game. Further, the "opening / closing time (opening / closing period) of the big winning opening 90 in the big hit game of the 4th big hit" is one of the multiple opening / closing patterns of the big winning opening 90 in one round game of the 4th big hit. It can be the sum of the opening time and the closing time (the time required to open and close one cycle).

By doing so, in the compound bonus, the big winning opening 90 can be opened with a substantially constant rhythm (almost constant cycle) from the second specific game to the big hit game of the fourth big hit. Then, a common matter in time can be formed between the second specific game and the big hit game of the fourth big hit, and the continuity can be more strongly impressed on the player.

Further, by performing in combination with the production of continuous contents as described above, the continuity in the compound bonus can be further impressed on the player. Then, by doing so, it becomes easy to execute the small hit rush and the big hit together with the production of a series of bonus games having continuity in content.

In addition, when a big hit occurs during a small hit rush (when the second specific game becomes a big hit game of the fourth big hit), the game state is discriminated and judged in terms of control, but in terms of production and operation of the big winning opening 90. , It is possible to advance the game control so that the appearance does not change almost.

Here, the difference in production when a big hit occurs during the small hit rush, for example, in a series of continuous productions, during the big hit (here, the start round of the big hit game), the V prize as described above It is possible to add an effect display (right-handed effect) that encourages the user to do so.

By performing such an effect display that encourages V prizes, the player does not notice the transition of the gaming state in the compound bonus (transition from the second specific game to the fourth jackpot), for example, for a restroom break. It is possible to prevent people from leaving their seats temporarily. Further, by preventing the player from leaving the seat, the actual operating time of the pachinko gaming machine 10 can be improved. In addition, it is possible to prevent the game ball from not being fired (so-called stop hitting) during the big hit V round (here, the start round) by performing the effect display prompting the V prize.

From the viewpoint of making the player aware of the transition of the gaming state (transition from the second specific game to the fourth jackpot) in the compound bonus, the image object displayed in the second specific gaming state is the fourth jackpot. It is also conceivable that the display image on the effect display device 60 is changed by erasing (or making it transparent) with the occurrence of the above. However, it is considered that it is easier to get the player's attention by making a new appearance than deleting a predetermined image object.

The above-mentioned "effect display for encouraging V prizes" can be performed in a small size and inconspicuously, for example, in the upper right corner of the screen of the effect display device 60. Further, the present invention is not limited to this, and may be made conspicuous by taking measures such as making the display size relatively large or setting the display position to the center of the screen.

Further, as described above, in terms of control, the transition of the gaming state is performed at the start of the fluctuation. Therefore, at the start of the fluctuation of the last fluctuation (big hit fluctuation) in the second specific game, the special figure low probability and the normal figure low probability are temporarily set, but the big hit fluctuation time of the special figure 2 in the second specific game By setting the big hit start demo time to be about the same as the interval of the small hit game in the second specific game, it is possible to shift the game state to the big hit state with less discomfort.

In addition, when the game state shifts to the stage of the jackpot end demo related to the fourth jackpot, the end effect of the combined bonus of the second specific game and the fourth jackpot is performed, and in this end effect, the first specific is subsequently performed. It is possible to make the effect for the player to select the effect mode (effect stage) during the game. Such an effect can be referred to as a "mode selection effect" or a "stage selection effect".

Further, the fluctuation pattern of the special figure 1 which is not the main body of the fluctuation during the second specific game shall be a long fluctuation (for example, 1 minute or more), and for the special figure 2, the fluctuation pattern is sufficiently larger than that of the special figure 1. It is possible to have a short fluctuation time (for example, about several seconds). By doing so, during the fluctuation of the special figure 1, a relatively large number of fluctuations of the special figure 2 can be performed in parallel with the special figure 1. Then, even if there is a change in the special figure 1, the player can enjoy the small hit rush for a long time. If there is no particular problem, the fluctuation pattern of the special figure 1 during the second specific game may be an ultra-long fluctuation (for example, 3 minutes).

Further, the special figure 1 is not provided with a small hit, but is provided with a big hit of a V non-easy symbol (here, a big hit by "special figure 1_4R time-saving symbol 6"). Further, in the basic embodiment of the pachinko gaming machine 10, the opening time (opening period) of the large winning opening 90 at the time of the big hit in FIG. 1 is, for example, a mode in which the large winning opening 90 is continuously opened for 28 seconds, which is small. The opening time (opening period) of the large winning opening 90 of the small hit or the fourth big hit during the hit rush hour (during the second specific game) repeats, for example, about 1.2 seconds, which is the same as the big hit time of Special Figure 1. The opening pattern (which may be an opening / closing pattern) of the large winning opening 90 is significantly different from that during the small hit rush hour (composite bonus).

That is, from the above viewpoint, it can be said that the content and properties of the game are significantly different between the game according to the special figure 1 and the second specific game (small hit rush, compound bonus). Therefore, when the big hit of the special figure 1 is made during the second specific game, it is conceivable to perform the effect so that the player can clearly understand that the big hit is the special figure 1. For example, the center decoration 64 is provided with a shutter capable of hiding at least a part of the screen of the effect display device 60 as one of the movable effect members.

Then, when the jackpot fluctuation of the special figure 1 starts during the second specific game, a peculiar effect related to the execution of the third jackpot (for example, the second jackpot) immediately before the end of the jackpot fluctuation according to the special figure 1. The above-mentioned shutter is closed as the expectation of 90% or more). After that, if the first bonus (V easy bonus) of the third big hit is won, the effect of shifting to the second specific game without going through the first specific game after winning the V is executed. If the second bonus (V-winning non-easy bonus) is won, the effect of shifting to the fourth specific game (normal time saving game) is executed.
<< About special display in compound bonus >>

Next, the game state during the compound bonus (during the second specific game and the fourth big hit) will be described. During the second specific game and the fourth big hit, a pseudo big hit effect and an actual big hit effect are executed as a series of effects as a compound bonus state. For example, a pseudo winning counter effect or a pseudo round display effect. Etc. can be performed. Of these, the "pseudo-winning counter effect" is an effect to make the player appear to be in the big hit game even during the second specific game (during the small hit rush), which is not a big hit game. Then, in the "production of the pseudo winning counter", 10 counts (specified number of rounds) are displayed according to the ball entering the large winning opening 90.

Further, the "pseudo-round display effect" is set to be incremented by +1 when the above-mentioned pseudo-winning counter reaches 10 counts. At this time, the "pseudo-winning counter effect" is reset, and the effect is performed as if there was the first winning count of the virtual one round.

FIG. 30B shows only the main parts of an example of the “pseudo-winning counter effect” and the “pseudo-round display effect”. In the example of FIG. 25A, the pseudo winning counter display area 371 and the pseudo round display area 372 are both displayed on the screen of the effect display device 60. The pseudo-winning counter display area 371 and the pseudo-round display area 372 are displayed even during the second specific game (during the small hit rush), which is not during the big hit game.

During the small hit rush, if there is a ball entered when the large winning opening 90 is opened by the small hit game, a predetermined mode (here, a perfect circle) is used for each ball in the pseudo winning counter display area 371. ) Count display object 373 is added one by one and increased. Then, when the number of the count display objects 373 reaches a predetermined number (10 in this case), the number of rounds (here, “2R”) displayed in the pseudo round display area 372 is incremented (becomes “3R”). All the count display objects 373 in the pseudo winning counter display area 371 are deleted.

Further, each time the large winning opening 90 is opened by a subsequent small hit and there is a ball, the number of count display objects 373 increases by one in order from 0. Further, as described above, every time the count display object 373 reaches a predetermined number (10 in this case), the number of rounds displayed in the pseudo round display area 372 is incremented.

Here, in the example of FIG. 30B, the display of the cumulative number of acquired balls at that time is as "TOTAL: XX pieces" (here, 225 pieces) as a pseudo-acquired number of balls. It is carried out in various manners. Further, in the example of FIG. 30B, the effect symbol 190 is not visible (not displayed), and the effect is further closer to the effect during the big hit game.

Further, even while such a pseudo jackpot effect is being performed, it is possible to perform variable display of the guaranteed symbol in the reduced effect symbol display area 361. It should be noted that the guaranteed symbol is changing in a pseudo manner in a mode in which it is stopped or hidden at the time of the fourth big hit, or in a mode that is not exactly the same as the normally displayed guaranteed symbol but is similar. It is possible to produce an effect that makes it look as if it were.

Here, as a modification, an upper limit (for example, 16R) is set for the number of rounds, and when the number of rounds reaches the upper limit value, it is possible to prevent the number of pseudo rounds from increasing any more. Not limited to this, when the number of rounds reaches the upper limit, the number of rounds returns to 0, and when the number of count display objects 373 reaches a predetermined number (10 in this case), the number of rounds increases again to the upper limit. It is also possible to get it.

It is also possible to display only one of the pseudo-winning counter display area 371 and the pseudo-round display area 372, or to temporarily erase (or make them appear) according to the content of the effect. is there.

In the "production of the pseudo winning counter", even if the special figure 2 becomes a big hit (fourth big hit) when the pseudo winning counter is less than 10 counts (for example, under three situations), "pseudo". It is possible to take over without clearing the "production of the winning counter" and continue the "production of the pseudo winning counter" from the middle of 10 counts even during the big hit game.

In addition, during the compound bonus including the period of the pseudo big hit (the period during the small hit rush of the second specific game), regarding the special figure 2 (the same applies to the special figure 1), the above-mentioned second reserved number display unit 197 (And it is conceivable not to perform the hold display for the purpose of clarifying the effect as in the first hold number display unit 196) (see FIG. 30 (a)). However, the hold number display area 367 is displayed in any corner or the like on the screen of the effect display device 60, and the hold display in the sense of compensation (also referred to as guarantee or guarantee) (also referred to as compensation hold display). It is conceivable to do.

Further, at the time of the big hit V round (here, at the start round), as described above, it is conceivable to perform an effect display (right-handed effect) for prompting the V prize. This "effect display that encourages V winning" does not necessarily have to be conspicuous. However, in order to prevent the game ball from not being fired during the big hit V round (so-called stop hitting), at least at any timing during the V round (for example, the timing at the beginning of the start), a warning to urge the launch It is desirable to display for the purpose (warning display).

The so-called stoppage here includes both the one performed while the player is seated and the one performed when the player leaves the seat. In addition, the idea of displaying a warning like this emphasizes (priority) the prevention of stoppages rather than the continuity of the appearance of the production (the production is performed so that the player does not feel the seams as much as possible). It can be said that there is. However, it is also conceivable to lower the priority of prevention of stoppage and raise the priority of the appearance of the production so that the warning display is not performed.

Further, it is also possible to consider the following modified examples in relation to the above-mentioned "production of the pseudo winning counter" and "production of the pseudo round display". For example, regarding these effects, even though the large winning opening 90 is open, the "pseudo-winning counter effect" is reset by the 10th ball, and the number of displays in the "pseudo-round display effect". May be updated. If there is an inconsistency between the operation of the big winning opening 90 and the content of the production, the control at the time of a big hit in a general pachinko gaming machine is different, so that the player may feel uncomfortable.

In consideration of this, during the same opening (during one opening), the counter effect is not reset even if the effect reaches the 10th count, and the 11th ball is simulated. It is also possible to treat it as an over prize (a prize for more than 10). Here, the "over winning" can be described as, for example, a winning amount exceeding the specified number in one round at the time of a big hit.

Then, as the treatment of the pseudo over-winning, when the pseudo-over-winning occurs, the effect of suggesting or notifying the occurrence (for example, the sound output such as "I did it" or "Nice" in the effect display. It is possible to exemplify the display of characters such as "!" (Pseudo-over winning effect). Further, such an over-winning effect is continued until the sub-main board 301 receives a command for closing the big winning opening from the main board 102 (such as the command for closing the big hit medium-sized winning opening). It is determined whether or not a pseudo over-winning should be made based on the elapsed time from the start of opening the large winning opening 90 accompanying the execution of the big hit or the small hit, or the end when the winning opening closing command is received. Can be considered.

Further, in the pachinko gaming machine 10, although a compound bonus is executed for the production during the second specific game (during the small hit rush), the starting port (second starting winning opening 63) according to the special figure 2 is used. The large winning opening 90 will not be opened unless the special figure 2 is changed by entering the ball and a small hit is generated. Therefore, for example, even if the player wants to launch the game ball while grasping the optimum ball entry timing to the second start winning opening 63 and the large winning opening 90 as accurately as possible, the proper launch is performed. It may not be possible to grasp the timing.

In consideration of such a situation, the second starting winning opening 63 and the large winning opening 90 have built-in LEDs (lamps, not shown), and the lamps provided in the second starting winning opening 63. , The lamps provided in the large winning opening 90 are controlled to be alternately lit (alternately lit) during special figure fluctuations, small hits, and the like. By doing so, it is possible to notify the player of the position to be aimed at by a device other than the liquid crystal (effect display device 60). Then, it is possible to provide the player with something that can be used as an accurate guideline for firing.

At the same time, there is also a request for the compound bonus to notify that the compound bonus is in progress, and in accordance with such a request, the second start winning opening 63 and the large winning opening are notified that the compound bonus is in progress. It is also conceivable to use a device other than 90.
<< Other matters related to specifications >>

Next, the results of examining other matters related to the specifications of the pachinko gaming machine 10 will be described. In the pachinko gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, when a small hit of the special figure 2 occurs during the change of the special figure 1, the main control board (102) side is in a control state in which the change of the special figure 1 is temporarily suspended. To. In this case, for example, in the game state in which the special figure 1 is the main body, the player is not actively notified of the variable display and the small hit of the special figure 2, and the special figure 2 is also played during the small hit game. In order to continue the effect display as if the variable display of FIG. 1 is performed, it is controlled by the stop timing of the special figure 1 controlled by the main board 102 and the sub-boards (sub-main board 301 and sub-sub board 302). An event may occur in which the stop timing of the effect symbol 190 (or the guarantee symbol 361) corresponding to the special diagram 1 on the effect is different.

In consideration of such matters, it is possible to adjust the period of the shaking fluctuation by utilizing the shaking fluctuation of the decorative design (directed design 190) as described above (in that case, provide an extension period to lengthen it). It is possible. Then, by including this extension period, it is possible to adjust the stop timing on the sub-board (sub-main board 301 and sub-sub board 302) side. Here, it is conceivable that the sub-board side determines the end of the adjustment period (adjustment period due to the extension period) based on the command after receiving the command at the time of determining the symbol of the special symbol described above.

As an effect for the fluctuation of the special figure 1, for example, if the above-mentioned shaking fluctuation is lengthened at the time of SP reach, the player can restart the scroll fluctuation without stopping as it is (such as a revival effect). There is a risk of over-expecting a shift to high-expectation productions such as jackpot confirmation productions and developments into other reach productions. Therefore, for example, only in the case of a specific fluctuation effect, even if the small hit of the special figure 2 is performed during the fluctuation of the special figure 1, instead of the shaking fluctuation (as an alternative), the stage change The effect (stage change effect) or the display (insertion display) of a single picture (still image) such as an illustration may be performed. Further, it is possible to exemplify the darkening of the entire screen or the display of a lightning bolt image object in a dark background for a moment (for example, about 1 second).

Further, most of the fluctuation patterns of the special figure 2 in the first specific game (high probability of the special figure / high probability of the normal figure) have an extremely short fluctuation time (for example, about 0.6 seconds) as described above. It is configured for fast digestion. Therefore, when the fourth big hit is performed in the second specific game and the game shifts to the first specific game, due to the remaining hold of special figure 2, a plurality of small hits (special figure) during one change of special figure 1 (special figure). 2) may occur. Then, when adjusting the effect period due to the shaking fluctuation or the like as described above, it is necessary to lengthen the shaking fluctuation period by the occurrence of a plurality of small hits.

In consideration of such a situation, for example, in the first specific game (special figure 1 is the main body and special figure high probability / normal figure high probability), information on the number of reserved figures related to special figure 2 occurring and the current special figure The extension period is determined by using the information on whether or not the fluctuation of 2 is being executed, in other words, the number of executions of the small hit game based on the fluctuation of the special figure 2 during the fluctuation when the fluctuation of the special figure 1 is performed. You may. Then, an appropriate effect may be selected from a plurality of types of effects according to the total time of the determined extension period and the fluctuation time of the special figure 1, and the selected effect may be executed.

It is conceivable that such control is performed by predetermining the relationship between the number of reservations in FIG. 2 and the extension period and creating a table, and using the table (extension period determination table). Further, as a situation in which such control is likely to be required, a period of 1-2 fluctuations immediately after the transition to the first specific game (immediately after the entry) can be exemplified.

Further, as a more specific situation when the extension period of the effect is added, there can be mentioned a situation in which two reservations of the special figure 2 exist. Further, a situation in which the special figure 2 is changing, the number of reservations of the special figure 2 is one, and the fluctuation time of the special figure 1 is somewhat long (4 seconds or more, etc.) can be exemplified. Then, the time required to open the big winning opening of one small hit is set to about 1.2 seconds. Further, for example, a closing time of about 0.04 seconds is combined, and the total of these (1.2 seconds + 0.04 seconds) is set as the time of one small hit game.

Under such conditions, if there is a hold of Special Figure 2, it will be executed when it can be the third big hit in the first specific game (it will be the end trigger), and it will fuel the expectation of development to the above-mentioned battle production. The extension time is secured by inserting the fanning effect for the purpose as a so-called ghost effect. By doing so, even if both of the two holds in Special Figure 2 are small hits, the execution time of the effect for the extension period of about 2.4 seconds (1.2 seconds x 2 times) is secured. can do. As described above, it is possible to determine that there is a hold in FIG. 2 and, based on the determination result, insert a ghost effect when there is a hold.

Further, regarding the symbol fixing time related to the above-mentioned special figure, the symbol fixing time is set to, for example, about 0.5 seconds for both the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 except for the small hit (the missed special figure and the big hit). To do. On the other hand, regarding the small hit, it is conceivable that the symbol fixing time (the symbol fixing time according to the special figure 2 in the case of the small hit) is, for example, about 0.02 seconds.

In this way, by setting the symbol fixing time in the case of a small hit to a sufficiently small value (about a fraction to a few tenths) in other cases, the effect is produced as described above. When various time adjustments are made due to the upside-down fluctuation, it is possible to shorten the time required for the upside-down fluctuation in terms of production.

Further, by making the symbol fixing time in the case of a small hit different from the symbol fixing time in other cases, the time of the small hit rush (second specific game) can be flexibly adjusted. That is, by making the symbol fixing time in the case of a small hit shorter than the symbol fixing time in other cases, the time that becomes the small hit occurrence interval during the small hit rush can be shortened as much as possible.
<< About selection of production mode in the first specific game >>

Next, the selection of the effect mode (effect stage) in the first specific game will be described. First, as described above, as the jackpots that can be transferred to the first specific game, the first jackpot, the third jackpot, and the fourth jackpot are provided. Then, for these big hits, it is conceivable to make it possible to select the production mode during the first specific game from a plurality of types at the end of the big hit game (for example, during the end demo).

Further, as the effect modes that can be selected here, it is conceivable to provide a plurality of types (here, two types) such as the first challenge effect mode and the second challenge effect mode. It is conceivable that these challenge effect modes have a function (notification function) of notifying how many fluctuations the first specific game ends in the first specific game.

Further, such a notification function is performed in different production modes in the first challenge production mode and the second challenge production mode. It can be said that the effect related to the first challenge effect mode is the first challenge effect as a whole, and the effect related to the second challenge effect mode is the second challenge effect as a whole.

FIG. 31 (a) shows an example of the effect during the first specific game when the first challenge effect mode is selected. In the first challenge effect during the first specific game, a display area of the transition suggestion meter 411 is provided on the screen of the effect display device 60. The transition suggestion meter 411 is composed of a plurality of meter components.

Here, in FIG. 31 (a) (and FIG. 31 (b), FIG. 34, FIG. 35, FIG. 36 (a)), the first reserved number display unit 196 is the same as in FIGS. 8 (a) and 8 (b). Although the state in which both the and the second reserved number display unit 197 are made to appear on the screen is illustrated, only the reserved number display unit related to the special symbol (here, special figure 1) that becomes the standard in the game state at that time. Can appear on the screen.

In the example shown in FIG. 31A, in the transition suggestion meter 411, six image objects of the first meter section 411a to the sixth meter section 411f are arranged radially on the base portion 411g arranged in the center. Has been done. Here, the base portion 411 g and the first meter portion 411a to the sixth meter portion 411f are all made into a perfect circular image object so as not to complicate the illustration, but the image objects are not limited to this, and various forms are used. It is possible to do.

Further, the base portion 411 g is used as a relatively large image object, and the first meter portion 411a to the sixth meter portion 411f are used as an image object smaller than the base portion 411 g. Regarding such a magnitude relationship, if necessary. It can be changed as appropriate. Further, although the 1st meter section 411a to the 6th meter section 411f are image objects of the same size in the same form, the relationship between the 1st meter section 411a to the 6th meter section 411f may be changed as necessary. It is possible.

The first meter unit 411a to the sixth meter unit 411f roughly represent the number of remaining games until the transition to the second specific game, depending on the number displayed on the screen. For example, if the number of transitions (the number of electric support) related to the previous jackpot is 60, at the first stage of transitioning to the first specific game, for example, all six meter units (411a to 411f) are set as initial values. It is possible to display it. Further, if the number of transitions (the number of electric support) related to the jackpot is 50, at the first stage of transitioning to the first specific game, for example, five meter units (411a to 411f), which are one less, are displayed as initial values. It is conceivable to do.

Similarly, if the initial number of transitions determined by the jackpot symbol is 40, four, if the initial number of transitions is 30, three, if the initial number of transitions is 20, two, etc. As described above, it is conceivable to change the number of displayed meter units (411a to 411f) according to the amount of the initial value related to the number of transitions.

The relationship between the number of transitions and the number of meter units is not limited to the above example. For example, the larger the initial number of transitions, the smaller the number of meter units (411a to 411f) displayed first. It is also possible to make a relationship. Here, these relationships can be referred to as an example in which the relationship between the number of transitions and the number of meter units has the same increase / decrease relationship or an opposite increase / decrease relationship.

Further, not limited to the above-mentioned relationship, for example, the relationship between the initial value of the number of transitions and the number of meter units is not related to the same increase / decrease relationship or the reverse increase / decrease relationship, but is associated in the order of immobility. It is possible to make it. For example, the number of meter units (411a to 411f) is associated with the number of transitions (initial value) in five stages of 20 to 60 times, such as 3, 5, 2, 4, 6, and so on. The relationship can be illustrated. By doing so, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to perceive the relationship between the initial value of the number of transitions and the number of meter units.

Subsequently, with respect to the meter units (411a to 411f) after shifting to the first specific game, the number of meter units (411a to 411f) increases as the number of fluctuations increases to 0, 1, 2, ... It is possible to change. For example, at the initial stage of entering the first specific game, the game is repeated from the state in which the initial value of the number of transitions is 60 times indicated by the six meter units (411a to 411f), and the number of transitions is increased. When the number of remaining 50 times is reached, one meter unit is erased and the number of displayed meter units is set to five. Furthermore, each time the remaining number of transitions (remaining number of times) changes to 40 times, 30 times, ..., The number of displayed meter units is changed stepwise (intermittently) to 4, 3, ... It is possible to reduce it.

Further, not limited to this, for example, at the initial stage of entering the first specific game, the initial value of the number of transitions is 60 times, from the state where one (or zero) meter unit indicates. When the number of remaining times reaches 50, the number of displayed meter units increases stepwise (intermittently) to 2 (or 1), 3 (or 2), and so on. It is also possible to do.

In addition, a predetermined character in the production is associated with the first challenge production mode, the name of the character is included in the production mode name of the first challenge production mode, and the character is made to appear during the first challenge production. Can be considered. Further, the maximum number of meter units (411a to 411f) is not limited to 6, and may be 7 or more.

Further, the display mode of the meter unit can be expressed by the number of changes in the display mode, in addition to the mode in which the number increases or decreases. For example, the six meter units (411a to 411f) are constantly displayed, and the display mode is changed according to the change in the number of remaining games of the first specific game (for example, some meter units are displayed in the image of a lamp lighting). It may be configured to be lit and displayed).

Further, the change in the meter unit is not limited to a stepwise (intermittent) change based on the number of remaining games reaching the number of games that change the display mode, and the notice effect generated in the first specific game. Depending on the mode (lottery result of the advance notice effect), it may be configured to be changed at an indefinite timing. In addition, when the display of the meter unit is changed based on the mode of the generated notice effect, there is a discrepancy between the actual number of remaining games of the first specific game and the expectation for the second specific game based on the display of the meter unit. It is preferable to design the notice effect so that it can be adjusted at the time of lottery of the effect, such as a situation in which the meter unit is likely to be changed or a situation in which the mode in which the notice effect is not changed is always selected.

The first challenge effect mode as described above is a type of challenge effect mode in which the information until the number of fluctuations reaches the number of transitions (information until the compound bonus is entered) is shown by the display mode of the meter unit. Can be done. In addition, the first challenge production mode is a type of challenge production mode that shows information until the number of fluctuations reaches the number of transitions (information until the compound bonus is entered) without using specific numerical values. Can be done.

On the other hand, in the above-mentioned second challenge effect mode (FIG. 31 (b)), the information up to the entry into the compound bonus may be of a type that is continuously and indicated by a concrete numerical value. It is possible. In this second challenge effect mode, during the first specific game, for example, as illustrated in FIG. 31 (b), an image of the moving train 412 is running on the screen of the effect display device 60. It can be displayed in a manner that expresses something.

Further, in the second challenge effect mode, the image of the remaining number display board 413 is displayed on the effect display device 60, and the remaining numerical values up to the destination of the train are displayed on the remaining number display board 413. This remaining numerical value represents the remaining number of times related to the fluctuation up to the second specific game (composite bonus). Here, it is also possible to display a unit of distance such as "km" beside the numerical value of the remaining number of times display board 413 and display as if the remaining number of times is the remaining distance.

In this second challenge effect mode, when the train 412 reaches the destination, the numerical value of the remaining number display panel 413 can be set to 0. The numerical value of the remaining number display panel 413 continuously decreases by 1 each time the fluctuation according to the special figure 1 is repeated. Alternatively, each time the number of fluctuations according to the special figure 1 reaches a predetermined number (5 times, etc.), the numerical value of the remaining number display panel 413 may be reduced by a predetermined number (5 times, etc.). Then, when the numerical value of the remaining number display board 413 becomes 0, the process shifts to the combined bonus and the second specific game is started.

In addition, the numerical value displayed on the remaining number display panel 413 is not always accurate, such as the conventional so-called latent probability change effect or the effect that the remaining time reduction number is not accurately announced from the beginning and is gradually accumulated. It is also possible to exemplify an unpredictable production (inaccurate production). Further, in the case of performing an inaccurate effect, since the display of the remaining number display panel 413 is configured to display an apparent numerical value, the distance to the destination is displayed as the effect of the second challenge effect mode. However, it is also possible to exemplify an effect (for example, it can be called an "acceleration effect") in which the pace is shortened at a faster pace than the normal pace (or the pace up to that point) and the number of transitions is reduced at once.

It is also possible to properly use the acceleration effect and the inaccurate effect as described above. For example, the CPU 521 determines whether or not the number of transitions announced in the second challenge effect at that time is accurate (or within the allowable range), and if it is accurate (or within the allowable range). , It is possible to consider a control mode in which the determination as to whether or not to perform the above-mentioned acceleration effect is not executed, or even if the execution is decided, the determination is canceled.

In addition, if the number of transitions announced in the second challenge effect at that time is not accurate (or within the permissible range), it is decided whether or not to perform the acceleration effect, and if it is decided to perform the acceleration effect, the acceleration effect is performed. It is conceivable to execute it.

The various challenge effects as described above are for notifying the period of the first specific game. The notification relating to the period of the first specific game indicates the proximity to the second specific game (composite bonus) rush, and in other words, it can be said that the expectation of the compound bonus rush is fueled. Then, in the compound bonus, the second specific game (small hit rush) progresses in the special figure high probability game state, and the game is mainly in the state where the fluctuation of the special figure 2 having only the big hit of the V easy symbol is the main component. As a result, it can be said that various challenge productions indirectly suggest and incite the expectation of the transition to probabilistic change. Furthermore, various challenge effects increase the chances of expectation notification (reliability notification) as much as possible.

In addition, the effects related to the meter unit 411 and the remaining number display board 413, which are displayed in various challenge effects, can also be used as an effect (“blessing effect”) indicating the transition to the above-mentioned second specific game. In addition to the battle effect described above, a change in the display mode of the meter unit 411 and an effect in which the numerical value of the remaining number display board 413 becomes 0 can be treated as a blessing effect.

Subsequently, it is possible to perform a challenge introduction effect as a pre-stage effect related to various challenge effects. This challenge introduction effect can be performed, for example, during the final stage of the jackpot game (during the end demo effect, etc.). In addition, the challenge introduction effect includes a pre-selection effect before selecting a challenge effect, a challenge selection effect that selects a challenge effect, and a challenge transition effect that has continuity in content with respect to the selected challenge effect. It can be a waste.

As such a challenge introduction effect, the one shown in FIG. 32 can be exemplified. Here, FIG. 32 schematically shows the flow of the challenge introduction effect. Further, in FIG. 32, the types of effects are simplified by characters so as not to complicate the drawings.

As shown on the left side in FIG. 32, in the jackpot end demo effect, as the above-mentioned pre-selection effect, a “result effect” accompanied by displaying the number of acquired balls and the like is executed. Further, following the "result effect", as the above-mentioned challenge selection effect, a "character selection effect" for selecting a character associated with each challenge effect is performed.

Then, as a production at a stage where the player does not yet know which character has been decided, the "challenge transition introduction production" is executed, and then, in a manner corresponding to the selected character, as the above-mentioned challenge transition production, As shown separately in the upper, middle, and lower rows in the center of the figure, any one of the first challenge transition effect to the third challenge transition effect is executed.

In the above-mentioned "character selection effect", it is possible to automatically select a character without any operation by the player. As this "character selection effect", the image area of each displayed character is highlighted in order in order to imitate a roulette, and the above-mentioned "challenge transition introduction effect" is performed without notifying the player which character has been decided. You can think of something like moving to.

However, the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, a "character selection effect" may be executed as a button effect to allow the player to select a character. In this case, it is determined in advance that the button effect is performed during the effect imitating the roulette and the player inputs the operation, or the effective period of the button operation (operation effective period) elapses without the button operation. It is possible to think that the reverse display stops in the image area of the character being displayed and the character is selected.

Next, the above-mentioned first challenge transition effect to third challenge transition effect will be described. First, when a character corresponding to the first challenge transition effect is selected from the characters corresponding to the first challenge transition effect to the third challenge transition effect, a predetermined character corresponding to the first challenge transition effect appears. (Character 1 appears). In FIG. 32, a frame of the first challenge transition effect is shown in the upper part of the central portion, and a schematic flow of the first challenge transition effect is shown from left to right in the frame.

After the character appears, it is conceivable to execute a button effect that prompts the operation of the operation button 22, as shown by branching downward within the frame of the first challenge transition effect. As the button effect at this time, various general ones can be adopted.

For example, the operation button 22 is subjected to a single-shot effect for urging the above-mentioned single-shot operation and a continuous-stroke effect for urging the continuous-stroke operation. In the figure, a "continuous striking effect" that encourages the player to perform a continuous striking operation is illustrated. Then, when the player is given an opportunity to input an operation and a predetermined time (operation valid period) elapses without a button operation (operation input) or no button operation (operation input), the frame of the "first challenge effect" As shown at the right end of the inside, it is possible to consider an effect such that the transition suggestion meter 411 may be displayed (transition suggestion meter effect). The display of the transition suggestion meter 411 at this time is the initial value of the transition suggestion meter 411, which is a suggestion display of the number of electric support (transition count) in the first specific game, that is, the meter unit (411a to 411f) displayed first. It is possible to announce the number.

Furthermore, after the character appears as in the above-mentioned "Character 1 Appearance", for example, after displaying the characters of "Blow Challenge" as shown by branching upward in the figure without going through the button effect. , The effect that the transition suggestion meter 411 may be displayed may shift to the effect.

Then, after these effects, as shown in the upper right part of FIG. 32, the game shifts to the first specific game. Further, when the end condition of the first specific game is satisfied, the process shifts to the compound bonus as shown in the lower right part of the figure.

Further, the display of the transition suggestion meter 411 after the above-mentioned button effect (lower row) or the effect that does not go through the button effect (upper row) is performed in a mode that means that the number of transitions is 0, and the first identification is performed. It is also possible to shift to a compound bonus without going through the game. In this case, in the effect of the shift suggestion meter 411, it is possible to display the shift suggestion meter 411 in an manner indicating that the number of shifts has become "0" from the beginning of the effect.

Then, in this case, as shown by the broken line arrow in the right part of FIG. 32, the process shifts to the effect of the combined bonus, and the game state of the second specific game (small hit rush) is set. Here, even if the button effect is performed, it is possible to provide a case where the number of transitions does not become "0" as described above after the button is operated or after the operation valid period has elapsed.

Subsequently, in the above-mentioned second challenge transition effect, as shown in the middle part of FIG. 32, after the appearance of the character corresponding to the second challenge (character 2 appearance), the search during search effect and the distance notification effect can be performed. It is possible. Of these, in the search-in-progress effect, as shown in FIG. 33 (a), an effect accompanied by a map-like display is performed. In the example of FIG. 33A, the track 416 and a plurality of waypoints 417a to 417h are displayed on the map. Further, on the track 416, a train mark 412a meaning the train 412 shown in FIG. 30B is displayed. Further, in the image of the map, a scope mark 418 that moves while searching for a train is displayed.

In such a search-in-progress effect, when the scope mark 418 moves and overlaps with the train mark 412a as shown in FIG. 33 (b), the train moves to the nearest destination as shown in FIG. 33 (c). As a display of the distance to reach (remaining distance), a character display such as "discovery, distance 40!" Is performed.

The numerical value of "40" in this character display means that the electric support end condition (the number of transitions to the compound bonus) in the first specific game is 40 times. It is possible that the display of the number of transitions indicates the expected value for the compound bonus. The smaller the value, the closer the game state of the compound bonus is. Further, the effect during search is performed at the introduction stage before the number of transitions is announced, and in this sense, it can be referred to as "the effect before notification of the number of transitions".

Here, the display of the remaining distance as shown in FIG. 33C may be performed in a manner meaning that the number of transitions is 0, and the transition to the compound bonus may be performed without going through the first specific game. It is also possible to have it. Then, also in this case, as shown by the broken line arrow on the right side of FIG. 32, the bonus is shifted to the combined bonus, and the game state of the second specific game (small hit rush) is set.

Next, the above-mentioned third challenge transition effect will be described. The third challenge transition effect can be performed when the number of electric support hits is 0. Then, in the third challenge transition effect, as shown in the lower part of the center of FIG. 32, following the appearance of the corresponding character, the image of the decorative portion 189 in the lever device 184 (FIG. 21 (a)) and the image of the decorative portion 189. Characters such as "pull the lever" are displayed (lever operation promotion effect). At this time, in the lever device 184, the lever body 188 is in a protruding state (FIG. 21 (b)), and the operation of the lever can be detected on the sub-main board 301.

Then, when the lever device 184 is operated or a predetermined operation valid period related to the lever device 184 elapses, the production of the characters progresses, and then the combined bonus shifts to the compound bonus without going through the first specific game. .. Then, also in this case, the effect that the compound bonus has been entered is continuously executed, and the game state of the second specific game (small hit rush) is set.

The third challenge transition effect is an effect that can be executed when the number of electric support is 0 times, but when another big hit is executed, the third challenge is an option of the above-mentioned "character selection effect". It may be controlled so that the option of the transition effect is not displayed. In addition, when the big hit of 0 times of electric support is executed, the first challenge production mode (first challenge transition production) or the second challenge production mode (second challenge transition production) is set in the "character selection production". Even if it is selected, the effect pattern for forcibly shifting to the third transition effect may be executed.

Here, as a modified example, the third challenge transition effect can be executed at a jackpot other than the electric support 0 times, and even if the third challenge transition effect is performed, the first specific game may be passed. However, when the third challenge transition effect is performed, the ratio (95% or more, etc.) is considerably higher than when the first challenge transition effect and the second challenge transition effect are performed. It is conceivable to shift to the compound bonus without going through the first specific game.

Since the various challenge transition effects described above are the effects executed during the transition period from the jackpot game to the first specific game (and during the first specific game), the time required for the game after the jackpot game is increased. It can be said that it is something that can be made to. Then, during the various challenge transition productions, the period before the transition to the compound bonus is not the period of the small hit rush, so the player's ball possession does not increase (or is difficult to increase).

In addition, after various challenge transition effects, the compound bonus is reached through the first specific game, and when the fourth big hit according to the special figure 2 occurs in the compound bonus, the process always shifts to the first specific game or the second specific game. .. The first specific game and the second specific game are in a special game state with a high probability. For this reason, various challenge transition effects can be said to indicate the degree of expectation of transition to a game state in which the probability variation jackpot (V easy symbol jackpot) is definite, and therefore, a function that suggests the continuation of probability variation in the end demo of the jackpot game. It can be said that it is a production with.

In other words, the 1st challenge transition effect to the 3rd challenge transition effect can suggest the degree of expectation for the continuation of the specific game after the selection effect (after the character selection effect). it can. Then, in the first challenge transition production to the third challenge transition production, when a new special game (fourth big hit, etc.) is acquired during the second specific game, the specific game is set as the game state after the new special game. It can be said that it is possible to suggest the possibility of being controlled by (the degree of expectation of continuation of a specific game).

It should be noted that the various challenge transition effects are not limited to the end demo of the jackpot game, but may be performed as an effect during the round. In this case, it is possible to select various challenge transition effects before the "result effect" and start the challenge transition effect from that stage.

Further, it is also conceivable to perform the above-mentioned effect during the search (FIGS. 33 (a) and 33 (b)) in the second challenge transition effect, for example, after the first specific game has entered. In this case, for example, in the first variation when entering the first specific game, it is conceivable to perform an effect such as an effect during search as a limited frequency pattern effect using a limited frequency table. Alternatively, similarly, as a limited frequency pattern production, for example, in the first variation when entering the first specific game, the above-mentioned "character selection production" is executed as a challenge transition production mode selection production, and the selected challenge transition production is performed. It is also conceivable to execute from the second fluctuation (multiple fluctuations in the early stage). In these cases as well, it is possible to announce the number of transitions after the effect during the search.

In addition, in the first challenge transition effect and the second challenge transition effect, it is also possible to notify or suggest that the compound bonus will be directly transferred without going through the first specific game.
<< About the production during the first specific game >>

Next, the results of the study on the production during the first specific game will be described. First, when a big hit (third big hit) occurs during the first specific game, as described above, it does not shift to the combined bonus. Then, in this case, the player cannot receive the benefit of the loop from the compound bonus to the first specific game through the fourth big hit and returning to the compound bonus. In this sense, it can be said that the first specific game is in a gaming state in which it is preferable not to make a big hit.

Furthermore, as a specific factor that can be said in this way, as the first factor, the player can obtain more balls by entering the small hit rush (second specific game) of the compound bonus. I can mention the points that have expectations. Then, by missing the opportunity of such a small hit rush (second specific game), the number of balls acquired by the player is reduced.

Next, as a second factor, in the first specific game, special figure 1 is the main subject of fluctuation, but most of the big hits (third big hits) that can occur during the first specific game (for example, 60%) are usually shortened. It is a big hit (second bonus), and this normal time saving big hit (second bonus) can be mentioned as a non-probable variable big hit where it is difficult to win a V prize.

Further, as a third factor, as long as the game continues in the order of the first specific game, the second specific game, the first specific game after the fourth big hit (or the second specific game that does not go through the first specific game), the probability changes. It can be mentioned that the condition is guaranteed.

Therefore, unlike various conventional game machines, the effect during the first specific game is advantageous to the player when it is a mode showing that it is out of the game rather than a mode showing that it can be a big hit. It can be configured to notify (or announce or suggest). That is, the effect during the first specific game can be configured to arouse the player's expectation (expectation to shift to the compound bonus) when the lottery result is out of order. Furthermore, in other words, the production during the first specific game gradually approaches the compound bonus by notifying (or notifying or suggesting) the deviation, and notifies the player that the situation will be advantageous to the player. It is a thing.

In addition, the production during the first specific game is expected to be announced by the player, and it can be said that the content of the deviation is favorably accepted. Then, as a basic production mode, it is possible to exemplify that the notice is lively executed so as to be conspicuous during the first specific game, so that the player is informed that the game is out of order.

However, during the first specific game, a notice production (hereinafter referred to as "third jackpot fanning production") that fuels the development to a battle production that becomes the third jackpot is also executed, but such a production is performed. Similar to a normal production, it conveys to the player that the expectation of a big hit is high in an easy-to-understand manner.

Then, taking the above-mentioned first challenge effect (FIG. 30 (a)) as an example, basically, the display mode of the transition suggestion meter 411 is advantageous to the player because the compound bonus is approaching due to the repeated detachment. It will change to indicate that the situation is coming.

Further, taking the above-mentioned second challenge effect (FIG. 30 (b)) as an example, basically, the numerical value displayed on the remaining number of times display board 413 decreases as the detachment is repeated, and is compounded. The bonus will change to indicate that a situation is approaching and in favor of the player.
<< About the relationship between the first specific game and the look-ahead effect >>

Next, the relationship between the first specific game and the look-ahead effect will be described. As mentioned above, during the first specific game, the advance notice production, etc. other than the fanning effect (here, the battle effect) related to the third big hit is executed in a manner of fanning the expectation of disappointment, in order to improve the taste. Becomes effective. Therefore, it is desirable that the look-ahead effect is also executed in a manner that arouses the expectations of the player when the lottery result related to the special figure is out of order, except when it is executed as the third big hit fanning effect.

Here, the look-ahead effect that suggests the occurrence of the third big hit during the first specific game suggests a crisis situation to the player. In addition, the look-ahead effect during the first specific game (excluding the look-ahead effect that suggests the occurrence of the third big hit) basically has information that is out of the hold (hold of the main special figure 1). It will be used as a notification or suggestion of a situation that contains only.

Further, in the pachinko gaming machine 10, as described above, it is determined at the start of the fluctuation whether or not the end condition of the gaming state is satisfied. Then, at the start of the fluctuation, the transition to the game state is performed thereafter. For example, in the first specific game (electric support), when the fluctuation time is long and various effects are produced, the first is performed during the execution of the effect. -2 Due to the change in the operating mode of the ordinary electric accessory provided in the starting winning opening 62B, the player can grasp whether or not the fluctuation during execution is a big hit, so that the advance notice effect during the fluctuation is mainly used. Rather than notifying whether or not it is a big hit, it is possible to execute it in a short fluctuation time, and it is better to use a look-ahead effect that is executed before the big hit fluctuation to incite whether or not it is a big hit. In a situation where it is unclear whether or not the game state changes, the time required for the multiple fluctuations can be used to incite the effect related to the change in the game state for a long time, and an effective effect may be executed.

Next, a more specific example of the look-ahead effect will be described. First, as the look-ahead effect, for example, "safety hold", "butterfly stay look-ahead (and look-ahead)", "transparent countdown", and the like can be considered.

Regarding "safety hold" among these, for example, a barrier is put up in the display area (first hold number display unit 196) of the hold display (hold display of special figure 1), suggesting that it will not be a big hit in the hold. An example of the production to be announced. Here, as the "barrier", for example, an image object (which may be semi-transparent) that serves as a mask is superimposed on the first hold number display unit 196 so that the first hold number display unit 196 cannot be seen (the first hold number display unit 196). It can be made difficult to see) to indicate that the information of the big hit (occurrence of the third big hit) is not stored.

Furthermore, regarding "safety hold", for example, even under the situation (during fluctuation) in which SP reach, development of battle production, etc. are being executed, if the lottery for pre-reading production is won when the hold occurs, it is held. It is possible to change the display mode of the display to "safety hold". As for "safety hold", there is no jackpot information in all holds (all are out of order), including changes that have already been made when the hold that won the look-ahead lottery occurs (the change). It can be said that it is a production that notifies (that it is all lost). For this reason, when deciding whether or not to execute "safety hold", as a condition for deciding execution, "there is no big hit in the hold" and "variation currently being executed (special figure). That the change in 1) is not a big hit ”is included.

Next, the above-mentioned "butterfly stay look-ahead (and look-ahead)" will be described. This "butterfly stay look-ahead (and look-behind)" appears on the production during the period in which a predetermined image object (for example, an insect butterfly) is continuously displayed on the screen of the effect display device 60 and stays. It can be a look-ahead notice that a person does not encounter (or suggests) an opponent in a battle (it does not develop into a battle production and become a big hit).

By starting the look-ahead effect of this "butterfly stay look-ahead (and look-ahead)", it is notified that there is no big hit in the hold at the start time of the look-ahead effect. Further, after the start of the look-ahead effect, each time a subsequent hold (hold of special figure 1) occurs, the sub-main board 301 receives the pass / fail information from the main board 102 and determines whether or not the effect can be continued. (Continue lottery). Then, when a hold that becomes a big hit occurs, or if the hold that did not win the continuous lottery is not won, for example, at the timing immediately before the hold that did not win the continuous lottery (the hold that occurred) is exhausted, "butterfly" Set a flag (end flag) so that "stay look-ahead (and look-behind)" ends.

Here, if the timing to end the "butterfly stay look-ahead (and look-ahead)" is the start of the fluctuation of the hold to be digested, the lottery result of the fluctuation (the fluctuation) at that time is a big hit at the start of the fluctuation. Something can be perceived by the player. For this reason, it is conceivable that the timing for ending the "butterfly stay look-ahead (and look-behind)" is, for example, during the fluctuation before the fluctuation that becomes the big hit, or after the latter half (the final stage, etc.) of the fluctuation that becomes the big hit.

In addition, "butterfly stay look-ahead (and look-ahead)" is basically a production that means that there is no big hit while it is being executed, and it can be performed in a game state other than during the first specific game. It can be said that it is a production related to the production of the possible invincible zone (having the opposite function to the production of the invincible zone). Here, the production of the "invincible zone" has been performed conventionally, and the favorable gaming state for the player is almost fixed, such as a probability change if a big hit is made now, and a big hit is confirmed if a reach (tempai) is made now. It is a production that notifies you of what you are doing during the specified period.

However, as described above, since it is a preferable period for the player that the first specific game does not become a big hit, the big hit and the probability change are not referred to when determining whether or not the game can be executed, as compared with the production of the invincible zone. It can be said that it is different that the lottery result of the outlier (the lottery result of not being a big hit) is referred to.

Subsequently, the "transparency countdown" will be described. In this "transparent countdown", in the above-mentioned second challenge production mode, the number of games until the compound bonus rushes (the numerical value of the remaining number display board 413) is less than the remaining 4 times (the upper limit of the number of holds according to Special Figure 1). Then, it can be a look-ahead effect that executes a countdown effect of the number of holds. Then, in a situation where the number of remaining electric support (end condition according to special figure 1) is 4 or less, and the special figure 1 hold is all out of order, the countdown number is displayed in rainbow (rainbow color mode). For example, what is switched to.

Although the countdown related to the remaining four holds is described here, a countdown from a numerical value of 5 or more is also possible as a countdown effect. However, the countdown as a look-ahead effect will be performed with a numerical value of 4 or less. Then, the countdown from a numerical value of 5 or more can be performed as a countdown effect other than the look-ahead effect.

In addition to these, for example, in a situation where the number of remaining electric support (the end condition of the specific game in special figure 1) is 4 or less, when all the information on hold in special figure 1 is out of order, the electric power is transmitted. It is also possible to switch the countdown number related to the number of support to rainbow display (rainbow-colored mode).

The countdown effect related to the look-ahead and the countdown effect related to the number of times of electric support will fulfill the function of the above-mentioned blessing effect (small hit rush rush effect) when there is only one remaining. Therefore, these countdown effects function as effects that definitively notify the entry into the compound bonus when the result of the big hit lottery of the special figure before the entry into the compound bonus is out of order.
<< Button production in a special mode >>

Next, a special button effect applicable to the pachinko gaming machine 10 will be described. Here, the following types of button effects (special button effects) can be considered. For example, if the player is urged to press and hold the operation button 22 (continuous operation) or stop the button operation (end of operation), and the long press and end of operation satisfy a predetermined condition. Step up the content of the production.

In this special button effect, the effect is branched to one of a plurality of effect routes.

For example, as one effect route (first effect route), a button image is displayed together with an image of an indicator (indicator for remaining time), and a button operation performed during the remaining time indicated by the indicator is used as an effective operation input. An example of what advances the production can be illustrated.

In one production route (first production route), when the player presses the operation button 22 within the remaining time (within the valid period) (or when the valid period at this time elapses without button operation), for example, one person. When there is a button operation, such as defeating an enemy in the above, the effect of the corresponding mode is executed. The enemy may not fall even if the button is operated. Then, it is also possible to end the button effect as it is.

Further, when the effect on the above-mentioned effect route (first effect route) is continued, the button effect is executed again, and when the player operates the button, the subsequent enemy is defeated. Further, the button effect is repeated, and each time the button effect is repeated, the subsequent enemies are defeated in order, and when the third enemy is defeated, the effect develops into the subsequent effect.

As another effect route (second effect route), for example, in the above-mentioned first button effect, when an enemy is defeated, a branching process can be considered. That is, the second production route can be branched and proceeded in the early stage of the first production route.

In this second production route, first, a predetermined character is made to appear to notify that the production route has branched. After that, as shown in FIG. 34 (a), the button image 401 is displayed, the player is urged to press the operation button 22, and the train 412 (FIG. 31 (b)) is in the center of the lower part of the screen. The image (412b) of the head portion of the train 412, which is the image associated with, is displayed. In addition, an image showing the flow of air or the like is displayed so that the player can perceive the train as if it is moving forward (to the back of the screen).

At this time, the button operation valid period (long press valid period) is started for control purposes. Then, when the player presses the operation button 22 and the operation input is detected, the background color in the video changes from, for example, blue to green. Further, in the video, a moving image is displayed in which the train 402 is accelerating and moving forward at high speed due to changes such as air flow and ripples. Further, as shown in FIG. 34 (b), a character display (display of a telop) of "Don't let go!" Is added, and the player is urged to continue the button operation (hold down) while pressing the button. ..

If the player keeps pressing the operation button 22 during such a long press valid period, it is detected that the long press operation continues. Then, on the image, the image of the development destination panel 414 appears extremely small in the back of the screen, and as the long press is continued, the image is gradually displayed larger so as to gradually approach the train 412b.

The background color of the image changes in stages while the long press continues. That is, the longer the duration of the long press, the more the background color is switched. As for the mode of changing the background color, the degree of expectation (feasibility) of the development of the production and the jackpot is increasing (stepping up or chance up) in the order of green, red, gold, rainbow color, etc. Can be made into a mode that the player can perceive.

Here, the change in the background color is not limited to a gradual change, and may be changed, for example, in the form of a gradation that gradually and continuously changes. Further, while the long press is continued, it is possible to perform the effect display in such a manner that the vibration of the train 402 gradually increases. Even when the background color for continuously suggesting the degree of expectation changes in a mode such as gradation, the background color is displayed at the timing when the level changes, and the approximate display color is provided as a stepwise level. It is also possible to configure the notification in combination with the background color change in a manner in which it is possible to perceive that the stage of the expectation level has been raised due to, for example, a lamp effect, a sound effect, or vibration of the operation button 22.

Further, when the development destination panel 414 approaches the train 412b to some extent, the above-mentioned character "Don't let go!" Disappears in a manner such as erasing or fading out, and instead, as shown in FIG. 34 (c), " "Release!" Is displayed. At this time, the long press valid period of the operation button 22 ends, and the valid period (open valid period) of the release related to the button operation starts. This opening valid period is a period during which an operation in which the player releases the operation button 22 by releasing the finger from the operation button 22 is detected.

During the above-mentioned opening valid period, the character "Release!" Continues to be displayed until the player stops pressing the operation button 22 (until the operation button 22 is released), and the screen stays on the screen. Then, when the operation button 22 is released during the opening valid period, the effect proceeds to the next stage.

As a production of this "next stage", if the development destination panel 414 approaches the train 412b and collides with it (FIGS. 34 (d) and (e)) and is destroyed by the train 412b, the player has high expectations. It can be illustrated that the process progresses to the production. As the "production with high expectations for the player" here, a new development destination panel 414 appears after the destruction of the development destination panel 414, and the new development destination panel 414 collides with the train 412b again (development). Panel destruction effect) can be illustrated. It should be noted that FIG. 34 (e) shows the production of the content in which the development destination panel 414 collides with the train 412b and is cracked.

Furthermore, a predetermined number of development destination panels 414 (for example, about 5 at maximum) are prepared, and for each development destination panel 414, for example, "Battle 1/5 reach" (reach with an expectation of 20%), "Battle 2 / It is conceivable to write characters such as "5 reach" (reach with an expectation of 40%), ... "Battle 5/5 reach" (reach with a confirmed jackpot). In these development destination panels 414, the degree of expectation of development to a desired production for the player increases (steps up) in the order of "battle 1/5 reach" to "battle 5/5 reach". ..

And if these development destination panels 414 are all destroyed from "Battle 1/5 Reach" to "Battle 4/5 Reach" by the train 412b, the production with the highest expectation level is relatively high ("Battle"). Proceed to "5/5 reach"). In addition, if destruction fails in any of "Battle 1/5 Reach" to "Battle 4/5 Reach", the production will proceed to the production that stays at the appropriate degree of expectation for each development destination panel 414. Can be considered.

Here, FIG. 34 (d) shows a state in which the development destination panel 414 of "Battle 1/5 Reach" is approaching the train 412b. Further, the production mode is not limited to the production mode starting from "Battle 1/5 Reach", and for example, the production mode in which the production of the development destination panel 414 starts in any of "Battle 2/5 Reach" to "Battle 5/5 Reach". You can also think.

Further, regarding such a special button effect, the following can be considered regarding the control mode. For example, the operation state of the operation button 22 by the player is made to appear in the operation button signal. As the operation button signal, a rising edge appears when the operation button 22 is pressed, a constant signal level is maintained during the pressing, and a falling edge appears when the pressing ends (opens).

Further, for example, a long press valid period flag is set during the long press valid period (for example, "1"), and an open valid period flag is set during the open valid period. Further, when the rising edge of the operation button signal is detected, the button operation on flag can be set, and when the falling edge of the operation button signal is detected, the button operation off flag can be set.

Then, for example, if the button operation is not released during the open valid period (the button operation off flag is not set to "1"), the effect of "Release!" described above will be stagnant without shifting to the development panel destruction effect. It is possible to do. Such effect control can be performed even when the operation button 22 is continuously pressed from the long press effective period to the end of the open effective period.

Then, if the button operation is not released during the open valid period, the subsequent development destination panel destruction effect is not executed, and the time allotted as the development destination panel destruction effect elapses, and then forcibly (suddenly). In), it is possible to proceed with the production depending on the presence or absence of future development. Such an mode of effect control can be referred to as, for example, "result display effect due to time out".

Further, the operation button 22 is operated during the long press valid period and the pressing is continued, and the operation button 22 is not operated (opened) before shifting to the effect of "Release!" (Before shifting to the opening valid period). You can think about the case. Then, in this case, it is possible to temporarily erase the effect of "Don't let go!", Stop the step-up of the background color in the mode at the time of opening, and prevent the subsequent effect of destroying the development destination panel from being executed. is there.

Further, it is possible to consider the case where the operation button 22 is operated again during the long press valid period at this time. In such a situation, when the operation button 22 is not operated, the effect of "Don't let go!" During the long press valid period is temporarily deleted, but before the transition to the open valid period. When the operation of the operation button 22 is detected again, the effect of "Don't let go!" Is restored.

Then, if the operation of the operation button 22 is continued, the effect of "Don't let go!" Is continued until the opening valid period is entered (during the front long press valid period). Further, in this case, the step-up of the background color during the long press valid period is also interrupted when the operation button 22 is in a non-operation state, and when the operation button 22 is detected again, the step-up is interrupted. It is conceivable to continue from the background color of.

Not limited to this, for example, when the operation of the operation button 22 is detected again, the background color is displayed with the same background color as when the button operation is not interrupted (when the step-up of the background color is continued). It is also possible to resume. Further, it is also possible to erase the character display of "Don't let go!" By interrupting the button operation, while continuously displaying the step-up of the background color.

In addition, the background image of the long press valid period and the open valid period is common, and only the difference in the button operation instruction image of "Don't release!" Or "Release!" (If the button image is different, also the button image) is long pressed. It is also possible to make the difference on the effect display between the valid period and the open valid period.

Furthermore, when the button is not operated when shifting from the long press valid period to the open valid period, the effect of "release" is not displayed, and the effect after the open valid section is displayed due to the time-out of the open valid section. It may be made to proceed (“result display effect by time out” is performed).

In this case, even if the operation button 22 is pressed or released after the release valid period is entered, the release operation is not effective in terms of control (the effective period of the internal long press release is not generated). ) Can be configured. Further, the present invention is not limited to this, and although the opening valid period is generated, it is also possible not to execute the effect display (such as the effect using the development destination panel 414) accompanying the opening operation.
<< About special character display effect >>

Next, a special character display effect that can be applied to the pachinko gaming machine 10 will be described. In the pachinko gaming machine 10, if the player looks at the character string from a normal viewpoint, it is difficult to perceive the suggestion of the production content from the character string, but if the viewpoint is changed, the suggestion of the production content is perceived. It is possible to adopt a character display effect (character inversion effect) that facilitates this.

Further, the character string here can change the meaning of the character string when the character string is viewed from different directions. For example, the character string initially indicates the meaning of "off" when the display is started, but can be rotated to indicate the meaning of "hit".

FIG. 35A shows a character string 421 of a hiragana brush that can be read diagonally from the upper left to the lower right as “off”. When the display is started in the production, the character string 421 is displayed in a direction that can be read as "off" as described above, but it is rotated by approximately 180 ° at a predetermined timing and the top and bottom are reversed. Then, as shown in FIG. 35 (b), this character string 421 can be read as "hit", and the meaning shown to the player is changed.

As an effect using such a character string 421, for example, it is conceivable to display it on the screen of the effect display device 60 in a direction that can be read as "off" during the effect indicating the state of reaching or not. .. Then, the production is performed in a manner that does not reach the reach once, but then the character string 421 is rotated in a direction that can be read as "hit", and the reach (revival reach) is produced.

It is also conceivable to display a plurality of such character strings (421) on the screen to produce an effect. For example, as in the production using roulette (roulette effect), a display that is advantageous to the player is executed together with a display that is not advantageous, and the number of displays that are advantageous and the number of displays that are not advantageous are the degree to which the player is advantageous. Consider a production that can be recognized to some extent.

When performing such an effect, at the start of the roulette effect, more character strings that can be read as "off" are displayed than those that can be read as "hit". Then, as the production progresses, the number of character strings that can be read as "hit" is larger than the number of character strings that can be read as "hit" so that the character string that can be read as "missing" is rotated and read as "hit". Then, it is conceivable to produce a chance up (step up). In addition, when performing such an effect, it is possible to proceed with the effect so that all the character strings can be read as "hit".

In the above-mentioned production example, the character string 421 is rotated in the vertical direction to change the direction, but the orientation is not limited to this. For example, the character string is rotated in the depth direction of the screen (three-dimensional (3D)). ), And when rotated by a predetermined angle (for example, 180 °), it is possible to think of something that looks like a character string representing another meaning.

Further, as another special character display effect, although not shown, for example, an example using a fragment-like image component separated in 3D space can be exemplified. More specifically, from a certain viewpoint, a large number of separated image components (image component groups) are statically drawn in 3D space. The form of each component is, for example, a plate shape, and the shape thereof is a triangle of various forms. At this point, it is difficult for the player to perceive the image component group as a concrete thing.

After that, a group of image constituent elements (image constituent element group) is displayed (aggregate display) by changing the viewpoint as in the case of changing the viewing angle with respect to the polygon image in the 3D image. Then, when the viewpoint moves to a specific position, the image component groups are combined so that the player can easily perceive it as a completed 3D image of a predetermined object. Examples of the "predetermined thing" at this time include a character string that can be read as "hit" and a character string that can be read as "missing". Further, it is conceivable that the "predetermined thing" is a fruit, a vegetable, an animal or a plant, or a production item or a character.

Then, when the image component group is displayed in a form that can be read as, for example, a "hit" character string, the effect is stepped up, and when it is displayed in a form that can be read as a "missing" character string, the effect is produced. It is possible to think of a production mode in which the step-up is not performed. It should be noted that such an effect using the image component group can also be referred to as, for example, an "image component group utilization effect".

Further, as another example of the "image component group utilization effect", the image component group is drawn as a plurality of black irregular dots whose surroundings are blurred like ink dripping in water. Then, while changing the viewpoint, the image component groups are drawn so as to be gradually connected to each other, and finally, the character strings having positive meanings such as "hit" and "clear sky" are changed. Then, when it changes to a character string such as "hit", the production is stepped up, and when it changes to a character string with a negative meaning such as "off", "cloudy weather", or "rainy weather". Can be considered as an effect mode in which the step-up of the effect is not performed.

In addition, in the case of performing the "image component group utilization effect", when completing the character string or the like, the completed image may be changed to a 2D image so that the player can easily see what is displayed. Conceivable. It is also conceivable to add a white or black outline to the completed image to make it easier for the player to recognize the completed image.

Further, for example, in a situation where the image component group is displayed, the operation of the operation lever or the cross key by the player may be enabled so that the player can change the viewpoint by his / her own operation input.
<< About diversification of expression by character display production >>

Next, a technique capable of diversifying the character identification ability (expressive power) when performing a character display effect (text effect) on the pachinko gaming machine 10 will be described. Usually, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine 10, the gaming state is notified by displaying characters, and the development of production and the expectation of a big hit are notified.

Further, in a game machine, not only the original meaning of a character or a character string (hereinafter referred to as "character etc.") is used, for example, the coloring of the character or the like is blue, red, gold, or Various expectations are notified depending on the difference in the decoration mode such as characters such as rainbow color or changing the font and size. However, if the decorative modes are distinguished only by the coloring or pattern of the characters or the like as in the conventional case, the applicable decorative modes are limited and it is difficult to increase the ability to identify the characters or the like.

For this reason, it is considered to incorporate elements other than colors and patterns to produce a character display effect. In order to diversify the character display effect, it is conceivable to individually control the components (line elements) of the character image to change the mode of the character image (character element vibration effect as a vibration highlighting display pattern).

For example, as shown in FIG. 36 (a), for example, in the situation where the character data related to the hiragana "da" is used to display the effect by one character, the character image 422 of the "da" is designated as a horizontal line. There are five components (partial data) 422a consisting of a combination of vertical lines, two horizontal lines (partial data) 422b and 422c, and a component (partial data) 422d and 422e of the dakuten part. Separate and draw these separately in individual layers. Alternatively, the five elements are divided into, for example, three layers in an appropriate combination and drawn.

It can be said that such a method of dividing the components is to divide the area for each line connected by writing, and to hold and manage the data of the individual components for each area. Further, it can be said that the elements constituting one character are divided into a plurality of components, and the display data is divided for each component.

Then, each layer (each component) is vibrated in a different vibration mode, as shown by the bidirectional arrows reciprocating in FIG. 36 (a). The vibration of each component 422a to 422e is performed so that at least two components are displaced in different directions from each other. The amplitudes of the components 422a to 422e may be the same (or similar) to each other, but may be different.

By doing so, it is possible to display (vibration coordinated display) in which the entire character appears to be moving within the amplitude range of each component 422a to 422e (amplitude on both sides is about several millimeters on the image). It becomes. It can be said that such an effect may make the characters appear to change in size or move. Then, by this effect, the character display can be changed in a mode other than the color and the pattern. As a result, the character display function can be increased, and the character identification function can be diversified.

Character display (character highlighting) accompanied by such individual vibration has a relatively high expectation (expectation of production development) such as a production in which red, gold, or rainbow-colored characters are cut in. It is conceivable to perform the production with a degree of 100% or a so-called definite system in which the expectation of a big hit is 90% or more. Further, it can be said that the effect mode in which the characters are vibrated individually for each part in this way is one of the effects in which a special effect (character effect) is added to the characters.

Subsequently, the following can be exemplified with respect to the diversification of expressions by the character display effect. For example, for some or all of the components of a character, the appearance of burning flames and the seven-color pattern of a rainbow are displayed as dynamic effects within the outline consisting of black lines or white lines. In this case, for example, in the character layer, the transparency of the area excluding the outline part of the character image is increased to, for example, 100% so that the character layer can be transparently displayed, and a flame movie or a rainbow 7-color pattern layer is behind the character layer. Overlap.

That is, the moving image data is masked by the outline of the character so that the moving image is displayed only inside the outline related to the component of the character. By doing so, the character effect can be executed by combining the character image data and the effect image data.

Therefore, it is not necessary to prepare basic character image data without effects, character image data with effects added, and a large amount of image data for converting character image data with effects into moving images. .. As a result, it is possible to perform a character effect while suppressing the amount of image data to be small.

In FIG. 36 (b), the composition of the image data 423 when adding the effect of the rainbow pattern to the character string 421 of the brush body that can be read as "hit" in hiragana is shown by the sign "+" and the arrow pointing to the right. It is shown schematically using. The image data of the character string 421 is made translucent by adjusting the transparency, masking the layer image of the rainbow effect in the background, and for the rainbow effect in the character string 424 after composition, the outline of the character string. It is configured by making the image data 423 for the rainbow effect visible to the player only in the inner region.

It is conceivable that such a character effect is also used in a production with a relatively high expectation. In general, the same character string may be used in different color schemes in pachinko gaming machines (for example, telops in red and white characters). Instead of using such a character string of different colors, it is also possible to switch between a character string without an effect and a character string with an effect. By doing so, it is not necessary to store the character data in red and white, respectively, and it is possible to reduce the amount of data related to the characters.
<Effects of Main Inventions Related to Pachinko Gaming Machines of Examples>

1. 1. In the pachinko gaming machine 10 as described above, the special game is a plurality of types of special games (special games) depending on the type of specific game (normal time reduction, electric support, special figure high probability, etc.) performed after the special game. Later, there is a special game with no time reduction or time reduction according to Special Figure 1, or a special game with no time reduction or time reduction according to Special Figure 2).
The specific game includes a high-probability game state (such as a special figure high-probability state) in which the probability that the special game will be performed changes based on the first random number value or the second random number value, and an ordinary electric accessory. It is composed of a combination with an easy-to-enter state (such as a high-probability state) in which the frequency of easy entry is increased.
In the specific game, the first specific game in which both the high-probability game state and the easy-to-enter state are performed, and the high-probability game state is performed while the easy-to-enter state is performed. Has at least a second specific game that is not in a state
When a predetermined type of special game (such as a special game of the first bonus in the first big hit) is performed, the first specific game is started after the end of the special game of the predetermined type, and then the first specific game It is configured so that the second specific game can be started when a predetermined end condition (such as 20 to 60 times of electric support) of the first specific game is satisfied without the special game being performed during execution. ,
The first random number value and the second random number value have different execution probabilities of the special game in which the first specific game will be performed after the special game ends (the first random value is the first big hit and the first is the first). 40% which can be one bonus, and 100% which can be the first bonus in the fourth big hit for the second random number value).

Therefore, according to the pachinko gaming machine 10, after the big hit game, it is possible to intervene the first specific game before the transition to the second specific game state. Further, the second specific game can be set to a specific game state in which the transition is possible unless a big hit is won in the first specific game. Therefore, it is possible to shift the gaming state in a new manner, and it is possible to provide a pachinko gaming machine having a high taste for changes in the gaming state.

In addition, the flow of the game up to the second specific game can be changed depending on what kind of content and nature the first specific game state is to have. Therefore, the flow of the game up to the second specific game can be diversified, and this also makes it possible to provide a pachinko gaming machine having a high taste for changes in the game state.

In addition, the first starting port (1-2 starting winning opening, etc.) arranged in the area where the ball can be entered when the game ball is launched with a predetermined firing intensity,
Since it is provided with a second starting port (second starting winning opening, etc.) arranged at a position where the ball can enter when launched with the predetermined firing intensity, the first starting port does not change the firing intensity. And a game that allows the ball to enter the second starting port can be played.

Then, the execution probability (transition probability) to the first specific gaming state can be made different between the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 without changing the firing intensity. As a result, it is possible to provide a new game property in which the frequency of transition to the first specific gaming state can be changed without changing the firing intensity.

The pachinko gaming machine 10 employs a game property (so-called ball probability spec) in which the content of the specific game after the big hit game differs depending on whether or not the V prize is won during the big hit game. Therefore, it is difficult to strictly quantify (quantify) the "execution probability", "transition probability", or "transition frequency" related to the above-mentioned first specific game.

In other words, regarding the large winning opening 90, as an irregular situation that deviates from the standard, it can be assumed that V winning is not performed when V winning should be done, but "execution probability", "transition probability", or "transition frequency" Is used as a term premised on the situation where a V prize is won by the progress of a standard game.

2. 2. Subsequently, in the pachinko gaming machine 10, the predetermined end condition of the first specific game is a plurality of types of conditions corresponding to the first random number value or the second random number value that triggered the execution of the predetermined type of special game. The end condition of 1 is defined from among (20 to 60 times of electric support, etc.). That is, there are a plurality of conditions (conditions for ending electric support) for shifting to the second specific game depending on the jackpot symbol.

For this reason, a plurality of types of end conditions for the first specific game, which is an opportunity to enter the second specific game (small hit rush), are provided. Then, the timing at which the second specific game is performed can be diversified, which can provide a new game property and improve the taste.

3. 3. Subsequently, in the pachinko gaming machine 10, in the first specific game and the second specific game, depending on the difference in the frequency at which the ordinary electric accessory is easy to enter (whether or not the 1-2 start winning opening is opened, etc.) The ratio of the game balls entering each of the 1st start port and the 2nd start port changes. Then, depending on the presence or absence of the electric support, the ball entry ratio of the 1-2 start winning opening 62B or the 2nd starting winning opening 63 changes.

Therefore, it is possible to change the special symbol that is the main body of the game between the time of the first specific game and the time of the second specific game. Then, the probability (tendency) of acquiring the special game that shifts to the first specific game can be changed between the first specific game and the second specific game, and this also improves the taste. Is possible.

Further, since the game of the special figure 1 and the game of the special figure 2 can be executed in parallel, even if the fluctuation at the end of the first specific game is a big hit, the number of transitions is reached and the second specific game is started. If the transition conditions are satisfied, a game such as executing a small hit rush (second specific game) even during the big hit fluctuation of FIG. 1 is possible.

4. Subsequently, in the pachinko gaming machine 10, in the first specific game and the second specific game, depending on the difference in the frequency at which the ordinary electric accessory is easy to enter (whether or not the 1-2 start winning opening is opened, etc.) The ratio of pachinko balls entering each of the 1-2 starting winning openings 62B and the second starting winning openings 63 changes.
During the second specific game, the ball-entry ratio to the second start winning opening 63 is higher than the ball-entry ratio to the 1-2 starting winning opening, and the ball is played based on the second random number value. After the end of the special game, be sure to shift to the first specific game or the second specific game (if the number of transitions is not 0, shift to the first specific game, if 0, shift to the second specific game, etc.) It has become a thing.

Therefore, by satisfying the end condition of the first specific game and entering the second specific game, it is possible to provide a game property in which the transition to the probabilistic game is guaranteed almost 100%. Then, by shifting to the small hit rush, in addition to making it easier for the player to get a ball, the game has excellent taste, such as guaranteeing the probability change at the next big hit (4th big hit). Will be able to provide.

Here, for example, the fluctuation of the special figure 2 is a high speed (short time), and the fluctuation of the special figure 1 is a super long fluctuation, but regarding the ball entry ratio during the second specific game, non-electric support (non-ball entry is easy). In a game machine in which the winning probability of the normal symbol (open lottery) in the normal symbol (open lottery) is set high, the second starting winning opening 63 may be used depending on the structure and operating mode of the 1-2 starting winning opening 62B and the second starting winning opening 63. It is also possible to adopt a game-like property such that the 1-2 start winning opening 62B is higher than that.

Then, in consideration of such a case, the pachinko gaming machine 10 has a ball entry ratio to the 1-2 start winning opening 62B during the second specific game, and the ball entry ratio to the second starting winning opening 63. After the end of the special game that is higher than the ratio and will be performed based on the second random number value, the game always shifts to the first specific game or the second specific game (if the number of transitions is not 0, the first specific game). If it is 0, it shifts to the second specific game, etc.).

Then, the term "variation efficiency" is used instead of the term "ball entry ratio", and for example, if the fluctuation efficiencies relating to the 1-2 start winning openings 62B and the second starting winning openings 63 during the second specific game are different. After the end of the special game that will be performed based on the second random number value, the game always shifts to the first specific game or the second specific game (if the number of transitions is not 0, the game shifts to the first specific game. In the case of 0, it is possible to shift to the second specific game, etc.).

In addition, as described above, during the big hit game accompanying the easy V winning (V easy) jackpot in Special Figure 1, the situation becomes irregular without V winning, and the special game with low probability of special figure (normal with 100 electric support). Time saving game) may be performed. As mentioned above, the causes of such irregular situations are the situation where the firing is not continued due to leaving the seat, stopping, etc. (the situation where the firing is not continued), or even if the firing is continued as usual, V happens to occur. It can be illustrated as a situation where a prize is not won.

The game quality that guarantees 100% probability change as described above is also based on the premise that V prizes will be generated as standard.

In addition, not only the so-called ball-probability spec pachinko gaming machine 10 that requires a V prize to shift to probabilistic change, but also pachinko gaming machines of the type in which the transition to probabilistic change is confirmed depending on the type of jackpot, unless there is a particular problem. , Each of the above-mentioned inventions can be applied.

Further, as described above, as the end condition of the first specific game (high probability of special figure and high probability of normal figure), the main control display device 53 displays a predetermined number of fluctuations of special figure 1 (special figure 1 alone). You may adopt what is done. Then, regarding the situation in which the special figure 1 (or the special figure 2) is the main body, the various end conditions by the special figure 2 alone (or the special figure 1 alone) and the various end conditions by the total of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 are It is prepared for non-standard (irregular) games. However, the termination conditions exemplified for each invention so far do not lose their effectiveness even assuming that only standard (regular) games are played.

Further, as described above, when the special game is not executed during the first specific game, the first specific game ends with the variable display of the special figure 1 on the main control display device 53. In the fluctuation display one time before the fluctuation display (N-1st time), a special fluctuation display (variation display by limited frequency pattern production at the end of the first specific game) is performed to notify the rush to the small hit rush. It is possible to perform a "blessing production".

Furthermore, as described above, in the production such as "blessing production" at the time of entering the small hit rush, the production symbols are prepared in order to display the small hit rush and the fourth big hit of special figure 2 as a combined bonus. Although it is configured to display the effect as if the big hit has started, the effect of notifying the start of the compound bonus is a special symbol different from the one for notifying the big hit. Can be used as an effect. Then, although the fluctuation of the special figure 1 for notifying the small hit rush rush is the deviation fluctuation (loss fluctuation), the effect symbol 190 that the player can perceive as "7" meaning the big hit is used. It is possible. Further, in this case, for example, it is conceivable that the display (display of the mini symbol) in the reduced effect symbol display area 361 described above is performed in an out-of-order manner.

Further, as described above, in the compound bonus, it is possible to open the big winning opening 90 with an almost constant rhythm (almost constant cycle) from the second specific game to the big hit game of the fourth big hit. is there. In this case, it is possible to make the opening pattern of the large winning opening 90 the same or similar between the big hit and the small hit of the special figure 2 so that the appearance of the opening operation of the large winning opening 90 is continuous. ..

Further, as described above, the game state transition control at the start of the fluctuation determines the success or failure (whether or not the end condition is satisfied) of the end condition related to the specific game state at the start of the fluctuation. It is possible to perform the above even when the symbol is stopped.

5. Subsequently, the pachinko gaming machine 10 has a small hit rush (a game state with a high probability of a special figure and a low probability (low base) of a normal figure) in which the winning frequency per unit time of a small hit increases as a specific game. Therefore, the period from the start time of the specific game (small hit rush) to the end of the special game generated during the specific game is controlled to a series of production states (combined bonus production state). There is.

That is, a series of productions are performed from the small hit rush to the subsequent big hit (fourth big hit). Therefore, it is possible to form a new production period that starts from the small hit rush and does not end with the small hit rush and continues until the big hit period. Then, the pachinko gaming machine 10 can raise the mood of the player from the start of the small hit rush.

6. Subsequently, the pachinko gaming machine 10 is provided with a plurality of production modes (first challenge production mode, second challenge production mode, etc.) for the specific game.
In the final stage of the special game (end demo effect, etc.), it is possible to execute the effect mode selection effect (character selection effect, etc.) that selects the effect mode during the specific game.
If a new special game (fourth big hit, etc.) is acquired during the specific game after the selection effect, the specific game continuation related to the possibility of being controlled by the specific game as the game state after the new special game. Expectation suggestion effects (first challenge transition effect to third challenge transition effect, etc.) can be executed according to the effect mode selected in the effect mode selection effect.

Therefore, a new specific game (first specific game or second specific game) is newly executed according to the big hit (fourth big hit, etc.) during the specific game according to the effect determined by the selection effect (character selection effect, etc.). It is possible to provide an effect that suggests the degree of expectation (the degree of expectation for continuation of probability change). Then, it is possible to select the effect mode including the transition of the specific gaming state, in addition to the effect related to the selection of the effect mode.

It can also be said that the selection of such an effect mode is to select the effect mode to enter. Further, it can be said that such an invention notifies the continuation rate of a specific game after selecting the effect mode in the end demo effect of the jackpot. Further, in addition to the selection of the effect mode, it can be said that the effect of improving the player's expectation for the specific game is performed by the newly provided probability change continuation rate notification effect.

Further, in the case of the second specific game (a game mainly composed of special figure 2), in such an invention, since all the big hit symbols related to special figure 2 are composed of V easy symbols, 100 unless there is an accident hit. Since it is% probability change (V easy), it can be said that the probability change continuation expectation degree is indirectly notified by notifying the possibility of transition to the second specific game. Here, it is sufficient that the probability variation continuation rate of the second specific game is different (different) than that of the first specific game, and it is not essential that it is "100%". For example, the probability variation continuation rate according to the special figure 2 (second specific game) may be lower than that of the first specific game.

7. Subsequently, the pachinko gaming machine 10 is provided with a plurality of production modes (first challenge production mode, second challenge production mode, etc.) for the specific game.
In the final stage production (end demo production, etc.) during the special game, it is possible to execute the production mode selection production (character selection production, etc.) that selects the production mode during the specific game (first specific game, etc.).
Having another specific game (second specific game, etc.) that shifts when a predetermined condition (such as the number of electric support times reaching the transition number) is satisfied during the specific game after the effect mode selection effect. Therefore, after the selection effect, the notification regarding the predetermined condition is performed.

Therefore, after the effect mode selection effect, it is possible to make the effect when shifting from the specific game state to the specific game state excellent in taste. Then, in addition to the selection of the effect mode, it is possible to perform an effect of improving the player's expectation for the specific game by the notification effect of the transition condition to the second specific game newly provided.

In addition, as the production mode here, a challenge production mode (first challenge) of a type that shows information until the number of fluctuations reaches the number of transitions (information until the compound bonus is entered) without using specific numerical values. It is possible to provide a challenge production mode (second challenge production mode) of a type in which information up to the entry into the compound bonus is continuously and concretely indicated by a specific numerical value.

8. Next, the pachinko gaming machine 10 has a main control board and
A production control board that executes control related to the production based on a control command from the main control board is provided.
The main control board
When a game ball enters the starting port, a random number value is acquired and
Pre-determination information (advance notification information related to pre-reading, etc.) can be transmitted to the effect control board based on the entry into the starting port.
When a predetermined fluctuation start condition (such as the end of the symbol fluctuation performed earlier) is satisfied, a control command related to the fluctuation content (such as a command at the start of the symbol fluctuation of the special symbol) is sent to the effect control board. Can be sent and
The effect control board is
Based on the control command related to the fluctuation content, it is possible to determine the content of the effect to be executed according to the fluctuation display of the special symbol display device by the main control board.
Based on the pre-judgment information, it is possible to determine whether or not to execute the look-ahead effect and the execution content.
The pre-reading effect can be executed when all the pre-determination information for the hold that does not yet satisfy the fluctuation start condition is the information related to the loss.

For this reason, a look-ahead effect suitable for cases where all the information related to the hold, such as the above-mentioned "safety hold", "butterfly stay look-ahead (and look-ahead)", and "transparency countdown", is out of order is executed. It becomes possible. Then, in a situation where it is preferable for the player to be out of the game, such as in the first specific game, it is possible to enhance the taste by performing an effect of notifying that there is no hit in the hold.

9. Subsequently, the pachinko gaming machine 10 includes a production operation means (such as a lever device unit having an operation button) capable of inputting an operation for the production by the player.
It is provided with an effect control board capable of performing effect control based on the operation input to the effect operation means.
The effect control means can execute a continuous operation effect that progresses based on a continuous operation (long press, etc.) on the effect operation means or an opening operation for ending the continuous operation.
As the operation valid period of the effect operation means in the continuous operation effect, a first valid period (long press valid period, etc.) for prompting the player to perform the continuous operation on the effect operation means, and the opening operation are performed on the player. There is a second validity period (open validity period, etc.) to encourage
In the first valid period, based on the continuous operation of the effect operation means, the expectation suggestion information (background color, etc.), which is an effect display regarding the feasibility of the special game, is changed to a higher expectation. Enable and
In the second valid period, the effect display of the continuous operation effect (such as the effect using the development destination panel 414) is started based on the completion of the continuous operation for the effect operation means.

Therefore, it is possible to improve the taste of the change in the gaming state by the continuous operation and the opening operation of the effect operation means. Then, it becomes possible to provide a new button effect that expresses an appropriate effect according to the operation situation of the player in the button effect.

Here, in such an invention, after the open validity period, there is a step-up display period (such as a period in which the effect using the development destination panel is performed) before the display of the result, and the step of the long press validity period. It can be said that two types of step-up display are performed, including an up effect (change in background color, etc.). In addition, by interposing a step-up display period (such as a period during which an effect is performed using the development destination panel), it can be said that the result is not displayed immediately even if the release operation is performed during the long press valid period. ..

As described above, when the continuous operation of the effect operating means is completed in the first valid period (long press valid period) (when the operation button 22 is not operated (opened)), the continuous operation effect is performed. It is also possible not to start the production result display (such as the production using the development destination panel 414).

In addition, as described above, in a situation where no operation is performed on the effect operating means at the start timing of the second valid period (open valid period, etc.) (timing when the long press valid period shifts to the open valid period, etc.). , It is possible to prevent the player from displaying a message prompting the player to end the continuous operation (such as displaying "Release!").

Further, as described above, at the start of the second valid period (such as when the long press valid period shifts to the open valid period), no operation is performed on the directing operation means, and the directing is performed within the second valid period. When the continuous operation of the operation means is started (for example, when the operation button 22 is pressed after the opening valid period is entered), the effect result display of the special operation effect based on the end of the continuous operation (for example). It is also possible not to start the production using the development destination panel.

10. Subsequently, the pachinko gaming machine 10 is a text effect that displays character data that can be recognized by the player and gives a notification related to the execution expectation of the special game.
When executing the text effect, a vibration highlighting pattern is provided as an execution pattern that can be selected when the execution expectation of the special game is relatively high.
The vibration highlighting pattern of the text effect can vibrate and coordinately display the data recognized by the player as one character for the character data for each of a plurality of partial data.
In the vibration highlighting pattern of the text effect, a vibration pattern is set for each of the partial data to highlight the entire character string of the text effect.

Therefore, it is possible to perform a display (vibration coordinated display) that makes the entire character appear to be moving. Further, the character display can be changed in a mode other than the color and the pattern. As a result, the character display function can be increased, and the character identification function can be diversified.

As described above, such an effect is a pattern in which the text display is executed in at least one pattern of red, gold, and rainbow colors as an effect pattern in which the execution expectation of the special game is relatively high. Can be.

Further, in addition to this, image data (partial data) of a component of character data, character data that can be recognized by a player as one character, or character string data composed of a plurality of characters can be contoured. The inside (inside) of the region) can be configured as a transmission region. Then, red, gold, and rainbow-colored moving image data (or still image data) different from the contours (for example, black and white lines) related to the components of the text data are masked by the character data, and from the transparent region. Make it visible. By doing so, the display color and display pattern of the text can be composed of moving image data (or still image data).

Further, these various character-based effects can be applied to so-called text-based effects such as cut-in and dialogue notices (line notices).
<Other Embodiments>

The present invention is not limited to the various embodiments described above, and can be variously modified.

For example, in the above-mentioned pachinko gaming machine 10, all types of jackpots are 4R jackpots. By setting all 4Rs in this way, the number of balls acquired in the big hit can be reduced, and it becomes easy to adjust the balance with the relatively large amount of balls acquired in the small hit rush.

However, the present invention is not limited to this, and a plurality of types of jackpots having different numbers of rounds may be provided, for example, a jackpot of 4R and a jackpot of 10R. Then, for example, when a big hit of 10R is won, the big winning opening 90 is opened in the 1st to 4th rounds in a short opening time (about 1.2 seconds, etc.) similar to that of the small hit. Further, after performing an effect (result effect, etc.) that the player can perceive like a jackpot end demo, an effect (promotion effect) that is promoted is executed. Then, at the 5th to 10th rounds, it is possible to control the opening of the large winning opening 90 so that the opening is closed at 10 counts or 30 seconds.

Further, even when the type of big hit is only 4R, it is possible to make the opening time and the opening pattern of the big winning opening 90 different depending on the type of big hit. For example, with respect to the big hit (1st big hit to 3rd big hit) of the special figure 1, all four rounds are made to perform continuous opening (long opening) for about 29 seconds.

On the other hand, regarding the big hit (4th big hit) in Special Figure 2, one opening for 1.2 seconds and 11 closings for 1.5 seconds each (small hit fluctuation during the small hit rush). The closing time, which is close to the time from the start to the opening of the big winning opening 90 of the small hit game), shall be combined. That is, regarding the jackpot of Special Figure 2, it is assumed that 13.2 seconds (= 1.2 seconds x 11 times) is opened in each round.

Further, for the small hit provided only in the special figure 2, the opening for about 1.2 seconds is performed only once (1R). As for the small hit, the combination of the opening of about 1.2 and the closing of about 0.04 seconds is regarded as one small hit game.

Regarding the jackpot, the maximum number of rounds is set to 4R, and depending on the type of jackpot, it is possible to prepare for the jackpot game to end in the number of rounds less than 4R (3R, etc.). For example, it is possible to set the jackpot of special figure 1 to 4R and the jackpot of special figure 2 to 3R.

Further, in the pachinko gaming machine 10, the expected number of balls to be acquired is 400 for any of the first to fourth jackpots, but the number of balls to be acquired may be different for each jackpot. For example, the number of balls obtained from the first big hit to the third big hit can be 400, and the number of balls obtained from the fourth big hit can be 320.

In particular, as described above, the opening time and opening pattern of the big winning opening 90 are different between the big hit based on the special figure 1 and the big hit based on the special figure 2, and in each round of the big hit based on the special figure 2, the special figure Compared to the opening time (29 seconds, etc.) of each round in the case of a big hit based on 1, the opening time can be shortened (13.2, etc.) or the closing time (1.5 seconds x 11 times, etc.) can be added. In some cases, the number of balls obtained can be easily different.

Further, in the pachinko gaming machine 10, only one large winning opening 90 is used (singular), but the present invention is not limited to this, and it is possible to have a plurality of large winning openings 90 and provide the large winning openings 90 at a plurality of locations. is there. For example, it is possible to make the operating special electric accessory (large winning opening) different between the big hit based on the special figure 1 and the big hit or the small hit based on the special figure 2. Then, for the big hit of special figure 1, one big winning opening (for example, big winning opening 1) is used, and for the big hit and small hit of special figure 2, the other big winning opening (for example, big winning opening 2) is used. It is possible to use.

Further, with respect to the large winning opening 1, for example, the number of winning balls for one winning ball can be set to 11, and the number of counts that is a condition for ending the opening of the unit game (1R) can be set to 10. Further, with respect to the large winning opening 2, for example, the number of prize balls for one winning ball can be set to 15, and the number of counts that is a condition for ending the opening of the unit game (1R) can be set to 8.

Further, in the pachinko gaming machine 10, the 1-1 start winning opening 62A and the second starting winning opening 63 having no opening / closing mechanism, and the electric 1-2 starting winning opening 62B having an opening / closing mechanism are used. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and various types of winning openings can be adopted. In addition, various combinations are possible as the combination of the starting winning openings.

Further, the starting winning opening provided with the opening / closing mechanism is not limited to the electric type, but a non-electric type (so-called "type 2 non-electric accessory") can also be used. Here, the type 2 non-electric accessory is, for example, one that opens or expands the entrance of the winning opening other than the large winning opening 90 among the accessories other than the electric accessory, and the game ball is other than the winning opening. It operates when a player wins a prize in a specific winning opening or passes through a specific gate.

Then, for example, the first-two start winning opening 62B and the second starting winning opening 63 are provided with a second-class non-electric accessory instead of a normal electric accessory, and the opening frequency of each second-type non-electric accessory is increased. Make it different. Further, a right-handed hit allows the game ball to pass through an operating port provided in the upper right area of the game area 52, and a distribution mechanism provided separately in the general winning opening for the ordinary electric accessory (illustrated). (Omitted), the game ball is distributed to the flow path for operating the second type non-electric accessory of either the 1-2 start winning opening 62B or the second starting winning opening 63 according to the gaming state. Then, with the transition from the first specific gaming state to the second specific gaming state, the operation mode of the distribution mechanism in the general winning opening related to the ordinary electric accessory is configured to be different, and the 1-2 starting winning opening 62B By switching the opening ratio of the second type non-electric accessory provided in the second start winning opening 63, the starting opening used as the main body of the game can be changed from the 1-2 starting winning opening 62B to the second starting winning opening 63. Switch to.

In addition, it is assumed that there is a possibility of open operation for ordinary electric accessories in any gaming state, but the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, in a state where electric support is not performed (during non-electric support), It is also conceivable to set the winning probability of the normal symbol to 0 (zero), and control such that the normal symbol hit does not occur during non-electric support and the normal electric accessory does not open.

As for the large winning opening 90, various types can be adopted. For example, as the large winning opening 90, one that opens upward can be adopted. Further, as the large winning opening 90, a plurality of openings (openings in the large winning opening) such as a V region can be provided, and a game ball can be distributed to each opening according to the situation of the game.

Further, the large winning opening 90 is configured to be variable to a normal state in which the game ball cannot win or is difficult to win, and an open state in which the game ball is easy to win, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, a type (so-called tongue) that can take an advanced state in which a rod-shaped member provided in the large winning opening 90 protrudes toward the player side and a retracted state in which the rod-shaped member is retracted toward the player side. It may be a type attacker). This type of large winning opening is suitable when it is desired to ensure that the number of balls (counting number) entered into the large winning opening is a predetermined number (for example, 10).

Further, the large winning opening 90 is not limited to one having a V region inside thereof, and may be provided in the game region 52 separately from the V region. In this case, for example, a ball entry device having a game ball detection area (referred to as “V ball entry device” here) is added to a portion below the large winning opening 90 in the game area 52 (see FIG. 1). And provide. Further, at a predetermined timing such as at the end of a special game, the V-ball entry device is set to a state in which the game ball can be accepted, and when the game ball is detected by the V-ball entry device in this state, the subsequent probability state is changed. , Control so that it is in a probabilistic state over a predetermined period. Then, when the game ball does not enter the V entry device or when the game ball does not enter the predetermined area in the V entry device, the subsequent probability state is controlled so as not to become a probabilistic state. It is conceivable to do.

Further, in the pachinko gaming machine 10, the set value related to the degree of advantage of the player can be changed between "1" and "6". However, in the pachinko gaming machine 10, it is considered that the higher the set value and the higher the jackpot probability, the higher the probability that the jackpot will occur during the first specific game. Further, in the second specific game, the probability of occurrence of the fourth big hit is also increased, and it is considered that the period of the small hit rush is likely to be shortened. In other words, by providing the function of changing the setting, it is considered that the taste of the game returning to the second specific game or the first specific game after the first specific game cannot be fully exhibited. Therefore, the function of changing the setting is provided. It is also possible to avoid it.

Further, the gaming machine is not limited to the pachinko gaming machine as described above. For example, the present invention is a pachinko gaming machine in which a game ball as a game medium acquired by a player is paid out directly to the player as described above so that the player can touch the prize ball. It is also applicable to, for example, an enclosed circulation type pachinko gaming machine (managed gaming machine) in which a gaming ball is circulated and used inside the gaming machine. Further, as the enclosed circulation type pachinko gaming machine, an example capable of electromagnetically recording the entry and exit of the gaming medium can be exemplified.

Further, the present invention includes a plurality of reels in which a predetermined number of symbols are arranged, controls the rotation start and rotation stop of the reels based on the operation of the player, and plays a game such as a game medal according to the winning winning combination. It can also be applied to a slot machine (reel type gaming machine) that dispenses media (including storage in a storage device). When the present invention is applied to a slot machine, instead of the handle operation detection, the operation of a bet button that can be operated by the player at the time of betting setting can be detected, and the operation of the bet button can also be performed by the player at the time of betting setting. Based on the detection of the insertion of the game medal, it is possible to apply the effect output according to the state of the game machine. Further, the present invention can be applied to, for example, a casino machine installed in a casino facility.

10 Pachinko game machines, 20 launch handles, 50 game boards, 52 game areas,
53 Main control display device, 62A 1-1 start winning opening, 62B 1-2 starting winning opening,
63 2nd start winning opening, 70 1st special symbol display, 71 2nd special symbol display,
90 Grand Prize, 102 Main Board, 104 Sub Board, 113 First Win / Loss Judgment Means,
117 2nd hit / miss judgment means, 120 special game control means, 301 sub-main board,
302 sub-sub board, 501 main board CPU, 521 sub-main board CPU,
401 button image.

Claims (1)

A production operation means capable of inputting operations for production by a player, and
It is provided with an effect control means capable of performing effect control based on an operation input to the effect operation means.
The effect control means can execute a continuous operation effect that progresses based on a continuous operation to the effect operation means or an opening operation for ending the continuous operation.
As the operation valid period of the effect operation means in the continuous operation effect, a first valid period for prompting the player to perform the continuous operation for the effect operation means and a second valid period for prompting the player to perform the opening operation. And are provided,
In the first valid period, based on the continuous operation of the effect operation means, the expectation suggestion information which is the effect display regarding the feasibility of the special game can be changed to the one with higher expectation.
A gaming machine characterized in that, in the second valid period, the production result display of the continuous operation effect is started based on the completion of the continuous operation for the effect operation means.